Lamtec bt320 коды ошибок

5

Operating Control and Displays

2. Use keys

Display burner start-ups

1. Use keys in System Information menu

The display shows the «Start-up counter» menu window.

5.4.2

Display burner faults

1. Use cursor keys

2. Use keys

to select menu

The display shows the «Display operating hours» menu window.

Fig. 5-5 Display «Operating hours»

to confirm.

Fig. 5-6 Display «Start-up counter»

The display shows «Fault history selection» menu.

Fig. 5-7 Fault history selection menu

to select menu

The display shows «Fault history» menu.

17

and press ENTER

1

Pictogram operating hours

2

Total number of operating hours

(device connected to mains voltage)

3

No. of operating hours, oil operation

4

No. of operating hours, gas operation

to select menu

1

Pictogram burner start-up

2

No. of burner start-ups, oil operation

3

No. of burner start-ups, gas operation

to select menu

and press ENTER

1

Burner fault pictogram [selected]

and press ENTER

to confirm.

and press ENTER

to confirm.

to confirm.

Lamtec BurnerTronic BT320 Quick Reference

  1. Manuals
  2. Brands
  3. Lamtec Manuals
  4. Industrial Equipment
  5. BurnerTronic BT320
  6. Quick reference
  • Contents

  • Table of Contents

  • Bookmarks

Quick Links

Quick Refernce for

Endusers

Sensors uad Systems

for Combustion Engineering

BurnerTronic BT300

BT320…BT340

Related Manuals for Lamtec BurnerTronic BT320

Summary of Contents for Lamtec BurnerTronic BT320

  • Page 1
    Quick Refernce for BurnerTronic BT300 Endusers BT320…BT340 Sensors uad Systems for Combustion Engineering…
  • Page 3: Table Of Contents

    Table of Contents Table of Contents GENERAL INFORMATION ……..4 Validity of these Instructions.

  • Page 4
    Table of Contents Manual Menu Path …………24 Settings Menu Path .
  • Page 5: General Information

    General Information General Information Validity of these Instructions This manual is valid for the burner control system BurnerTronic BT300 in any configuration. The information contained in this document refer to the software versions BT300 v 3.0.0.0 and v 3.1 and UI300 v 3.1. If you use any other software version as mentioned previously some of the described functions may not be available or some available functions are not described in this manual.

  • Page 6: Safety

    LAMTEC GmbH & Co. KG is not liable for damages occurring as a result of non-compliance with the above instructions. Compliance with the above instructions shall not entail any ex- tension to the warranty and liability provisions of LAMTEC GmbH &…

  • Page 7: Safety Instructions — Common Information

    Safety Safety Instructions — Common Information The following symbols are used in this document to draw the user’s attention to important safe- ty information. They are located within the chapter where the information is required. It is es- sential that the safety information is adhered to, and that applies, in particular, to the warnings. DANGER! This draws the user’s attention to imminent danger.

  • Page 8: For Your Safety

    The BT300 is a safety device! The device must not be opened, interfered with or modified. LAMTEC assumes no liability for damages arising as a result of unauthorised interference! • After commissioning and after each maintenance action check the exhaust gas values across the entire power range.

  • Page 9: Security Advice — Mounting

    For Your Safety standards (by checking device parameters via operating elements or using remote-control software after commissioning). To verify settings you should also refer to manufacturer’s documentation of the combustion plant. Protecting the parameters in level 1 by setting a password will prevent any unauthorised change.

  • Page 10: Installation Notes

    For Your Safety Installation Notes • Lay high-voltage ignition cable always separately and in safe distance from device and other cables. • Only trained, qualified personnel may open the BurnerTronic’s cover. • Observe local and national regulations when wiring the electric cables inside the burner. •…

  • Page 11: Commissioning Notes

    For Your Safety Commissioning Notes • Check all safety functions during commissioning! • There is no feature to prevent RASTx connector plugs being transposed. Therefore en- sure the correct assignment of the plant’s plugs prior to commissioning. • Check electromagnetic emissions specific to the application. •…

  • Page 12: Basic Device

    For Your Safety 3.5.2 Basic Device Check the following items prior to commissioning: • Valves must be assigned correctly to valve outputs on BT300. • Correct setting of time parameters (especially safety and pre-ventilation times). • Flame sensor functioning well in case of flame blow-off during operation (incl. flame-out response time) or when parasitic light is present during pre-ventilation period and also at a missing flame formation while end of safety period starts.

  • Page 13: Checking Burner Sequencer Part

    For Your Safety 3.6.3 Checking Burner Sequencer Part Check the following: • Correct setting of time parameters (especially safety and pre-ventilation periods). • Whether an ionisation flame sensor or a corresponding flame scanner is used since only these are capable of running in continuous operation. •…

  • Page 14: Functional Description

    Functional Description Functional Description BT300 combines the benefits of an electronic fuel/air ratio control system with up to three mo- torised actuator elements and optional modules like an analogue output for speed control of the combustion air fan with an electronic burner control unit. The leakage test, flame monitor- ing system, power control unit and (optional) CO/O controller for control and optimisation of an oil or gas-fired forced-draught burner are all integrated.

  • Page 15: Operating Control And Displays

    Operating Control and Displays Operating Control and Displays UI300 User Interface Display BACK key Cursor keys ENTER key Fig. 5-1 User Interface Display The display shows in pictograms: • the menu structure • operating status • parameters • error messages Back key Jump to previous window.

  • Page 16: Menu Functions

    Operating Control and Displays Menu Functions The menu is divided into three paths: INFO MANUAL SETTINGS INFO Select INFO path for information about the following: • Burner • Faults/Fault history • Software version • Display of check sums • Serial number •…

  • Page 17: Main Menu

    Operating Control and Displays Main Menu INFORMATION menu path [selected] Display of fuel type Bar graph of internal firing-rate in % (0 — 100) MANUAL menu path Access level 2 SETTINGS menu path Window number Fig. 5-2 Main menu 1. Use cursor keys to select a menu and press ENTER to confirm.

  • Page 18: Recall Fault History

    Operating Control and Displays 2. Use keys to select menu and press ENTER to confirm. The display shows the «Display operating hours» menu window. Pictogram operating hours Total number of operating hours (device connected to mains voltage) No. of operating hours, oil operation No.

  • Page 19: Software Version

    Operating Control and Displays Error code-display pictogram Fault code (Last 10 faults are stored, no. 01 is the latest fault) Diagnostic code 1 Diagnostic code 2 No. of operating hours when fault has oc- cured Fig. 5-8 Fault history menu NOTICE! Information concerning fault and diagnostic codes you may find in the list of fault codes.

  • Page 20: Display Of Check Sums

    Operating Control and Displays 5.4.4 Display of Check Sums Display check sum 1. Use cursor keys to select menu and press ENTER to confirm. The display shows «CRC16 check sums» menu. Check sums pictogram Check sum, access level 0 Check sum, access level 1 Check sum, access level 2 Check sum, access level 4 Fig.

  • Page 21: Positions Of Actuators

    Operating Control and Displays 5.4.6 Positions of Actuators Display positions of actuators 1. Use the cursor keys to select menu and press ENTER to confirm. The display shows the «Actuators» menu. Actuator pictogram Actuator channel 1 (oil) Actuator channel 2 (air) Actuator channel 3 (oil) Optional channel (OFF;…

  • Page 22
    Operating Control and Displays Digital inputs pictogram Jump to next page Fuel selection oil [no] Fuel selection gas [yes] Burner start [yes] — terminal X10 Fig. 5-14 Page 1 of inputs menu NOTICE! Signals of points 3 and 4 are «logical» signals and not «physical» ones. Background informa- tion: Some signals may have more than one source (terminal, LSB, field buses, parameters).
  • Page 23: Digital Outputs

    Operating Control and Displays NOTICE! Signals of points 4 and 5 in Fig. 5-15 Page 2 of inputs menu are «logical» signals, not «physi- cal». The BT320/330 supports either oil or gas operation, but cannot be switched. Therefore no separate signals for the oil or gas safety interlock chain are generated. The signal on ter- minal X06 is thus generally known as burner‘s safety interlock chain.

  • Page 24
    Operating Control and Displays Call up 2 page of outputs 1. Use the cursor keys to select the next page and press ENTER to confirm. The display shows «Page 2 digital outputs» menu: Digital outputs pictogram Jump to previous page Jump to next page Oil valve 1 [on] — terminal X01 Oil valve 2 [off] — terminal X02…
  • Page 25: Manual Menu Path

    Operating Control and Displays Manual Menu Path MANUAL Select MANUAL path to carry out actions as follows: Switching burner ON and OFF Presetting of burner firing-rate Display MANUAL menu 1. Use cursor keys to select path and press ENTER to confirm. The display shows the «Manual operation»…

  • Page 26: Settings Menu Path

    Operating Control and Displays Settings Menu Path Display SETTINGS menu 1. Use cursor keys to select menu and press ENTER to confirm. The display shows the menu overview. Password pictogram (selected) Delete curves Display program settings Firing-rate controller settings Configuration of read-out actuator outputs Password settings Curve settings…

  • Page 27: Program Sequence

    Operating Control and Displays 5.6.2 Program Sequence Configure program sequence 1. Use cursor keys to select menu and press ENTER to confirm. The display shows the program sequence overview. Duration of pre-ventilation [selected] Pilot burner oil operation Duration of post-ventilation Valve leakage test Pilot burner gas operation Fig.

  • Page 28
    Operating Control and Displays UI300 pictogram BT300 pictogram Cancel (backwards) Parameter number UI300 Parameter number UI300 Transfer by pressing ENTER (flashing) Value for UI300 Fig. 5-27 Secure data transfer Value for BT300 NOTICE! Apply value only if the values for UI300 and BT300 are identical! The parameter value must be confirmed by pressing ENTER within the countdown (8 s)! 5.
  • Page 29
    Operating Control and Displays Pictogram UI300 Pictogram BT300 Parameter number UI300 Parameter number BT300 Pictogram apply parameters Value BT300 Value UI300 Fig. 5-29 Display of invalid data transfer Set duration of post-ventilation 1. Use cursor keys to select menu and press ENTER to confirm.
  • Page 30
    Operating Control and Displays NOTICE! You require access level 2 to make settings in this function! Accept or discard the entry! Activate valve leakage test prior to ignition 1. Use cursor keys to select menu and press ENTER to confirm. 2.
  • Page 31
    Operating Control and Displays Valve leakage test period 1. Use cursor keys to select menu and press ENTER to confirm. The display shows the valve leakage test period menu. Valve leakage test period pictogram Set valve leakage test period Press ENTER to accept settings Fig.
  • Page 32
    Operating Control and Displays Pilot burner in oil operation pictogram Activate pilot burner in oil operation Press ENTER to accept settings Fig. 5-36 Pilot burner in oil operation menu NOTICE! You require access level 2 to make settings in this function! Accept or discard the entry! Configuration of actuating outputs 1.
  • Page 33
    Operating Control and Displays 2. Use cursor keys to set firing-rate point and press ENTER to confirm. Set-point channel 1 is chosen (displayed inversely). 3. Use cursor keys to set channels’ actuator position. 4. Use cursor keys to switch to next channel. 5.
  • Page 34
    Operating Control and Displays NOTICE! During multi-stage operation, the following points are available: Ignition point 1 (first stage), 1  2 (valve switch-on point, second stage), 1  2 (valve switch-off point, second stage) 2 (second level), 2  3 (valve switch-on point, third stage), 2 …
  • Page 35
    Operating Control and Displays Set staged oil operation — transition from 1 to 2 stage Display valve switch-on point, 2 stage Setpoint, air damper position Actual value, air damper position Fig. 5-41 Transition from 1 to 2 stage 1. Select the setpoint for the air damper position and press ENTER to confirm.
  • Page 36
    Operating Control and Displays The display shows the confirmation prompt: Back to previous menu Deleting values [selected] Proceed with deleting values Fig. 5-43 Confirmation prompt of deleting curves menu 2. Press ENTER The curve values will be deleted. The display shows the values deleted menu. Values deleted Fig.
  • Page 37: Other Displays

    Operating Control and Displays 5.6.3 Other Displays No connection between UI300 and BT300 UI300 User Interface pictogram No connection symbol BT300 burner control Fig. 5-46 No connection Display shown e.g. when using LSB remote software and communication between BT300 and UI300 is temporarily unavailable.

  • Page 38: Leakage Test For Main Gas Valves

    Leakage Test for Main Gas Valves Leakage Test for Main Gas Valves Calculation Example An (approximate) formula for calculating the leakage test monitoring facility is summarised be- low: Definitions: GDW: gas pressure monitor gas-side safety shut-off device burner-side safety shut-off device barometric air pressure <…

  • Page 39: Leakage Test With Ventilation Via Roof

    Leakage Test for Main Gas Valves Leakage Test with Ventilation Via Roof The leakage test checks whether or not the main gas valves are leakproof. For this purpose the gas pressure of the supply is analysed. As leakage test section (space between the two main valves) burns empty whenever the burn- er is switched off, this part is usually pressureless at start-up (gas pressure >…

  • Page 40
    Leakage Test for Main Gas Valves Fig. 6-1 Leakage test process diagram…
  • Page 41: Exhaust Of Test Line Over The Roof

    Leakage Test for Main Gas Valves Exhaust of Test Line Over the Roof NOTICE! Consider diameter of gas line in the roof ventilation. For ventilation, plug X02 is activated for 3 s. Make sure that this period is sufficient even for smallest ventilation line diameter! Fig.

  • Page 42: Technical Data

    Technical Data Technical Data Technical Data BT300 Function Power supply: 230 V +10/-15 % 47-63 Hz 115 V +10/-15 % 47-63 Hz (on request) Maximum backup-fuse: 10 A slow-blow To be used only in a grounded power line network! Power consumption: max.

  • Page 43: Actuators 662R550

    Technical Data Environmental Conditions Storage: Climatic conditions Class 1K3 according to DIN EN 60721-3 Mechanic conditions Class 1M2 according to DIN EN 60721-3 Temperature range -20 … +70 °C (no condensation) Electronic safety: Degree of protection (DIN EN 60529): BT300 – IP40 housing IP20 terminals UI300 –…

  • Page 44: Actuators 662R5001

    Technical Data NOTICE! Damaging the 0,8 Nm actuator by opening the actuator. If you open the actuator at another part as the cover of the electric connection, you will dam- age the actuator.  Do not open the actuator but at the cover of the electric connection. Actuators 662R5001…

  • Page 45
    Technical Data Environmental conditions 662R5001…/662R5003…/662R5009… Repeat frequency 2,5 kHz Electrical safety Protection class 2 as per DIN EN 60730 NOTICE! Damage of the actuator due to opening the actuators housing. You will damage the actuator, if you open the actuator’s housing at another (this affects actu- ators with 1,2, 3,0 and 9,0 Nm).
  • Page 46
    Technical Data…
  • Page 48
    The information in this publication is subject to technical changes. LAMTEC Meß- und Regeltechnik LAMTEC Leipzig GmbH & Co. KG Presented by: für Feuerungen GmbH & Co. KG Wiesenstraße 6 Portitzer Straße 69 D-69190 Walldorf D-04425 Taucha Phone: +49 (0) 6227 / 6052-0…

Lamtec BurnerTronic BT320 Quick Reference

  1. Manuals
  2. Brands
  3. Lamtec Manuals
  4. Industrial Equipment
  5. BurnerTronic BT320
  6. Quick reference
  • Contents

  • Table of Contents

  • Bookmarks

Quick Links

Quick Refernce for

Endusers

Sensors uad Systems

for Combustion Engineering

BurnerTronic BT300

BT320…BT340

Related Manuals for Lamtec BurnerTronic BT320

Summary of Contents for Lamtec BurnerTronic BT320

  • Page 1
    Quick Refernce for BurnerTronic BT300 Endusers BT320…BT340 Sensors uad Systems for Combustion Engineering…
  • Page 3: Table Of Contents

    Table of Contents Table of Contents GENERAL INFORMATION ……..4 Validity of these Instructions.

  • Page 4
    Table of Contents Manual Menu Path …………24 Settings Menu Path .
  • Page 5: General Information

    General Information General Information Validity of these Instructions This manual is valid for the burner control system BurnerTronic BT300 in any configuration. The information contained in this document refer to the software versions BT300 v 3.0.0.0 and v 3.1 and UI300 v 3.1. If you use any other software version as mentioned previously some of the described functions may not be available or some available functions are not described in this manual.

  • Page 6: Safety

    LAMTEC GmbH & Co. KG is not liable for damages occurring as a result of non-compliance with the above instructions. Compliance with the above instructions shall not entail any ex- tension to the warranty and liability provisions of LAMTEC GmbH &…

  • Page 7: Safety Instructions — Common Information

    Safety Safety Instructions — Common Information The following symbols are used in this document to draw the user’s attention to important safe- ty information. They are located within the chapter where the information is required. It is es- sential that the safety information is adhered to, and that applies, in particular, to the warnings. DANGER! This draws the user’s attention to imminent danger.

  • Page 8: For Your Safety

    The BT300 is a safety device! The device must not be opened, interfered with or modified. LAMTEC assumes no liability for damages arising as a result of unauthorised interference! • After commissioning and after each maintenance action check the exhaust gas values across the entire power range.

  • Page 9: Security Advice — Mounting

    For Your Safety standards (by checking device parameters via operating elements or using remote-control software after commissioning). To verify settings you should also refer to manufacturer’s documentation of the combustion plant. Protecting the parameters in level 1 by setting a password will prevent any unauthorised change.

  • Page 10: Installation Notes

    For Your Safety Installation Notes • Lay high-voltage ignition cable always separately and in safe distance from device and other cables. • Only trained, qualified personnel may open the BurnerTronic’s cover. • Observe local and national regulations when wiring the electric cables inside the burner. •…

  • Page 11: Commissioning Notes

    For Your Safety Commissioning Notes • Check all safety functions during commissioning! • There is no feature to prevent RASTx connector plugs being transposed. Therefore en- sure the correct assignment of the plant’s plugs prior to commissioning. • Check electromagnetic emissions specific to the application. •…

  • Page 12: Basic Device

    For Your Safety 3.5.2 Basic Device Check the following items prior to commissioning: • Valves must be assigned correctly to valve outputs on BT300. • Correct setting of time parameters (especially safety and pre-ventilation times). • Flame sensor functioning well in case of flame blow-off during operation (incl. flame-out response time) or when parasitic light is present during pre-ventilation period and also at a missing flame formation while end of safety period starts.

  • Page 13: Checking Burner Sequencer Part

    For Your Safety 3.6.3 Checking Burner Sequencer Part Check the following: • Correct setting of time parameters (especially safety and pre-ventilation periods). • Whether an ionisation flame sensor or a corresponding flame scanner is used since only these are capable of running in continuous operation. •…

  • Page 14: Functional Description

    Functional Description Functional Description BT300 combines the benefits of an electronic fuel/air ratio control system with up to three mo- torised actuator elements and optional modules like an analogue output for speed control of the combustion air fan with an electronic burner control unit. The leakage test, flame monitor- ing system, power control unit and (optional) CO/O controller for control and optimisation of an oil or gas-fired forced-draught burner are all integrated.

  • Page 15: Operating Control And Displays

    Operating Control and Displays Operating Control and Displays UI300 User Interface Display BACK key Cursor keys ENTER key Fig. 5-1 User Interface Display The display shows in pictograms: • the menu structure • operating status • parameters • error messages Back key Jump to previous window.

  • Page 16: Menu Functions

    Operating Control and Displays Menu Functions The menu is divided into three paths: INFO MANUAL SETTINGS INFO Select INFO path for information about the following: • Burner • Faults/Fault history • Software version • Display of check sums • Serial number •…

  • Page 17: Main Menu

    Operating Control and Displays Main Menu INFORMATION menu path [selected] Display of fuel type Bar graph of internal firing-rate in % (0 — 100) MANUAL menu path Access level 2 SETTINGS menu path Window number Fig. 5-2 Main menu 1. Use cursor keys to select a menu and press ENTER to confirm.

  • Page 18: Recall Fault History

    Operating Control and Displays 2. Use keys to select menu and press ENTER to confirm. The display shows the «Display operating hours» menu window. Pictogram operating hours Total number of operating hours (device connected to mains voltage) No. of operating hours, oil operation No.

  • Page 19: Software Version

    Operating Control and Displays Error code-display pictogram Fault code (Last 10 faults are stored, no. 01 is the latest fault) Diagnostic code 1 Diagnostic code 2 No. of operating hours when fault has oc- cured Fig. 5-8 Fault history menu NOTICE! Information concerning fault and diagnostic codes you may find in the list of fault codes.

  • Page 20: Display Of Check Sums

    Operating Control and Displays 5.4.4 Display of Check Sums Display check sum 1. Use cursor keys to select menu and press ENTER to confirm. The display shows «CRC16 check sums» menu. Check sums pictogram Check sum, access level 0 Check sum, access level 1 Check sum, access level 2 Check sum, access level 4 Fig.

  • Page 21: Positions Of Actuators

    Operating Control and Displays 5.4.6 Positions of Actuators Display positions of actuators 1. Use the cursor keys to select menu and press ENTER to confirm. The display shows the «Actuators» menu. Actuator pictogram Actuator channel 1 (oil) Actuator channel 2 (air) Actuator channel 3 (oil) Optional channel (OFF;…

  • Page 22
    Operating Control and Displays Digital inputs pictogram Jump to next page Fuel selection oil [no] Fuel selection gas [yes] Burner start [yes] — terminal X10 Fig. 5-14 Page 1 of inputs menu NOTICE! Signals of points 3 and 4 are «logical» signals and not «physical» ones. Background informa- tion: Some signals may have more than one source (terminal, LSB, field buses, parameters).
  • Page 23: Digital Outputs

    Operating Control and Displays NOTICE! Signals of points 4 and 5 in Fig. 5-15 Page 2 of inputs menu are «logical» signals, not «physi- cal». The BT320/330 supports either oil or gas operation, but cannot be switched. Therefore no separate signals for the oil or gas safety interlock chain are generated. The signal on ter- minal X06 is thus generally known as burner‘s safety interlock chain.

  • Page 24
    Operating Control and Displays Call up 2 page of outputs 1. Use the cursor keys to select the next page and press ENTER to confirm. The display shows «Page 2 digital outputs» menu: Digital outputs pictogram Jump to previous page Jump to next page Oil valve 1 [on] — terminal X01 Oil valve 2 [off] — terminal X02…
  • Page 25: Manual Menu Path

    Operating Control and Displays Manual Menu Path MANUAL Select MANUAL path to carry out actions as follows: Switching burner ON and OFF Presetting of burner firing-rate Display MANUAL menu 1. Use cursor keys to select path and press ENTER to confirm. The display shows the «Manual operation»…

  • Page 26: Settings Menu Path

    Operating Control and Displays Settings Menu Path Display SETTINGS menu 1. Use cursor keys to select menu and press ENTER to confirm. The display shows the menu overview. Password pictogram (selected) Delete curves Display program settings Firing-rate controller settings Configuration of read-out actuator outputs Password settings Curve settings…

  • Page 27: Program Sequence

    Operating Control and Displays 5.6.2 Program Sequence Configure program sequence 1. Use cursor keys to select menu and press ENTER to confirm. The display shows the program sequence overview. Duration of pre-ventilation [selected] Pilot burner oil operation Duration of post-ventilation Valve leakage test Pilot burner gas operation Fig.

  • Page 28
    Operating Control and Displays UI300 pictogram BT300 pictogram Cancel (backwards) Parameter number UI300 Parameter number UI300 Transfer by pressing ENTER (flashing) Value for UI300 Fig. 5-27 Secure data transfer Value for BT300 NOTICE! Apply value only if the values for UI300 and BT300 are identical! The parameter value must be confirmed by pressing ENTER within the countdown (8 s)! 5.
  • Page 29
    Operating Control and Displays Pictogram UI300 Pictogram BT300 Parameter number UI300 Parameter number BT300 Pictogram apply parameters Value BT300 Value UI300 Fig. 5-29 Display of invalid data transfer Set duration of post-ventilation 1. Use cursor keys to select menu and press ENTER to confirm.
  • Page 30
    Operating Control and Displays NOTICE! You require access level 2 to make settings in this function! Accept or discard the entry! Activate valve leakage test prior to ignition 1. Use cursor keys to select menu and press ENTER to confirm. 2.
  • Page 31
    Operating Control and Displays Valve leakage test period 1. Use cursor keys to select menu and press ENTER to confirm. The display shows the valve leakage test period menu. Valve leakage test period pictogram Set valve leakage test period Press ENTER to accept settings Fig.
  • Page 32
    Operating Control and Displays Pilot burner in oil operation pictogram Activate pilot burner in oil operation Press ENTER to accept settings Fig. 5-36 Pilot burner in oil operation menu NOTICE! You require access level 2 to make settings in this function! Accept or discard the entry! Configuration of actuating outputs 1.
  • Page 33
    Operating Control and Displays 2. Use cursor keys to set firing-rate point and press ENTER to confirm. Set-point channel 1 is chosen (displayed inversely). 3. Use cursor keys to set channels’ actuator position. 4. Use cursor keys to switch to next channel. 5.
  • Page 34
    Operating Control and Displays NOTICE! During multi-stage operation, the following points are available: Ignition point 1 (first stage), 1  2 (valve switch-on point, second stage), 1  2 (valve switch-off point, second stage) 2 (second level), 2  3 (valve switch-on point, third stage), 2 …
  • Page 35
    Operating Control and Displays Set staged oil operation — transition from 1 to 2 stage Display valve switch-on point, 2 stage Setpoint, air damper position Actual value, air damper position Fig. 5-41 Transition from 1 to 2 stage 1. Select the setpoint for the air damper position and press ENTER to confirm.
  • Page 36
    Operating Control and Displays The display shows the confirmation prompt: Back to previous menu Deleting values [selected] Proceed with deleting values Fig. 5-43 Confirmation prompt of deleting curves menu 2. Press ENTER The curve values will be deleted. The display shows the values deleted menu. Values deleted Fig.
  • Page 37: Other Displays

    Operating Control and Displays 5.6.3 Other Displays No connection between UI300 and BT300 UI300 User Interface pictogram No connection symbol BT300 burner control Fig. 5-46 No connection Display shown e.g. when using LSB remote software and communication between BT300 and UI300 is temporarily unavailable.

  • Page 38: Leakage Test For Main Gas Valves

    Leakage Test for Main Gas Valves Leakage Test for Main Gas Valves Calculation Example An (approximate) formula for calculating the leakage test monitoring facility is summarised be- low: Definitions: GDW: gas pressure monitor gas-side safety shut-off device burner-side safety shut-off device barometric air pressure <…

  • Page 39: Leakage Test With Ventilation Via Roof

    Leakage Test for Main Gas Valves Leakage Test with Ventilation Via Roof The leakage test checks whether or not the main gas valves are leakproof. For this purpose the gas pressure of the supply is analysed. As leakage test section (space between the two main valves) burns empty whenever the burn- er is switched off, this part is usually pressureless at start-up (gas pressure >…

  • Page 40
    Leakage Test for Main Gas Valves Fig. 6-1 Leakage test process diagram…
  • Page 41: Exhaust Of Test Line Over The Roof

    Leakage Test for Main Gas Valves Exhaust of Test Line Over the Roof NOTICE! Consider diameter of gas line in the roof ventilation. For ventilation, plug X02 is activated for 3 s. Make sure that this period is sufficient even for smallest ventilation line diameter! Fig.

  • Page 42: Technical Data

    Technical Data Technical Data Technical Data BT300 Function Power supply: 230 V +10/-15 % 47-63 Hz 115 V +10/-15 % 47-63 Hz (on request) Maximum backup-fuse: 10 A slow-blow To be used only in a grounded power line network! Power consumption: max.

  • Page 43: Actuators 662R550

    Technical Data Environmental Conditions Storage: Climatic conditions Class 1K3 according to DIN EN 60721-3 Mechanic conditions Class 1M2 according to DIN EN 60721-3 Temperature range -20 … +70 °C (no condensation) Electronic safety: Degree of protection (DIN EN 60529): BT300 – IP40 housing IP20 terminals UI300 –…

  • Page 44: Actuators 662R5001

    Technical Data NOTICE! Damaging the 0,8 Nm actuator by opening the actuator. If you open the actuator at another part as the cover of the electric connection, you will dam- age the actuator.  Do not open the actuator but at the cover of the electric connection. Actuators 662R5001…

  • Page 45
    Technical Data Environmental conditions 662R5001…/662R5003…/662R5009… Repeat frequency 2,5 kHz Electrical safety Protection class 2 as per DIN EN 60730 NOTICE! Damage of the actuator due to opening the actuators housing. You will damage the actuator, if you open the actuator’s housing at another (this affects actu- ators with 1,2, 3,0 and 9,0 Nm).
  • Page 46
    Technical Data…
  • Page 48
    The information in this publication is subject to technical changes. LAMTEC Meß- und Regeltechnik LAMTEC Leipzig GmbH & Co. KG Presented by: für Feuerungen GmbH & Co. KG Wiesenstraße 6 Portitzer Straße 69 D-69190 Walldorf D-04425 Taucha Phone: +49 (0) 6227 / 6052-0…
Quick Refernce for  
Endusers
BurnerTronic BT300 
BT320...BT340
Sensors uad Systems 
for Combustion Engineering 
2
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
1 GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4
1.1 Validity of these Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.2 Life Cycle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.3 Disposal Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
2 SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  5
2.1 German Law on Device Safety  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.2 Safety Instructions - Common Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
3 FOR YOUR SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  7
3.1 Mounting Notes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
3.2 Security Advice - Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
3.3 Installation Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
3.4 Electrical Connection Flame Sensor  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
3.5 Commissioning Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
3.5.1 Fuel/Air Ratio Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
3.5.2 Basic Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
3.6 Tasks fulfilled by "authority on the subject" during Approval Test  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
3.6.1 Checking for Correct Parameterisation in System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
3.6.2 Checking the Fuel/Air Ratio Control System  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
3.6.3 Checking Burner Sequencer Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
4 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  13
5 OPERATING CONTROL AND DISPLAYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  14
5.1 UI300 User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
5.2 Menu Functions  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
5.3 Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
5.4 Information Menu Path. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
5.4.1 Burner Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
5.4.2 Recall Fault History. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
5.4.3 Software Version  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
5.4.4 Display of Check Sums. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
5.4.5 Serial Number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
5.4.6 Positions of Actuators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
5.4.7 Check Digital Inputs/Outputs  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
5.4.8 Digital Outputs  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
3
Table of Contents
5.5 Manual Menu Path  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
5.6 Settings Menu Path  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
5.6.1 Enter Password  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
5.6.2 Program Sequence. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
5.6.3 Other Displays  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
6 LEAKAGE TEST FOR MAIN GAS VALVES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  37
6.1 Calculation Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
6.2 Leakage Test with Ventilation Via Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
6.3 Exhaust of Test Line Over the Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
7 TECHNICAL DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  41
7.1 Technical Data BT300. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
7.2 Actuators 662R550...  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
7.3 Actuators 662R5001... / 662R5003... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
4
1   General Information
1 General Information
1.1 Validity of these Instructions
This manual is valid for the burner control system BurnerTronic BT300 in any configuration.
The information contained in this document refer to the software versions BT300 v 3.0.0.0 and 
v 3.1 and UI300 v 3.1. If you use any other software version as mentioned previously some of 
the described functions may not be available or some available functions are not described in 
this manual. 
1.2 Life Cycle
BurnerTronic BT300 burner management system has a designed lifetime 
*
of 250,000 burner 
start-up cycles, which, under normal operating conditions in heating mode, correspond to ap-
prox. 10 years of usage (starting from the production date given on the type plate). 
This lifetime is based on the endurance tests specified in standard EN230/EN298 and the ta-
ble containing the relevant test documentation as published by the European Association of 
Component Manufacturers (Afecor) (www.afecor.org).
The designed lifetime is based on use of BT300 according to the manufacturer’s basic docu-
mentation. After reaching designed lifetime in terms of number of burner start-up cycles, or 
the respective time of usage, the BT300 must be replaced by authorized personnel.
1.3 Disposal Notes
*
The designed lifetime is not the warranty time specified in the Terms of Delivery
The unit contains electrical and electronic components and must not be disposed of  
together with household waste. Observe local and currently valid legislation.
5
2  Safety
2 Safety
2.1 German Law on Device Safety
The German Law on Device Safety regulates the following:
Note the instructions for use! 
Use the device only in compliance with the instructions, which are contained in this document 
for BT300 (publication no. DLT1206-13-aEN-008).
Use the device only for the purpose described in this documentation.
Used by trained personnel only. 
Only persons whose knowledge and training qualifies them to do so, are allowed to operate 
and service the device. Note the safety regulations of the burner manufacturer.
To be used in a grounded power line network only!
Electrical connection with devices not mentioned in this manual - only after direct inquiry to 
the manufacturer or an authorized expert.
Liability for the function of the device shall be transferred to the owner or user. 
Liability for the function of the device shall be borne by the owner or user insofar as the device 
has been used by persons without the necessary knowledge, has been improperly used, ser-
viced or repaired or has been handled in a manner that does not conform to proper use. 
Modifications to the device with type approval render the type approval null and void. Inputs 
and outputs of the device and associated modules may only be connected as indicated in this 
manual.
LAMTEC GmbH & Co. KG is not liable for damages occurring as a result of non-compliance 
with the above instructions. Compliance with the above instructions shall not entail any ex-
tension to the warranty and liability provisions of LAMTEC GmbH & Co. KG's terms of sale 
and delivery. 
Insofar as reference is made to laws, regulations and standards, the basis for these shall be 
the law of the Federal Republic of Germany.
6
2  Safety
2.2 Safety Instructions - Common Information
The following symbols are used in this document to draw the user's attention to important safe-
ty information. They are located within the chapter where the information is required. It is es-
sential that the safety information is adhered to, and that applies, in particular, to the warnings.
DANGER!
This draws the user's attention to imminent danger. If it is not avoided, it will result in death or 
very serious injury. The plant or something in its surroundings could be damaged.
WARNING!
This draws the user's attention to the possibility of imminent danger. If it is not avoided, it may 
result in death or very serious injury. The plant or something in its surroundings could be dam-
aged.
CAUTION!
This draws the user's attention to the possibility of imminent danger. If it is not avoided, it may 
result in minor injuries. The plant or something in its surroundings could be damaged.
NOTICE!
This draws the user's attention to important additional information about the system or system 
components and offers further tips.
The safety information described above is incorporated into the instructions.
In this connection, the operator is requested to:
1 Comply with the accident prevention regulations whenever work is being carried out.
2 Do everything possible in the circumstances to prevent personal injury and damage to 
property.
7
3   For Your Safety
3 For Your Safety
Please observe the safety instructions to avoid personal injury and damage to property and 
the environment! 
The BT300 is a safety device! The device must not be opened, interfered with or modified. 
LAMTEC assumes no liability for damages arising as a result of unauthorised interference! 
• After commissioning and after each maintenance action check the exhaust gas values 
across the entire power range. 
• Qualified specialist staff are required to carry out all activities (assembly, installation, ser-
vicing, etc.).
• The burner or boiler manufacturer will ensure that the BT300 base unit is compliant with 
protection class IP40 or IP54 for outdoor use in accordance with DIN EN 60 529.
• Before working in the connection area, switch off the power supply to the plant from all 
poles. Ensure that it cannot be switched back on and that the plant is voltage-free. There 
is a risk of electric shock when the plant is not switched off.
• Place and secure the protection against contact on the BT300 and on all connected elec-
trical parts. The cover must fulfil the design, stability and protection requirements of 
EN 60730. 
• Plug connectors X30 - X34 have no protective separation from the mains voltage. To re-
place or disconnect the plug connectors, all poles of the plant must be disconnected from 
the mains.
• After each activity (e.g. assembly, installation, servicing, etc.) check the wiring and  
parameterisation to make sure it is in good working condition.
• If the equipment is dropped or suffers impact, you should no longer commission it. The 
safety functions may also be impaired but fail to show any obvious external damage.
• When the ratio curves are being programmed, the adjuster will continually monitor the 
quality of the plant's combustion (e.g. using an exhaust gas analysis station). In the event 
that the combustion values are inadequate or the conditions are potentially harmful, the 
adjuster will take suitable action, e.g. switch off the system manually.
• These operating instructions describe many possible applications and functions and 
should be used as guidelines. Carry out functional tests on the test bench and/or in the 
plant application to ensure correct functioning and document the results. 
Follow additional instructions to guarantee safety and reliability while operating the BT300:
• Condensation and humidity are to be avoided. If necessary, make sure that the installation 
is sufficiently dry before you switch it on.
• Avoid static charge having a destructive effect in case of touching the device's electronic 
components.
NOTICE!
LAMTEC recommends that you use ESD equipment while working on electrics/electronics.
3.1 Mounting Notes
• Please consider protection against contact when installing the BT300. Protection classes 
as IP 40 - IP 54 are minimum requirements for outdoor use in accordance with EN 60529 
and therefore obligatory.
• The protective cover of the BurnerTronic may only be opened by trained, qualified person-
nel.
• Make sure that settings for safety-relevant parameters are set in line with the requirements 
applicable to each type of combustion requiring monitoring and conform to the applicable 
8
3   For Your Safety
standards (by checking device parameters via operating elements or using remote-control 
software after commissioning). To verify settings you should also refer to manufacturer’s 
documentation of the combustion plant. Protecting the parameters in level 1 by setting a 
password will prevent any unauthorised change.
• Save setting values for the actuating elements across the power range of the burner as 
follows:
– Quantity of fuel
– Quantity of air
– All additional, safety-relevant actuating variables of the combustion
– While burner is modulating with at least five different firing-rate points
• Make sure that the combustion equipment operates stably and safely throughout the pow-
er range and in all combustion modes. For this purpose you should adjust the following 
values correctly:
– Actuating elements
– Parameter settings of the CO/O
2
controller
– Combustion chamber pressure
– Fuel pressure
– Temperature
– Pressure of combustion air
– Heating value of fuel
• Ensure the connection between the actuators and control valves is form-fit throughout, 
gearing this towards the maximum controlling torques of the actuators.
• Only use external flame monitors compliant with DIN EN 298 or DIN EN 230 and author-
ised for continuous operation. Safety time of flame monitor must not extend 1 s.
• If the valve testing system is activated, connect the supply-side solenoid valve to terminal 
X01 and the burner-side solenoid valve to terminal X02. Connect the pressure monitor of 
the valve testing system to terminal X05. Adjust the gas pressure monitor and the dimen-
sions of the test section in order to make sure that the valve testing system is detecting a 
maximum leakage gas volume of 0.1 % in relation to the gas flow rate (minimum 50 dm³/
h) at maximum combustion heat output.
• Consider the potential danger depending on installation situation and position where the-
pressure equipment is being installed. Bear in mind the risk of external fire and the impact 
from traffic, wind and earthquake.
• When fixing duomodul plug-in connectors to insulation displacement technology (IDT) use 
HZ-M35 a modular crimping tool from Lumberg (see www.lumberg.com).
3.2 Security Advice - Mounting
• Compliance with national safety regulations and standards is obligatory at all times. 
• During the assembly and installation process, you must meet the requirements of stand-
ards DIN VDE  0100, 0550 and DIN VDE 0722
• To mount the BT300 basic unit, use screw fittings with an M4 thread (UNC32) or an M5 
thread (UNC24) and a maximum tightening torque of 1.8  Nm for fastening at all four fixing 
points. Keep in mind that housings have improved mechanical stability when connected 
on surrounding contact surfaces.  
Connect generally to an even mounting surface.
9
3   For Your Safety
3.3 Installation Notes
• Lay high-voltage ignition cable always separately and in safe distance from device and 
other cables.
• Only trained, qualified personnel may open the BurnerTronic’s cover.
• Observe local and national regulations when wiring the electric cables inside the burner.
• Tighten the screw terminals of the BT300 using a tightening torque of > 0.5 Nm.
• Supply the feed cable with L, N and PE only. The N neutral conductor must not have po-
tential difference to the PE protective conductor.
• The pre-fuse for the BT300 should be max.10  A slow-blow.
• Phase, neutral and central point conductors must not be interchanged (this would lead to 
dangerous malfunctioning, loss of protection against contact, etc.).
• The strain relief for the connected cables must comply with standards (e.g. DIN EN 60730 
and DIN EN 60335).
• Make sure that no spliced strands can come into contact with any of the adjacent connec-
tions. Use appropriate end sleeves.
• The burner manufacturer is obligated to supply unused connections on the BT300 with 
dummy plugs.
• To replace or disconnect the plug connectors, all poles of the plant must be disconnected 
from the mains.
• Make a form-fit connection between the actuators and actuating elements for fuel and 
combustion air, as well as a form-fit connection for any additional actuator element.
• Optional components with safety extra low voltage (SELV) must be safely separated from 
the mains. Otherwise this can cause an electrical shock or damage the device due to a 
short-circuit.
• You may connect only passive devices or devices without feedback effects at the 230V 
outputs of the BT300 (like relays without additional voltage connection). In case of error it 
must be guaranteed that BT300 is not feeded with 230 V by this terminals. 
3.4 Electrical Connection Flame Sensor
Interruptions and losses in signal transmission need to be minimised: 
• Do not wire the sensor cable with other cables. 
Flame signal is reduced through line capacities.    Use a separate cable.
• Consider the permitted length of sensor cables.
• The ionisation flame sensor supplied from the mains is not protected against contact. Pro-
tection against accidental contact is therefore obligatory.
• Earth the burner according to instructions – earthing the boiler itself is not sufficient!
• Position ignition electrode and ionisation flame sensor where spark cannot hit ionisation 
flame sensor (risk of electrical overloading).
10
3   For Your Safety
3.5 Commissioning Notes
• Check all safety functions during commissioning!
• There is no feature to prevent RASTx connector plugs being transposed. Therefore en-
sure the correct assignment of the plant's plugs prior to commissioning.
• Check electromagnetic emissions specific to the application.
• While installing and commissioning the plant, the person in charge of the plant/heating 
technician needs to document the following: 
– Parameterised values
– Setting values (e.g. curve progressions)
– Values describing the fuel/air ratio control.
This data can be printed using LSB remote software or alternatively being kept as a hand-
written note.
Retain this documentation and have it checked by the "authority on the subject".
WARNING!
For BT300 parameterisations which deviate from the application standards can be carried out 
in access level 2. For this reason, check whether the parameterisation is consistent with the 
corresponding application standards (e.g. EN 298, EN 230, EN 676, EN 267, etc.) or the re-
spective plant has to be approved separately.
WARNING!
While unlocking the safety interlock chain in the mode "BURNER OFF" BT300does not lock 
the system. BT300 prevents a burner start-up until safety interlock chains are locked.
 In case your application needs an interlock of the plant  while unlocking the safety interlock 
chain also in "BURNER OFF" mode you must take suitable measures at the plant.
3.5.1 Fuel/Air Ratio Control
• Guarantee proper operation by ensuring adequate excess air.  
In order to do this, set values for fuel and combustion air in such as
– combustion chamber pressure
– fuel pressure
– temperature and the pressure of the combustion air
to ensure proper operation through the entire range of burner firing-rate until next periodic 
inspection.
• Pay attention to wear and tear of actuators and actuator elements.
• Measure characteristic values of combustion process to document proper operation.
11
3   For Your Safety
3.5.2 Basic Device
Check the following items prior to commissioning: 
• Valves must be assigned correctly to valve outputs on BT300.
• Correct setting of time parameters (especially safety and pre-ventilation times).
• Flame sensor functioning well in case of flame blow-off during operation (incl. flame-out 
response time) or when parasitic light is present during pre-ventilation period and also at 
a missing flame formation while end of safety period starts.
• Activated leakage control function of gas valves and correct leakage measurement, when 
required by an application.
3.6 Tasks fulfilled by "authority on the subject" during Approval Test 
By specifying the assigned DIN registration number and product ID number the manufacturer 
confirms that model BT300 burner control system is consistent with type-tested system.
The connection between actuators and actuator elements for fuel and combustion air and also 
to any additional actuator elements used must be form-fit.
3.6.1 Checking for Correct Parameterisation in System
While installating and commissioning the plant the person in charge of the plant/heating tech-
nician needs to document the following: 
• Parameterised values
• Setting values (e.g. curve progressions)
• Values describing fuel/air ratio control.
This data can be printed using LSB remote software or alternatively being kept as a handwrit-
ten note.
Retain this documentation and have it checked by the "authority on the subject".
NOTICE!
For BT300 parameterisations which deviate from application standards can be carried out in 
access level 2. For this reason, check whether the parameterisation is consistent with the cor-
responding application standards (e.g. EN 298, EN 230, EN 676, EN 267, etc.) or the respec-
tive plant has to be approved separately.
3.6.2 Checking the Fuel/Air Ratio Control System
Save setting values (curve parameters) for actuator elements, fuel and combustion air through 
the complete range of burner firing-rate in sufficient number. 
Select setting values of fuel and combustion air considering combustion chamber pressure, 
fuel pressure, temperature and pressure of the combustion air in order to guarantee proper 
operation with adequate excess air through the entire range of burner firing-rate. 
The burner/boiler manufacturer has to document this by measuring reference values of the 
combustion process.
12
3   For Your Safety
3.6.3 Checking Burner Sequencer Part
Check the following:
• Correct setting of time parameters (especially safety and pre-ventilation periods).
• Whether an ionisation flame sensor or a corresponding flame scanner is used since only 
these are capable of running in continuous operation. 
• Functioning of flame sensor in case of flame blow-off during operation, parasitic light being 
present during pre-ventilation period and missing flame formation at the end of the safety-
period. 
• Check the performance of all available and/or essential incomming signals, such as for: 
– Air pressure
– Gas pressure - min/oil pressure - min
– Safety interlock chain (e.g. STB)
• Activated Leakage control function for gas valves if required for application purposes. 
– If necessary, ensure a correct leakage quantification.
13
4   Functional Description
4 Functional Description
BT300 combines the benefits of an electronic fuel/air ratio control system with up to three mo-
torised actuator elements and optional modules like an analogue output for speed control of 
the combustion air fan with an electronic burner control unit. The leakage test, flame monitor-
ing system, power control unit and (optional) CO/O
2
controller for control and optimisation of 
an oil or gas-fired forced-draught burner are all integrated.
BT300 is suitable for virtually all combustion plants. Safety interlock chains, monitors (e.g. gas 
and air pressure) and sensors are wired directly to the BT300. This greatly reduces the cost 
of additional relays and wiring. The BT300 is designed to be attached to the burner. The short 
wiring paths also save money. As a result, BT300 is particularly suitable as standard equip-
ment for monoblock burners.
The compact design of BT300 burner control system also has its advantages during commis-
sioning. Standardisation of wiring and operator interface minimises sources of errors right 
from the start. Moreover, intelligent display information is making search for errors much eas-
ier.
The BT300 is available in five designs:
Burner sequencer and fuel/air ratio control can be adjusted for a wide range of combustion 
conditions by setting parameters. The BT300 for oil and gas can be set to start with and with-
out pilot burner. The integrated leakage test can be run before ignition or after shutting down 
the burner.
Starting without pre-ventilation using gas is available in accordance with EN676.
The setting of fuel/air ratio curves can be optimised using optional CO/O
2
control during op-
eration. This helps to counteract conditions that interfere with combustion. This ensures a per-
manent burner operation at the greatest possible efficiency.
Operating and fault messages are displayed by symbols and numbers on UI300 User Inter-
face. Plant-specific configurations and settings of fuel/air ratio control curves are operated via 
menu of UI300 User Interface.
An operating and start-up counter is integrated.
The optional LCM100 power control unit with two setpoints, external setpoint shift (control by 
atmospheric condition) and start-up control is also available.
• BT320 2 motorised control outputs 
1 continuous output 0 ... 10 V, 0/4 ... 20 mA for speed control of the  
combustion air fan using VSM100 (optional) 
intermittent operation
• BT330 3 motorised control outputs 
1 continuous output 0 ... 10 V, 0/4 ... 20 mA for speed control of the  
combustion air fan using VSM100 (optional) 
Approved for continuous operation only in combination with  
flame sensors capable of running continuously
• BT331 Same range of functions as BT330 but including following certificates: 
DIN EN 61508:2002 parts 1-7 for SIL 3  
Performance Level PLE according DIN EN ISO 13849-1
• BT340  3 motorised control outputs 
Oil-gas dual-fuel operation via DFM300 
1 continuous output 0 ... 10 V, 0/4 ... 20 mA for speed control of the  
combustion air fan using VSM100 (optional) 
approved for continuous operation only in combination with 
flame sensors capable of running continuously
• BT341 Same range of functions as BT340 but also including following certificates: 
DIN EN 61508:2002 parts 1-7 for SIL 3  
Performance Level PLE according DIN EN ISO 13849-1
14
5   Operating Control and Displays
5 Operating Control and Displays
5.1 UI300 User Interface
Display
The display shows in pictograms:
• the menu structure
• operating status
• parameters
• error messages
Back key
Cursor keys
ENTER keys
Fig. 5-1 User Interface
1 Display
2 BACK key
3 Cursor keys
4 ENTER key
Jump to previous window.
You navigate in the menu using cursor keys. 
You use  "left'' and ''right'' keys to move step by step in a selected row. At 
the end of the selected row the cursor jumps down to the next row, if possi-
ble.
In a multiline menu use "up" and "down" keys to switch to other rows.
To display parameters, switch between various fields.
Press ENTER to call up a menu on the start screen. Select a sub-menu in the menu 
window. Transfer setting values by pressing ENTER key in a parameter window.
15
5   Operating Control and Displays
5.2 Menu Functions
The menu is divided into three paths:
INFO
Select INFO path for information about the following:
• Burner
• Faults/Fault history
• Software version
• Display of check sums
• Serial number
• Actuator positions (current damper position for each channel)
• Digital inputs/outputs
MANUAL
Select MANUAL to: 
• start and stop burner by hand
• adjust internal burner firing-rate
SETTINGS
Select the SETTINGS path for getting information/make changes to:
• Password
• Burner settings (display and settings)
• Actuator elements settings (display)
• Air/fuel control system
• Deletion of curve sets
• Display settings
INFO
MANUAL
SETTINGS
16
5   Operating Control and Displays
5.3 Main Menu
1. Use cursor keys   to select a menu and press ENTER  to confirm.
5.4 Information Menu Path
1. Use cursor keys    to select path   and press ENTER  to confirm.
The display shows a menu overview.
5.4.1 Burner Details
Display operating hours
1. Use cursor keys   to select menu   and press ENTER  to confirm.
The  display shows the "System Information" menu window.
Fig. 5-2 Main menu
1 INFORMATION menu path [selected]
2 Display of fuel type
3 Bar graph of internal firing-rate in %  
(0 - 100)
4 MANUAL menu path
5 Access level 2
6 SETTINGS menu path
7 Window number
Fig. 5-3 Display Menu overview
1 Burner information [selected]
2 Serial number
3 Fault history
4 Configuration of actual value of actuating 
outputs (display only)
5 Software version
6 Digital inputs/outputs
7 Check sum display
Fig. 5-4 Display "System information"
1 Display operating hours [selected]
2 No. of burner start-ups
17
5   Operating Control and Displays
2. Use keys   to select menu   and press ENTER  to confirm.
The display shows the "Display operating hours" menu window.
Display burner start-ups
1. Use keys in System Information menu   to select menu   and press ENTER   
to confirm.
The display shows the "Start-up counter" menu window.
5.4.2 Recall Fault History
Display burner faults
1. Use cursor keys   to select menu  and press ENTER  to confirm.
The display shows "Fault history selection" menu.
2. Use keys   to select menu  and press ENTER  to confirm.
The display shows "Fault history" menu.
Fig. 5-5 Display "Operating hours"
1 Pictogram operating hours 
2 Total number of operating hours  
(device connected to mains voltage)
3 No. of operating hours, oil operation
4 No. of operating hours, gas operation
Fig. 5-6 Display "Start-up counter"
1 Pictogram burner start-up 
2 No. of burner start-ups, oil operation
3 No. of burner start-ups, gas operation
Fig. 5-7 Fault history selection menu
1 Burner fault pictogram [selected]
18
5   Operating Control and Displays
NOTICE!
Information concerning fault and diagnostic codes you may find in the list of fault codes. 
For fault analysis a fault code and diagnostic code D1 or D2 is required.
5.4.3 Software Version
Display software version
1. Use cursor keys   to select menu   and press ENTER  to confirm.
The display shows the "Software version" menu.
Fig. 5-8 Fault history menu
1 Error code-display pictogram
2 Fault code (Last 10 faults are stored,  
no. 01 is the latest fault)
3 Diagnostic code 1
4 Diagnostic code 2
5 No. of operating hours when fault has oc-
cured
Fig. 5-9 Software version menu
1 Software version pictogram
2 UI300 software version (User Interface)
3 BT300 software version (BurnerTronic)
19
5   Operating Control and Displays
5.4.4 Display of Check Sums
Display check sum
1. Use cursor keys   to select menu   and press ENTER  to confirm.
The display shows "CRC16 check sums" menu.
5.4.5 Serial Number
Display serial number
1. Use cursor keys   to select menu   and press ENTER  to confirm.
The display shows the "Serial number" menu.
Fig. 5-10 CRC16 check sums menu
1 Check sums pictogram
2 Check sum, access level 0
3 Check sum, access level 1
4 Check sum, access level 2
5 Check sum, access level 4
Fig. 5-11 Serial number menu
1 Serial number pictogram
2 User Interface serial number
3 BurnerTronic serial number
20
5   Operating Control and Displays
5.4.6 Positions of Actuators
Display positions of actuators
1. Use the cursor keys   to select menu   and press ENTER  to confirm.
The display shows the "Actuators" menu.
NOTICE!
The assignment of channels is depending on configuration settings!
5.4.7 Check Digital Inputs/Outputs
Check digital inputs
1. Use cursor keys   to select menu   and press ENTER  to confirm. 
The display shows the "Digital inputs/outputs" menu.
2. Select menu   and press ENTER  to confirm.
The display shows the 1
st
page of inputs":
Fig. 5-12 Actuators menu
1 Actuator pictogram
2 Actuator channel 1 (oil)
3 Actuator channel 2 (air)
4 Actuator channel 3 (oil)
5 Optional channel (OFF;  
control of frequency converter)
6 Actuator’s actual position
Fig. 5-13 Digital inputs and outputs menu
1 Digital inputs pictogram [selected]
2 Digital outputs pictogram
21
5   Operating Control and Displays
NOTICE!
Signals of points 3 and 4 are "logical" signals and not "physical" ones. Background informa-
tion: Some signals may have more than one source (terminal, LSB, field buses, parameters). 
Call up 2
nd
page of inputs
1. Use cursor keys   to select the next page and press ENTER  to confirm.
The display shows the 2
nd
page of inputs:
Call up 3
rd
page of inputs
1. Use the cursor keys   to select the next page and press ENTER  to confirm.
The display shows the 3
rd 
page of inputs:
Fig. 5-14 Page 1 of inputs menu
1 Digital inputs pictogram
2 Jump to next page
3 Fuel selection oil [no]
4 Fuel selection gas [yes]
5 Burner start [yes] - terminal X10
Fig. 5-15 Page 2 of inputs menu
1 Digital inputs pictogram
2 Jump to next page
3 Oil pressure min present [no] 
- terminal X05
4 Gas pressure min present [yes] 
- terminal X05
5 Air pressure min present [yes] 
- terminal X08
Fig. 5-16 Page 3 of inputs menu
1 Digital inputs pictogram
2 Jump to previous page
3 Jump to next page
4 Safety interlock chain oil closed [no]  
- terminal X06
5 Safety interlock chain gas closed [no]
6 Safety interlock chain boiler closed [no]
22
5   Operating Control and Displays
NOTICE!
Signals of points 4 and 5 in Fig. 5-15 Page 2 of inputs menu are "logical" signals, not "physi-
cal". The BT320/330 supports either oil or gas operation, but cannot be switched. Therefore 
no separate signals for the oil or gas safety interlock chain are generated. The signal on ter-
minal X06 is thus generally known as burner‘s safety interlock chain.
Call up 4
th
page of inputs
1. Use cursor keys   to select next page and press ENTER  to confirm.
The display shows the 4
th
page of inputs:
5.4.8 Digital Outputs
Check digital outputs
1. Use the cursor keys   to select the menu   and press ENTER  to confirm.
The display shows "Page 1 digital outputs" menu:
Fig. 5-17 Page 4 of inputs menu
1 Digital inputs pictogram
2 Jump to previous page
3 Flame signal present [no] - terminal X21
4 Fault release [no] - terminal X10
Fig. 5-18 Page 1 digital outputs menu
1 Digital outputs pictogram
2 Jump to next page
3 Fan [on] - terminal X25
4 Error [off] - terminal X24 
(adjustable with P 809)
5 Ignition transformer [off] - terminal X04
23
5   Operating Control and Displays
Call up 2
nd 
page of outputs
1. Use the cursor keys   to select the next page and press ENTER  to confirm.
The display shows "Page 2 digital outputs" menu:
Call up 3
rd
page of outputs
1. Use the cursor keys   to select the next page and press ENTER  to confirm.
The display shows "Page 3 digital outputs" menu:
Call up 4
th
page of outputs
1. Use the cursor keys   to select the next page and press ENTER  to confirm.
The display shows "Page 4 digital outputs" menu:
Fig. 5-19 Page 2 digital outputs menu
1 Digital outputs pictogram
2 Jump to previous page
3 Jump to next page
4 Oil valve 1 [on] - terminal X01
5 Oil valve 2 [off] - terminal X02
6 Oil valve 3 [off] - terminal X03
Fig. 5-20 Page 3 digital outputs menu
1 Digital outputs pictogram
2 Jump to previous page
3 Jump to next page
4 Ignition valve [on] - terminal X03
5 Gas valve 1 [off] - terminal X01
6 Gas valve 2 [off] - terminal X02
Fig. 5-21 Page 4 digital outputs menu
1 Digital outputs pictogram
2 Jump to previous page
3 Oil pump [off] - terminal X26
4 Fuel selection oil [off] - terminal X24 
(adjustable with P 809)
5 Fuel selection gas [off] - terminal X24 
(adjustable with P 809)
24
5   Operating Control and Displays
5.5 Manual Menu Path
MANUAL
Select MANUAL path to carry out actions as follows:
1 Switching burner ON and OFF
2 Presetting of burner firing-rate 
Display MANUAL menu
1. Use cursor keys   to select path   and press ENTER   to confirm.
The display shows the "Manual operation" menu.
The "Burner ON" control loop does not need to be switched on to start the burner from this 
menu. The user interface assumes control in this menu.
If there is no "Burner ON" signal from other sources (terminal X10.2) software switches off the 
burner when you exit the menu.
CAUTION!
If you carry out a manual start-up via display BT300 no longer responds to "Burner ON" signal 
input at connector X10.2. Therefore that limiters, monitors and other similar safety functions 
must not be operated with this input!
NOTICE!
Leaving of window will terminate manual burner operation!
Adjust burner firing-rate
1. Use cursor keys   to select adjustment of burner firing-rate in % and press ENTER 
to confirm   .
2. Change burner firing-rate with the cursor keys    and press ENTER   to confirm.
NOTICE!
Changes of burner firing-rate are possible only while burner is running.
If you want to adjust burner firing-rate remember to start-up the burner first.
Fig. 5-22 Menu manual operation
1 Pictogram Manual operation
2 Start burner manually [off]
3 Adjust burner firing-rate
4 Pictogram confirm settings
25
5   Operating Control and Displays
5.6 Settings Menu Path
Display SETTINGS menu
1. Use cursor keys   to select menu   and press ENTER  to confirm.
The display shows the menu overview.
5.6.1 Enter Password
Display menu password entry
1. Use cursor keys   to select menu   and press ENTER  to confirm.
The display shows the password entry menu.
2. Use the cursor keys   to select password field you wish to change.
3. Change the number with cursor keys   .
4. Confirm password with ENTER  .
Fig. 5-23 Menu overview
1 Password pictogram (selected)
2 Delete curves
3 Display program settings
4 Firing-rate controller settings 
5 Configuration of read-out 
actuator outputs 
6 Password settings
7 Curve settings
8 Display settings
Fig. 5-24 Enter password menu
1 Password pictogram (selected)
2 Enter password
3 Access level 2 displayed with access au-
thorisation
26
5   Operating Control and Displays
5.6.2 Program Sequence
Configure program sequence 
1. Use cursor keys   to select menu   and press ENTER  to confirm.
The display shows the program sequence overview.
Set pre-ventilation period
1. Use cursor keys   to select menu  and press ENTER  to confirm.
The display shows the pre-ventilation period menu.
NOTICE!
Pre-ventilation starts as soon as damper reaches pre-ventilation position and - if you use a 
VSM - the last but one point of fuel/air ratio curve is passed.
NOTICE!
The second to last channel’s position must be lower than the position of the last curve point.
2. Use cursor keys   to select the number you want to change.
3. Change the numerical value with cursor keys  .
4. Confirm the entry with ENTER  .
The countdown starts.
Fig. 5-25 Overview program sequence
1 Duration of pre-ventilation [selected]
2 Pilot burner oil operation
3 Duration of post-ventilation
4 Valve leakage test
5 Pilot burner gas operation
Fig. 5-26 Period of pre-ventilation menu
1 Pre-ventilation period pictogram
2 Setting pre-ventilation time
3 Accept value by pressing ENTER
1
2 3
27
5   Operating Control and Displays
NOTICE!
Apply value only if the values for UI300 and BT300 are identical! 
The parameter value must be confirmed by pressing ENTER within the countdown (8  s)!
5. Accept or discard the entry.
NOTICE!
The following sequence of events for confirming or discarding the entry is exactly the same 
for all parameter entries. Therefore this process is not illustrated again in following explana-
tions of parameter settings.
You will simply find this text: "Accept or discard the entry!"
a) Press ENTER   in time to confirm.
The value is accepted.
The display shows the following page:
The parameter change is transferred to the burner control system!
CAUTION!
If both values are identical you apply the value by pressing ENTER. In case of a discrepancy 
of values terminate the storage process.
b) Cancel parameter changes.
Select the Back key  .
The change made to the parameter is not accepted.
The following page appears:
Fig. 5-27 Secure data transfer
1 UI300 pictogram
2 BT300 pictogram
3 Cancel (backwards)
4 Parameter number UI300
5 Parameter number UI300
6 Transfer by pressing ENTER (flashing)
7 Value for UI300
8 Value for BT300
Fig. 5-28 Display after successful data transfer
1 Pictogram UI300
2 Pictogram BT300
3 Parameter number UI300
4 Parameter number BT300
5 Pictogram discard parameters
6 Value BT300
7 Value UI300
28
5   Operating Control and Displays
Set duration of post-ventilation
1. Use cursor keys   to select menu   and press ENTER  to confirm.
The display shows the post-ventilation period menu.
2. Use cursor keys   to select number you wish to change.
3. Change the numerical value with cursor keys  .
4. Confirm entry with ENTER  .
Accept or discard the entry!
Leakage test functions
1. Use cursor keys   to select menu   and press ENTER  to confirm.
The display shows the valve leakage test menu.
Fig. 5-29 Display of invalid data transfer
1 Pictogram UI300
2 Pictogram BT300
3 Parameter number UI300
4 Parameter number BT300
5 Pictogram apply parameters
6 Value BT300
7 Value UI300
Fig. 5-30 Post-ventilation period menu
1 Post-ventilation period pictogram
2 Setting post-ventilation time
3 Press ENTER to acceppt setting
Fig. 5-31 Leakage test menu
1 Leakage test ON/OFF
2 Leakage test before ignition
3 Leakage test after ignition
4 Leakage test period
29
5   Operating Control and Displays
NOTICE!
You require access level 2 to make settings in this function!
Accept or discard the entry!
Activate valve leakage test prior to ignition
1. Use cursor keys   to select menu   and press ENTER  to confirm.
2. Change the functional state ON/OFF using cursor keys   and press ENTER  .
The display shows the valve leakage test menu before ignition:
The valve leakage test is set!
NOTICE!
You require access level 2 to make settings in this function!
Accept or discard the entry!
Activate valve leakage test after flame OFF
1. Use cursor keys   to select menu   and press ENTER  to confirm.
2. Change the functional state ON/OFF using cursor keys   and press ENTER  .
The display valve leakage test is shown after flame OFF menu.
The valve leakage test is set!
NOTICE!
You require access level 2 to make settings in this function!
Accept or discard the entry!
Fig. 5-32 Valve leakage test prior to ignition menu
1 Valve leakage test before ignition picto-
gram
2 Display valve leakage test (ON)
3 Press ENTER to accept settings 
Fig. 5-33 Valve leakage test after flame OFF menu
1 Valve leakage test after flame OFF picto-
gram
2 Display valve leakage test (ON)
3 Press ENTER to accept settings
30
5   Operating Control and Displays
Valve leakage test period
1. Use cursor keys   to select menu   and press ENTER  to confirm.
The display shows the valve leakage test period menu.
2. Use cursor keys   to select the number you wish to change.
3. Change the numerical value with cursor keys  .
4. Press ENTER  to confirm.
Accept or discard the entry!
Activate pilot burner in gas operation
1. Use cursor keys   to select menu   and press ENTER  to confirm.
2. Change functional state ON/OFF using cursor keys    and press ENTER   to 
confirm.
The display shows the menu: "pilot burner in gas operation".
NOTICE!
You require access level 2 to make settings in this function!
Accept or discard the entry!
Set pilot burner in oil operation
1. Use cursor keys   to select menu   and press ENTER  to confirm.
2. Change functional state ON/OFF using the cursor keys   and press ENTER   
to confirm.
The display shows the menu: "pilot burner in oil operation".
Fig. 5-34 Valve leakage test menu
1 Valve leakage test period pictogram
2 Set valve leakage test period
3 Press ENTER to accept settings 
Fig. 5-35 Pilot burner in gas operation menu
1 Pilot burner in gas operation pictogram
2 Activate the pilot burner in gas operation
3 Press ENTER to accept settings 
31
5   Operating Control and Displays
NOTICE!
You require access level 2 to make settings in this function!
Accept or discard the entry!
Configuration of actuating outputs
1. Use cursor keys   to select menu   and press ENTER  to confirm.
The display shows the configuration of actuating outputs menu.
Curve setting of actuators
1. Use cursor keys   to select menu   and press ENTER  to confirm.
NOTICE!
Pressing key   and holding it longer than 2 s in this menu will cause a fault shut-down.
The display shows the curve setting menu.
Fig. 5-36 Pilot burner in oil operation menu
1 Pilot burner in oil operation pictogram
2 Activate pilot burner in oil operation
3 Press ENTER to accept settings
Fig. 5-37 Configuration of actuating outputs menu
1 Actuator position pictogram
2 Display channel 1, oil
3 Display channel 2, air
4 Channel active
5 Display channel 3, off
6 Optional channel, off
Fig. 5-38 Curve setting menu
1 Ignition position firing-rate point
2 Setpoint channel 1, oil
3 Actual value channel 1, oil
4 Setpoint channel 2, air
5 Actual value channel 2, air
6 Setpoint channel 3, oil 
7 Actual value channel 3, oil
8 Curve data for this firing-rate point  
already existing
32
5   Operating Control and Displays
2. Use cursor keys   to set firing-rate point and press ENTER   to confirm.
Set-point channel 1 is chosen (displayed inversely).
3. Use cursor keys   to set channels’ actuator position.
4. Use cursor keys   to switch to next channel. 
5. Use cursor keys   to set actuators’ position in the selected firing-rate point.
NOTICE!
Actuators move according to changes immediately to the set position.
If you want to change channel 4 the fan motor must be running.
Accept or discard the entry!
The display switches to the firing-rate selection menu.
6. Use BACK key    to switch to menu settings after having completed curve settings.
NOTICE!
The following firing-rate points are available:  
Ignition point , 200, 250, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800, 900, 999
7. Set your firing-rate points as described above and press ENTER   to confirm.
NOTICE!
If you press key   while setting firing-rate points your value changes will be discarded.
Set multi-stage oil operation - 1
st 
stage
1. Select the first stage and press ENTER  .
The actuators move to the pre-set positions.
The setpoint position of the first activated actuator is displayed inversely.
2. Use cursor keys   to set the position of the selected actuator.
3. Use cursor keys   to switch to a different actuator.
4. Press ENTER  .
The positions of all actuators of the selected firing-rate point are saved.
You can select the next firing-rate point.
NOTICE!
If you press the key   while changing the firing-rate point your changes will be discarded.
Fig. 5-39 Multi-stage operation menu
1 Display 1
st
stage
2 Set-point, air damper position
3 Actual value, air damper position
33
5   Operating Control and Displays
NOTICE!
During multi-stage operation, the following points are available:  
Ignition point  ,  
1 (first stage),  
1   2 (valve switch-on point, second stage), 
1   2 (valve switch-off point, second stage)  
2 (second level),  
2   3  (valve switch-on point, third stage),  
2  3 (valve switch-off point, third stage),  
3 (third stage)
NOTICE!
Pre-ventilation starts as soon as the damper reaches pre-ventilation position and - if you use 
a VSM - the last but one point of the fuel/air ratio curve is passed.
NOTICE!
The points are approached from above by using the overshoot-function. If you use the over-
shoot-function in operatio, you must program all points from above. Only if you do so, the re-
quired position will match the actual position.
NOTICE!
The channels’ position in the last but one curve point must be lower than at the last curve point.
Fig. 5-40 3-staged operation
34
5   Operating Control and Displays
Set staged oil operation - transition from 1
st
to 2
nd
stage
1. Select the setpoint for the air damper position and press ENTER  to confirm.
The actuators move to these positions.
The setpoint position for the active actuator is displayed inversely.
2. Use the cursor keys   to set the position of the selected actuator.
3. Use the cursor keys   to switch to a different actuator.
4. Press ENTER  .
Positions for all actuators of the selected firing-rate point are saved.
You can select the next firing-rate point.
NOTICE!
Set the other firing-rate stages according to this procedure!
Delete firing-rate curves
1. In "Settings" menu path use cursor keys   to select menu   and press ENTER 
to confirm.
The display shows the "Deleting curves" menu.
Fig. 5-41 Transition from 1
st
to 2
nd
stage
1 Display valve switch-on point, 2
nd
stage
2 Setpoint, air damper position
3 Actual value, air damper position
Fig. 5-42 Deleting curves menu
1 Delete curves pictogram
2 Delete curves selected
3 Confirm deleting of curves
35
5   Operating Control and Displays
The display shows the confirmation prompt:
2. Press ENTER  .
The curve values will be deleted.
The display shows the values deleted menu.
UI300 display settings
NOTICE!
Value= 0 cannot be entered for the screen saver delay!
Fig. 5-43 Confirmation prompt of deleting curves 
menu
1 Back to previous menu
2 Deleting values [selected]
3 Proceed with deleting values
Fig. 5-44 Values deleted menu
1 Values deleted
Fig. 5-45 Display settings menu
1 UI300 pictogram
2 Brightness
3 Contrast
4 Delay for screen saver
36
5   Operating Control and Displays
5.6.3 Other Displays
No connection between UI300 and BT300
Display shown e.g. when using LSB remote software and communication between BT300 and 
UI300 is temporarily unavailable.
Termination
Fig. 5-46 No connection
1 UI300 User Interface pictogram
2 No connection symbol 
3 BT300 burner control
Fig. 5-47 Termination
1 Communication error pictogram 
connection unavailable
37
6   Leakage Test for Main Gas Valves
6 Leakage Test for Main Gas Valves 
6.1 Calculation Example
An (approximate) formula for calculating the leakage test monitoring facility is summarised be-
low:
This means for a maximum gas flow rate of 50 m
3
/h the formula is:
Insert numerical value in mbar for Δp.
The formula for a gas flow rate of Q > 50 m
3
/h is:
Insert the numerical value in m
3
/h for Q and in mbar for Δp .
A.   Assuming: ∆p = 20 mbar, gas flow rate < 50 m
3
/h
B.   Assuming: ∆p = 20 mbar, gas flow rate = 200 m
3
/h
Definitions: GDW: gas pressure monitor
V1: gas-side safety shut-off device
V2: burner-side safety shut-off device
P
B
barometric air pressure < 1000 mbar
P
SU
lower GDW switching point (falling)
P
SO
upper GDW switching point (rising)
p = P
SO
- P
B
GDW switching difference
PG gas flow pressure (supply pressure before V1)
V
P
volume of gas line tested
V
L
leakage quantity
V
Lmax
maximum admissible leakage quantity (limit value)
t
P
testing time (30 s adjustable, default = 20 s)
i.e. the gas line you want to test must not 
exceed 20,8 dm
3
, for being able to detect 
the required leakage quantity.
i.e. the gas line you want to test must not 
exceed 83,3 dm, for being able to detect 
the required leakage quantity of 200 dm
3
/h. 
38
6   Leakage Test for Main Gas Valves
6.2 Leakage Test with Ventilation Via Roof 
The leakage test checks whether or not the main gas valves are leakproof. For this purpose 
the gas pressure of the supply is analysed.
As leakage test section (space between the two main valves) burns empty whenever the burn-
er is switched off, this part is usually pressureless at start-up (gas pressure > min = 0). This is 
checked by BurnerTronic. At this point, main gas 1 opens briefly and gas flows into test section 
(gas pressure > min switches from 0 to 1). This pressure must remain constantly at least while 
leakage test period (P 311) is running. The leakage test is considered complete then. 
If leakage test section is not empty at start-up (e.g. resulting from a previous fault shutdown), 
main gas valve 2 opens first. The leakage test line is then ventilated (depending on the plant, 
either in the combustion chamber or through the roof – for wiring proposition, see chapter  6.3 
Exhaust of Test Line Over the Roof). During leakage test period section is checked whether 
it remains pressureless or not. Apart from that the process is the same as described above. 
The leakage test takes place prior to ignition.
You must connect the pressure monitor for the leakage test line at the “Gas pressure > min” 
input on plug X05. It also monitors the minimum pressure during operation. If a different min-
imum pressure should be monitored during operation, the pressure monitor must be inserted 
into the safety interlock chain gas or into the controller loop (burner ON). You must assure by 
dimensioning the gas line in a way that leakage test control time is sufficient for detecting re-
liably a burner gas consumption leakage of 0.1%, but at least 50 dm
3
/h (at maximum combus-
tion heat output).
NOTICE!
You may only vent 0.05 % of fuel consumption at maximum firing-rate into combustion cham-
ber.
39
6   Leakage Test for Main Gas Valves
Fig. 6-1 Leakage test process diagram
40
6   Leakage Test for Main Gas Valves
6.3 Exhaust of Test Line Over the Roof
NOTICE!
Consider diameter of gas line in the roof ventilation. For ventilation, plug X02 is activated for 
3 s. Make sure that this period is sufficient even for smallest ventilation line diameter!
Fig. 6-2 Wiring proposition for ventilation of gas line via roof in combination with BurnerTronic
41
7   Technical Data
7 Technical Data
7.1 Technical Data BT300
Function
Power supply: 230 V  +10/-15 %  47-63 Hz
115 V  +10/-15 %  47-63 Hz (on request)
Maximum backup-fuse: 10 A  slow-blow
To be used only in a grounded power line network!
Power consumption: max. 30 VA
Switching threshold of ionisation 
current:
1 A
Digital signal inputs: Max. line length 10 m 
Digital outputs: 3 fuel valves max. 1 A cos  0,4 
VL fan max. 2 A cos  0,4  
oil pump max. 2 A cos  0,4 
ignition transformer max. 2 A cos  0,2 
alarm output max. 1 A cos  0,3
Resolution: 999 digit, 10 bit
Number of curve sets: BT320/33x: 1 curve set (oil or gas) 
BT34x: 2 curve sets (oil/gas switchable; DFM300 or LCM100 required)
Number of programs: unlimited (EEPROM)
Field bus-coupling (optional): PROFIBUS 
LCM100 always required
Housing: Polycarbonate + ABS
Dimensions: 200x115x61 mm
Weight: 1,0 kg
Flammability: UL-94 V0 (panel: UL-94 V2)
Display
Display: 128x64 pixel, monochrome  
White backlighting (dimmable)
Dimensions: 112 x 64 x 24 mm
Weight: 140 g
Housing: Basic housing: Polyamide glass fibre reinforced  
LCD-display window: Polycarbonate
Flammability: Basic housing UL-94 V0  
LCD-display window UL-94 V2
Environmental Conditions
Operation: Climatic conditions Class 3K5 according to DIN EN 60721-3
Mechanic conditions Class 3M5 according to DIN EN 60721-3
Temperature range -20 ... +60 °C (condensation is prohibited)
Transport: Climatic conditions Class 2K3 according to DIN EN 60721-3
Mechanic conditions Class 2M2 according to DIN EN 60721-3
Temperature range -20 ... +70 °C (condensation is prohibited)
42
7   Technical Data
7.2 Actuators 662R550...
DANGER!
Danger by electrical shock!
If you don’t shut BurnerTronic down befor opening the cover, you may get in contact with con-
ducting parts. This may cause  an electrical shock.  You may open BurnerTronic only if you 
have disconnected it all-pole.
 Disconnect BurnerTronic all-pole.
Storage: Climatic conditions Class 1K3 according to DIN EN 60721-3
Mechanic conditions Class 1M2 according to DIN EN 60721-3
Temperature range -20 ... +70 °C (no condensation)
Electronic safety: Degree of protection (DIN EN 60529): BT300 – IP40 housing 
IP20 terminals 
UI300 –  IP40 (clamping) 
IP54 (glued assembly)
Environmental Conditions
Function
Floating time 5 s / 90° at 180 Hz
Direction of rotation 0° to 90° right
Torque 0.8 Nm (both directions)
Holding torque 0.4 Nm (no power) 
0.7 Nm
Permissible radial load 30 Nm (centre of output shaft)
Permissible axial load 5 N
Axial play of drive shaft 0.1 ... 0.2 mm
Environmental conditions
Operation Climatic condition Class 3K3 according to DIN EN 60721-3
Mechanical condition Class 3M3 according to DIN EN 60721-3
Temperature range -20 ... +60 °C (condensation is prohibited)
Transport Climatic condition Class 2K3 according to DIN EN 60721-3
Mechanical condition Class 2M2 according to DIN EN 60721-3
Temperature range -20 ... +70 °C (condensation is prohibited)
Storage Climatic condition Class 1K3 according to DIN EN 60721-3
Mechanical condition Class 1M2 according to DIN EN 60721-3
Temperature range -20 ... +70 °C (condensation is prohibited)
Bursting strength Peak voltage 4 kV
Repeat frequency 2,5 kHz
Electrical safety Protection class 2 as per DIN EN 60730
43
7   Technical Data
NOTICE!
Damaging the 0,8 Nm actuator by opening the actuator.
If you open the actuator at another part as the cover of the electric connection, you will dam-
age the actuator.
 Do not open the actuator but at the cover of the electric connection.
7.3 Actuators 662R5001... / 662R5003... 
Function 662R5001... 662R5003... 662R5009...
Floating time 5 s/90° 5 s/90° 15 s/90°
Direction of rotation 0° 
to 90°
left - view to the drive shaft
Effective  
output torque
1.2 Nm  
(both directions of rota-
tion)
3 Nm  
(both directions of rota-
tion)
9 Nm  
(both directions of rotation)
Holding torque 0.82 Nm (currentless) 2.8 Nm (currentless) 6 Nm (currentless)
Permissible  
radial load
100 N (centre of output shaft)
Permissible axial load 10 N
Axial play of drive shaft 0.1 ... 0.2 mm 0.1 ... 0.2 mm
Motor RDM 51/6 stepper motor
Angular resolution 0.1°/motor step 0.1°/motor step 0.03°/motor step
Rated resolution  
encoder monitoring
0,7°
Monitoring 
accuracy
 0,5°  0,5°  1,3125 (is equal to 44 
motor steps)
Repeat accuracy  0,1°  0,1°  0,1°
Life cycle 2,000,000 motions forward and back performed on complete actuator range
Degree of protection IP54 according to DIN EN 60529-1
Weight 1400 g
Environmental conditions 662R5001.../662R5003.../662R5009...
Operation Climatic condition Class 3K5 according to DIN EN 60721-3
Mechanical condition Class 3M5 according to DIN EN 60721-3
Temperature range -20 ... +60 °C (condensation is prohibited)
Transport Climatic condition Class 2K3 according to DIN EN 60721-3
Mechanical condition Class 2M2 according to DIN EN 60721-3
Temperature range -20 ... +70 °C (condensation is prohibited)
Storage Climatic condition Class 1K3 according to DIN EN 60721-3
Mechanical condition Class 1M2 according to DIN EN 60721-3
Temperature range -20 ... +70 °C (condensation is prohibited)
Bursting strength Peak voltage 4 kV
44
7   Technical Data
NOTICE!
Damage of the actuator due to opening the actuators housing.
You will damage the actuator, if you open the actuator’s housing at another (this affects actu-
ators with 1,2, 3,0 and 9,0 Nm). 
Repeat frequency 2,5 kHz
Electrical safety Protection class 2 as per DIN EN 60730
Environmental conditions 662R5001.../662R5003.../662R5009...
45
7   Technical Data
The information in this publication is subject to technical changes.
DLT1206-13-aEN-008
Copyright© 2011 LAMTEC
LAMTEC Meß- und Regeltechnik
für Feuerungen GmbH & Co. KG
Wiesenstraße 6
D-69190 Walldorf
Phone:   +49 (0) 6227 / 6052-0
Fax:       +49 (0) 6227 / 6052-57
e-mail:[email protected]
www.lamtec.de
LAMTEC Leipzig GmbH & Co. KG
Portitzer Straße 69
D-04425 Taucha
Phone:  +49 (0) 34298 / 4875-0
Fax:      +49 (0) 34298 / 4875-99
Presented by:
Print no. DLT1206-13-aEN-008
Printed in Germany
  • Page 1
    Quick Refernce for BurnerTronic BT300 Endusers BT320…BT340 Sensors uad Systems for Combustion Engineering…
  • Page 3: Table Of Contents

    Table of Contents Table of Contents GENERAL INFORMATION ……..4 Validity of these Instructions.

  • Page 4
    Table of Contents Manual Menu Path …………24 Settings Menu Path .
  • Page 5: General Information

    General Information General Information Validity of these Instructions This manual is valid for the burner control system BurnerTronic BT300 in any configuration. The information contained in this document refer to the software versions BT300 v 3.0.0.0 and v 3.1 and UI300 v 3.1. If you use any other software version as mentioned previously some of the described functions may not be available or some available functions are not described in this manual.

  • Page 6: Safety

    LAMTEC GmbH & Co. KG is not liable for damages occurring as a result of non-compliance with the above instructions. Compliance with the above instructions shall not entail any ex- tension to the warranty and liability provisions of LAMTEC GmbH &…

  • Page 7: Safety Instructions — Common Information

    Safety Safety Instructions — Common Information The following symbols are used in this document to draw the user’s attention to important safe- ty information. They are located within the chapter where the information is required. It is es- sential that the safety information is adhered to, and that applies, in particular, to the warnings. DANGER! This draws the user’s attention to imminent danger.

  • Page 8: For Your Safety

    The BT300 is a safety device! The device must not be opened, interfered with or modified. LAMTEC assumes no liability for damages arising as a result of unauthorised interference! • After commissioning and after each maintenance action check the exhaust gas values across the entire power range.

  • Page 9: Security Advice — Mounting

    For Your Safety standards (by checking device parameters via operating elements or using remote-control software after commissioning). To verify settings you should also refer to manufacturer’s documentation of the combustion plant. Protecting the parameters in level 1 by setting a password will prevent any unauthorised change.

  • Page 10: Installation Notes

    For Your Safety Installation Notes • Lay high-voltage ignition cable always separately and in safe distance from device and other cables. • Only trained, qualified personnel may open the BurnerTronic’s cover. • Observe local and national regulations when wiring the electric cables inside the burner. •…

  • Page 11: Commissioning Notes

    For Your Safety Commissioning Notes • Check all safety functions during commissioning! • There is no feature to prevent RASTx connector plugs being transposed. Therefore en- sure the correct assignment of the plant’s plugs prior to commissioning. • Check electromagnetic emissions specific to the application. •…

  • Page 12: Basic Device

    For Your Safety 3.5.2 Basic Device Check the following items prior to commissioning: • Valves must be assigned correctly to valve outputs on BT300. • Correct setting of time parameters (especially safety and pre-ventilation times). • Flame sensor functioning well in case of flame blow-off during operation (incl. flame-out response time) or when parasitic light is present during pre-ventilation period and also at a missing flame formation while end of safety period starts.

  • Page 13: Checking Burner Sequencer Part

    For Your Safety 3.6.3 Checking Burner Sequencer Part Check the following: • Correct setting of time parameters (especially safety and pre-ventilation periods). • Whether an ionisation flame sensor or a corresponding flame scanner is used since only these are capable of running in continuous operation. •…

  • Page 14: Functional Description

    Functional Description Functional Description BT300 combines the benefits of an electronic fuel/air ratio control system with up to three mo- torised actuator elements and optional modules like an analogue output for speed control of the combustion air fan with an electronic burner control unit. The leakage test, flame monitor- ing system, power control unit and (optional) CO/O controller for control and optimisation of an oil or gas-fired forced-draught burner are all integrated.

  • Page 15: Operating Control And Displays

    Operating Control and Displays Operating Control and Displays UI300 User Interface Display BACK key Cursor keys ENTER key Fig. 5-1 User Interface Display The display shows in pictograms: • the menu structure • operating status • parameters • error messages Back key Jump to previous window.

  • Page 16: Menu Functions

    Operating Control and Displays Menu Functions The menu is divided into three paths: INFO MANUAL SETTINGS INFO Select INFO path for information about the following: • Burner • Faults/Fault history • Software version • Display of check sums • Serial number •…

  • Page 17: Main Menu

    Operating Control and Displays Main Menu INFORMATION menu path [selected] Display of fuel type Bar graph of internal firing-rate in % (0 — 100) MANUAL menu path Access level 2 SETTINGS menu path Window number Fig. 5-2 Main menu 1. Use cursor keys to select a menu and press ENTER to confirm.

  • Page 18: Recall Fault History

    Operating Control and Displays 2. Use keys to select menu and press ENTER to confirm. The display shows the «Display operating hours» menu window. Pictogram operating hours Total number of operating hours (device connected to mains voltage) No. of operating hours, oil operation No.

  • Page 19: Software Version

    Operating Control and Displays Error code-display pictogram Fault code (Last 10 faults are stored, no. 01 is the latest fault) Diagnostic code 1 Diagnostic code 2 No. of operating hours when fault has oc- cured Fig. 5-8 Fault history menu NOTICE! Information concerning fault and diagnostic codes you may find in the list of fault codes.

  • Page 20: Display Of Check Sums

    Operating Control and Displays 5.4.4 Display of Check Sums Display check sum 1. Use cursor keys to select menu and press ENTER to confirm. The display shows «CRC16 check sums» menu. Check sums pictogram Check sum, access level 0 Check sum, access level 1 Check sum, access level 2 Check sum, access level 4 Fig.

  • Page 21: Positions Of Actuators

    Operating Control and Displays 5.4.6 Positions of Actuators Display positions of actuators 1. Use the cursor keys to select menu and press ENTER to confirm. The display shows the «Actuators» menu. Actuator pictogram Actuator channel 1 (oil) Actuator channel 2 (air) Actuator channel 3 (oil) Optional channel (OFF;…

  • Page 22
    Operating Control and Displays Digital inputs pictogram Jump to next page Fuel selection oil [no] Fuel selection gas [yes] Burner start [yes] — terminal X10 Fig. 5-14 Page 1 of inputs menu NOTICE! Signals of points 3 and 4 are «logical» signals and not «physical» ones. Background informa- tion: Some signals may have more than one source (terminal, LSB, field buses, parameters).
  • Page 23: Digital Outputs

    Operating Control and Displays NOTICE! Signals of points 4 and 5 in Fig. 5-15 Page 2 of inputs menu are «logical» signals, not «physi- cal». The BT320/330 supports either oil or gas operation, but cannot be switched. Therefore no separate signals for the oil or gas safety interlock chain are generated. The signal on ter- minal X06 is thus generally known as burner‘s safety interlock chain.

  • Page 24
    Operating Control and Displays Call up 2 page of outputs 1. Use the cursor keys to select the next page and press ENTER to confirm. The display shows «Page 2 digital outputs» menu: Digital outputs pictogram Jump to previous page Jump to next page Oil valve 1 [on] — terminal X01 Oil valve 2 [off] — terminal X02…
  • Page 25: Manual Menu Path

    Operating Control and Displays Manual Menu Path MANUAL Select MANUAL path to carry out actions as follows: Switching burner ON and OFF Presetting of burner firing-rate Display MANUAL menu 1. Use cursor keys to select path and press ENTER to confirm. The display shows the «Manual operation»…

  • Page 26: Settings Menu Path

    Operating Control and Displays Settings Menu Path Display SETTINGS menu 1. Use cursor keys to select menu and press ENTER to confirm. The display shows the menu overview. Password pictogram (selected) Delete curves Display program settings Firing-rate controller settings Configuration of read-out actuator outputs Password settings Curve settings…

  • Page 27: Program Sequence

    Operating Control and Displays 5.6.2 Program Sequence Configure program sequence 1. Use cursor keys to select menu and press ENTER to confirm. The display shows the program sequence overview. Duration of pre-ventilation [selected] Pilot burner oil operation Duration of post-ventilation Valve leakage test Pilot burner gas operation Fig.

  • Page 28
    Operating Control and Displays UI300 pictogram BT300 pictogram Cancel (backwards) Parameter number UI300 Parameter number UI300 Transfer by pressing ENTER (flashing) Value for UI300 Fig. 5-27 Secure data transfer Value for BT300 NOTICE! Apply value only if the values for UI300 and BT300 are identical! The parameter value must be confirmed by pressing ENTER within the countdown (8 s)! 5.
  • Page 29
    Operating Control and Displays Pictogram UI300 Pictogram BT300 Parameter number UI300 Parameter number BT300 Pictogram apply parameters Value BT300 Value UI300 Fig. 5-29 Display of invalid data transfer Set duration of post-ventilation 1. Use cursor keys to select menu and press ENTER to confirm.
  • Page 30
    Operating Control and Displays NOTICE! You require access level 2 to make settings in this function! Accept or discard the entry! Activate valve leakage test prior to ignition 1. Use cursor keys to select menu and press ENTER to confirm. 2.
  • Page 31
    Operating Control and Displays Valve leakage test period 1. Use cursor keys to select menu and press ENTER to confirm. The display shows the valve leakage test period menu. Valve leakage test period pictogram Set valve leakage test period Press ENTER to accept settings Fig.
  • Page 32
    Operating Control and Displays Pilot burner in oil operation pictogram Activate pilot burner in oil operation Press ENTER to accept settings Fig. 5-36 Pilot burner in oil operation menu NOTICE! You require access level 2 to make settings in this function! Accept or discard the entry! Configuration of actuating outputs 1.
  • Page 33
    Operating Control and Displays 2. Use cursor keys to set firing-rate point and press ENTER to confirm. Set-point channel 1 is chosen (displayed inversely). 3. Use cursor keys to set channels’ actuator position. 4. Use cursor keys to switch to next channel. 5.
  • Page 34
    Operating Control and Displays NOTICE! During multi-stage operation, the following points are available: Ignition point 1 (first stage), 1  2 (valve switch-on point, second stage), 1  2 (valve switch-off point, second stage) 2 (second level), 2  3 (valve switch-on point, third stage), 2 …
  • Page 35
    Operating Control and Displays Set staged oil operation — transition from 1 to 2 stage Display valve switch-on point, 2 stage Setpoint, air damper position Actual value, air damper position Fig. 5-41 Transition from 1 to 2 stage 1. Select the setpoint for the air damper position and press ENTER to confirm.
  • Page 36
    Operating Control and Displays The display shows the confirmation prompt: Back to previous menu Deleting values [selected] Proceed with deleting values Fig. 5-43 Confirmation prompt of deleting curves menu 2. Press ENTER The curve values will be deleted. The display shows the values deleted menu. Values deleted Fig.
  • Page 37: Other Displays

    Operating Control and Displays 5.6.3 Other Displays No connection between UI300 and BT300 UI300 User Interface pictogram No connection symbol BT300 burner control Fig. 5-46 No connection Display shown e.g. when using LSB remote software and communication between BT300 and UI300 is temporarily unavailable.

  • Page 38: Leakage Test For Main Gas Valves

    Leakage Test for Main Gas Valves Leakage Test for Main Gas Valves Calculation Example An (approximate) formula for calculating the leakage test monitoring facility is summarised be- low: Definitions: GDW: gas pressure monitor gas-side safety shut-off device burner-side safety shut-off device barometric air pressure <…

  • Page 39: Leakage Test With Ventilation Via Roof

    Leakage Test for Main Gas Valves Leakage Test with Ventilation Via Roof The leakage test checks whether or not the main gas valves are leakproof. For this purpose the gas pressure of the supply is analysed. As leakage test section (space between the two main valves) burns empty whenever the burn- er is switched off, this part is usually pressureless at start-up (gas pressure >…

  • Page 40
    Leakage Test for Main Gas Valves Fig. 6-1 Leakage test process diagram…
  • Page 41: Exhaust Of Test Line Over The Roof

    Leakage Test for Main Gas Valves Exhaust of Test Line Over the Roof NOTICE! Consider diameter of gas line in the roof ventilation. For ventilation, plug X02 is activated for 3 s. Make sure that this period is sufficient even for smallest ventilation line diameter! Fig.

  • Page 42: Technical Data

    Technical Data Technical Data Technical Data BT300 Function Power supply: 230 V +10/-15 % 47-63 Hz 115 V +10/-15 % 47-63 Hz (on request) Maximum backup-fuse: 10 A slow-blow To be used only in a grounded power line network! Power consumption: max.

  • Page 43: Actuators 662R550

    Technical Data Environmental Conditions Storage: Climatic conditions Class 1K3 according to DIN EN 60721-3 Mechanic conditions Class 1M2 according to DIN EN 60721-3 Temperature range -20 … +70 °C (no condensation) Electronic safety: Degree of protection (DIN EN 60529): BT300 – IP40 housing IP20 terminals UI300 –…

  • Page 44: Actuators 662R5001

    Technical Data NOTICE! Damaging the 0,8 Nm actuator by opening the actuator. If you open the actuator at another part as the cover of the electric connection, you will dam- age the actuator.  Do not open the actuator but at the cover of the electric connection. Actuators 662R5001…

  • Page 45
    Technical Data Environmental conditions 662R5001…/662R5003…/662R5009… Repeat frequency 2,5 kHz Electrical safety Protection class 2 as per DIN EN 60730 NOTICE! Damage of the actuator due to opening the actuators housing. You will damage the actuator, if you open the actuator’s housing at another (this affects actu- ators with 1,2, 3,0 and 9,0 Nm).
  • Page 46
    Technical Data…
  • Page 48
    The information in this publication is subject to technical changes. LAMTEC Meß- und Regeltechnik LAMTEC Leipzig GmbH & Co. KG Presented by: für Feuerungen GmbH & Co. KG Wiesenstraße 6 Portitzer Straße 69 D-69190 Walldorf D-04425 Taucha Phone: +49 (0) 6227 / 6052-0…
  • Панель управления C76 901114 3 20070110

  • Панель управления C92 900793 3 20120621

  • Панель управления C138 901065 2 20040824

  • Панель управления C145 900746 5 20120401

  • Панель управления C146 900022 4 20120401

  • Панель управления C147 900768 4 20120401

  • Панель управления C149 900143 5 20120401

  • Панель управления C168 900367 2 20040303

  • Панель управления C169 tavС169 1 20000308

  • Панель управления C170 900090 3 20120401

  • Панель управления C171 900094 3 20120625

  • Панель управления C179 17229 5 20120401

  • Панель управления C181 R15997 4 20120401

  • Панель управления C182 57229 3 20041015

  • Панель управления C182 57229 4 20120401

  • Панель управления C183 57228 2 20010801

  • Панель управления C183 57228 3 20041104

  • Панель управления C184 13303 3 20041104

  • Панель управления C185 13529 6 20120622

  • Панель управления C186 900460 3 20070901

  • Панель управления C187 900109 3 20041104

  • Панель управления C188 900056 3 20061220

  • Панель управления C189 900065 3 20061215

  • Панель управления C190 900124 3 20061220

  • Панель управления C191 900420 3 20070101

  • Панель управления C193 900348 4 20120401

  • Панель управления C194 900101 4 20120621

  • Панель управления C195 900071 5 20120401

  • Панель управления C196 900068 4 20120709

  • Панель управления C197 900118 4 20120625

  • Панель управления C198 900815 4 20120401

  • Панель управления C204 49595 4 20160225

  • Панель управления C205 901108 1 20141104

  • Панель управления C208 900817 3 20120401

  • Панель управления C209 900601 3 20120625

  • Панель управления C211 901110 3 20120709

  • Панель управления C217 901098 3 20061212

  • Панель управления C220 900714 3 20120625

  • Панель управления C260 900134 2 20120625

  • Панель управления C261 900664 2 20120625

  • Панель управления C262 901167 3 20120625

  • Панель управления C263 901152 1 20041027

  • Панель управления C264 901176 2 20080720

  • Панель управления C268 901203 1 20041104

  • Панель управления C270 22010026 1 20031010

  • Панель управления C318 20030011 1 20071120

  • Панель управления C319 901164 3 20121213

  • Панель управления C329 901199 0 20040303

  • Панель управления C350 22030184 1 20070202

  • Панель управления C392 24010025 2 20120401

  • Панель управления C394 24010028 1 20070404

  • Панель управления C394 24010028 2 20120401

  • Панель управления C402 12120112 1 20120625

  • Панель управления C408 12100006 0 20070122

  • Панель управления C409 24060020 2 20120401

  • Панель управления C411 24060036 0 20070303

  • Панель управления C411 24060036 2 20120401

  • Панель управления C425 12010158 0 20070914

  • Панель управления C435 25010045 2 20120401

  • Панель управления C437 25010017 2 20120401

  • Панель управления C438 25040007 3 20120401

  • Панель управления C439 25030011 1 20090701

  • Панель управления C440 25020029 1 20110701

  • Панель управления C443 25030023 1 20090701

  • Панель управления C445 25030030 2 20110515

  • Панель управления C448 24010049 0 20080909

  • Панель управления C452 25040026 2 20110515

  • Панель управления C453 25040020 1 20090701

  • Панель управления C454 22030239 0 20060508

  • Панель управления C457 25020036 1 20110701

  • Панель управления C480 20040022 1 20110701

  • Панель управления C486 20040006 1 20110701

  • Панель управления C487 20040025 1 20110701

  • Панель управления C498 25040043 0 20110210

  • Панель управления C500 24020029 0 20110404

  • Панель управления C503 27010043 2 20130606

  • Панель управления C503 27010043 4 20131023

  • Панель управления C509 24030055 0 20111207

  • Панель управления C509 24030055 1 20120401

  • Панель управления C513 22040066 0 20100210

  • Панель управления C514 12120109 2 20130901

  • Панель управления C514 12120109 3 20141111

  • Панель управления C517 25040057 0 20110515

  • Панель управления C518 22040064 0 20100210

  • Панель управления C523 24020036 0 20121001

  • Панель управления C526 24100075 3 20141106

  • Панель управления C532 12120179 0 20130201

  • Панель управления C532 12120179 1 20140401

  • Панель управления C537 24030066 0 20130508

  • Панель управления C539 27020019 0 20130606

  • Панель управления C540 24100097 1 20140911

  • Панель управления C549 12150001 0 20140211

  • Панель управления C551 12150002 0 20140225

  • Панель управления C553 12130047 0 20140404

  • Панель управления C554 25050043 0 20140418

  • Панель управления C557 25030044 0 20140505

  • Панель управления C558 22020003 1 20120626

  • Панель управления C560 24100105 0 20140606

  • Панель управления C574 28020054 0 20150206

  • Панель управления C575 24050022 0 20150202

  • Панель управления C576 11020108 1 20120401

  • Панель управления C578 24050012 0 20150303

  • Панель управления C586 28020041 0 20150707

  • Панель управления C592 24020035 0 20121030

  • Панель управления C595 10150053 0 20141201

  • Панель управления C595 10150053 1 20160407

  • Панель управления C600 25040081 0 20160513

  • Панель управления C601 25030055 0 20160513

  • Lamtec BurnerTronic BT320 Quick Reference

    1. Manuals
    2. Brands
    3. Lamtec Manuals
    4. Industrial Equipment
    5. BurnerTronic BT320
    6. Quick reference

    • Contents

    • Table of Contents

    • Bookmarks

    Quick Links

    Quick Refernce for

    Endusers

    Sensors uad Systems

    for Combustion Engineering

    BurnerTronic BT300

    BT320…BT340

    loading

    Related Manuals for Lamtec BurnerTronic BT320

    Summary of Contents for Lamtec BurnerTronic BT320

    • Page 1
      Quick Refernce for BurnerTronic BT300 Endusers BT320…BT340 Sensors uad Systems for Combustion Engineering…
    • Page 3: Table Of Contents

      Table of Contents Table of Contents GENERAL INFORMATION ……..4 Validity of these Instructions.

    • Page 4
      Table of Contents Manual Menu Path …………24 Settings Menu Path .
    • Page 5: General Information

      General Information General Information Validity of these Instructions This manual is valid for the burner control system BurnerTronic BT300 in any configuration. The information contained in this document refer to the software versions BT300 v 3.0.0.0 and v 3.1 and UI300 v 3.1. If you use any other software version as mentioned previously some of the described functions may not be available or some available functions are not described in this manual.

    • Page 6: Safety

      LAMTEC GmbH & Co. KG is not liable for damages occurring as a result of non-compliance with the above instructions. Compliance with the above instructions shall not entail any ex- tension to the warranty and liability provisions of LAMTEC GmbH &…

    • Page 7: Safety Instructions — Common Information

      Safety Safety Instructions — Common Information The following symbols are used in this document to draw the user’s attention to important safe- ty information. They are located within the chapter where the information is required. It is es- sential that the safety information is adhered to, and that applies, in particular, to the warnings. DANGER! This draws the user’s attention to imminent danger.

    • Page 8: For Your Safety

      The BT300 is a safety device! The device must not be opened, interfered with or modified. LAMTEC assumes no liability for damages arising as a result of unauthorised interference! • After commissioning and after each maintenance action check the exhaust gas values across the entire power range.

    • Page 9: Security Advice — Mounting

      For Your Safety standards (by checking device parameters via operating elements or using remote-control software after commissioning). To verify settings you should also refer to manufacturer’s documentation of the combustion plant. Protecting the parameters in level 1 by setting a password will prevent any unauthorised change.

    • Page 10: Installation Notes

      For Your Safety Installation Notes • Lay high-voltage ignition cable always separately and in safe distance from device and other cables. • Only trained, qualified personnel may open the BurnerTronic’s cover. • Observe local and national regulations when wiring the electric cables inside the burner. •…

    • Page 11: Commissioning Notes

      For Your Safety Commissioning Notes • Check all safety functions during commissioning! • There is no feature to prevent RASTx connector plugs being transposed. Therefore en- sure the correct assignment of the plant’s plugs prior to commissioning. • Check electromagnetic emissions specific to the application. •…

    • Page 12: Basic Device

      For Your Safety 3.5.2 Basic Device Check the following items prior to commissioning: • Valves must be assigned correctly to valve outputs on BT300. • Correct setting of time parameters (especially safety and pre-ventilation times). • Flame sensor functioning well in case of flame blow-off during operation (incl. flame-out response time) or when parasitic light is present during pre-ventilation period and also at a missing flame formation while end of safety period starts.

    • Page 13: Checking Burner Sequencer Part

      For Your Safety 3.6.3 Checking Burner Sequencer Part Check the following: • Correct setting of time parameters (especially safety and pre-ventilation periods). • Whether an ionisation flame sensor or a corresponding flame scanner is used since only these are capable of running in continuous operation. •…

    • Page 14: Functional Description

      Functional Description Functional Description BT300 combines the benefits of an electronic fuel/air ratio control system with up to three mo- torised actuator elements and optional modules like an analogue output for speed control of the combustion air fan with an electronic burner control unit. The leakage test, flame monitor- ing system, power control unit and (optional) CO/O controller for control and optimisation of an oil or gas-fired forced-draught burner are all integrated.

    • Page 15: Operating Control And Displays

      Operating Control and Displays Operating Control and Displays UI300 User Interface Display BACK key Cursor keys ENTER key Fig. 5-1 User Interface Display The display shows in pictograms: • the menu structure • operating status • parameters • error messages Back key Jump to previous window.

    • Page 16: Menu Functions

      Operating Control and Displays Menu Functions The menu is divided into three paths: INFO MANUAL SETTINGS INFO Select INFO path for information about the following: • Burner • Faults/Fault history • Software version • Display of check sums • Serial number •…

    • Page 17: Main Menu

      Operating Control and Displays Main Menu INFORMATION menu path [selected] Display of fuel type Bar graph of internal firing-rate in % (0 — 100) MANUAL menu path Access level 2 SETTINGS menu path Window number Fig. 5-2 Main menu 1. Use cursor keys to select a menu and press ENTER to confirm.

    • Page 18: Recall Fault History

      Operating Control and Displays 2. Use keys to select menu and press ENTER to confirm. The display shows the «Display operating hours» menu window. Pictogram operating hours Total number of operating hours (device connected to mains voltage) No. of operating hours, oil operation No.

    • Page 19: Software Version

      Operating Control and Displays Error code-display pictogram Fault code (Last 10 faults are stored, no. 01 is the latest fault) Diagnostic code 1 Diagnostic code 2 No. of operating hours when fault has oc- cured Fig. 5-8 Fault history menu NOTICE! Information concerning fault and diagnostic codes you may find in the list of fault codes.

    • Page 20: Display Of Check Sums

      Operating Control and Displays 5.4.4 Display of Check Sums Display check sum 1. Use cursor keys to select menu and press ENTER to confirm. The display shows «CRC16 check sums» menu. Check sums pictogram Check sum, access level 0 Check sum, access level 1 Check sum, access level 2 Check sum, access level 4 Fig.

    • Page 21: Positions Of Actuators

      Operating Control and Displays 5.4.6 Positions of Actuators Display positions of actuators 1. Use the cursor keys to select menu and press ENTER to confirm. The display shows the «Actuators» menu. Actuator pictogram Actuator channel 1 (oil) Actuator channel 2 (air) Actuator channel 3 (oil) Optional channel (OFF;…

    • Page 22
      Operating Control and Displays Digital inputs pictogram Jump to next page Fuel selection oil [no] Fuel selection gas [yes] Burner start [yes] — terminal X10 Fig. 5-14 Page 1 of inputs menu NOTICE! Signals of points 3 and 4 are «logical» signals and not «physical» ones. Background informa- tion: Some signals may have more than one source (terminal, LSB, field buses, parameters).
    • Page 23: Digital Outputs

      Operating Control and Displays NOTICE! Signals of points 4 and 5 in Fig. 5-15 Page 2 of inputs menu are «logical» signals, not «physi- cal». The BT320/330 supports either oil or gas operation, but cannot be switched. Therefore no separate signals for the oil or gas safety interlock chain are generated. The signal on ter- minal X06 is thus generally known as burner‘s safety interlock chain.

    • Page 24
      Operating Control and Displays Call up 2 page of outputs 1. Use the cursor keys to select the next page and press ENTER to confirm. The display shows «Page 2 digital outputs» menu: Digital outputs pictogram Jump to previous page Jump to next page Oil valve 1 [on] — terminal X01 Oil valve 2 [off] — terminal X02…
    • Page 25: Manual Menu Path

      Operating Control and Displays Manual Menu Path MANUAL Select MANUAL path to carry out actions as follows: Switching burner ON and OFF Presetting of burner firing-rate Display MANUAL menu 1. Use cursor keys to select path and press ENTER to confirm. The display shows the «Manual operation»…

    • Page 26: Settings Menu Path

      Operating Control and Displays Settings Menu Path Display SETTINGS menu 1. Use cursor keys to select menu and press ENTER to confirm. The display shows the menu overview. Password pictogram (selected) Delete curves Display program settings Firing-rate controller settings Configuration of read-out actuator outputs Password settings Curve settings…

    • Page 27: Program Sequence

      Operating Control and Displays 5.6.2 Program Sequence Configure program sequence 1. Use cursor keys to select menu and press ENTER to confirm. The display shows the program sequence overview. Duration of pre-ventilation [selected] Pilot burner oil operation Duration of post-ventilation Valve leakage test Pilot burner gas operation Fig.

    • Page 28
      Operating Control and Displays UI300 pictogram BT300 pictogram Cancel (backwards) Parameter number UI300 Parameter number UI300 Transfer by pressing ENTER (flashing) Value for UI300 Fig. 5-27 Secure data transfer Value for BT300 NOTICE! Apply value only if the values for UI300 and BT300 are identical! The parameter value must be confirmed by pressing ENTER within the countdown (8 s)! 5.
    • Page 29
      Operating Control and Displays Pictogram UI300 Pictogram BT300 Parameter number UI300 Parameter number BT300 Pictogram apply parameters Value BT300 Value UI300 Fig. 5-29 Display of invalid data transfer Set duration of post-ventilation 1. Use cursor keys to select menu and press ENTER to confirm.
    • Page 30
      Operating Control and Displays NOTICE! You require access level 2 to make settings in this function! Accept or discard the entry! Activate valve leakage test prior to ignition 1. Use cursor keys to select menu and press ENTER to confirm. 2.
    • Page 31
      Operating Control and Displays Valve leakage test period 1. Use cursor keys to select menu and press ENTER to confirm. The display shows the valve leakage test period menu. Valve leakage test period pictogram Set valve leakage test period Press ENTER to accept settings Fig.
    • Page 32
      Operating Control and Displays Pilot burner in oil operation pictogram Activate pilot burner in oil operation Press ENTER to accept settings Fig. 5-36 Pilot burner in oil operation menu NOTICE! You require access level 2 to make settings in this function! Accept or discard the entry! Configuration of actuating outputs 1.
    • Page 33
      Operating Control and Displays 2. Use cursor keys to set firing-rate point and press ENTER to confirm. Set-point channel 1 is chosen (displayed inversely). 3. Use cursor keys to set channels’ actuator position. 4. Use cursor keys to switch to next channel. 5.
    • Page 34
      Operating Control and Displays NOTICE! During multi-stage operation, the following points are available: Ignition point 1 (first stage), 1  2 (valve switch-on point, second stage), 1  2 (valve switch-off point, second stage) 2 (second level), 2  3 (valve switch-on point, third stage), 2 …
    • Page 35
      Operating Control and Displays Set staged oil operation — transition from 1 to 2 stage Display valve switch-on point, 2 stage Setpoint, air damper position Actual value, air damper position Fig. 5-41 Transition from 1 to 2 stage 1. Select the setpoint for the air damper position and press ENTER to confirm.
    • Page 36
      Operating Control and Displays The display shows the confirmation prompt: Back to previous menu Deleting values [selected] Proceed with deleting values Fig. 5-43 Confirmation prompt of deleting curves menu 2. Press ENTER The curve values will be deleted. The display shows the values deleted menu. Values deleted Fig.
    • Page 37: Other Displays

      Operating Control and Displays 5.6.3 Other Displays No connection between UI300 and BT300 UI300 User Interface pictogram No connection symbol BT300 burner control Fig. 5-46 No connection Display shown e.g. when using LSB remote software and communication between BT300 and UI300 is temporarily unavailable.

    • Page 38: Leakage Test For Main Gas Valves

      Leakage Test for Main Gas Valves Leakage Test for Main Gas Valves Calculation Example An (approximate) formula for calculating the leakage test monitoring facility is summarised be- low: Definitions: GDW: gas pressure monitor gas-side safety shut-off device burner-side safety shut-off device barometric air pressure <…

    • Page 39: Leakage Test With Ventilation Via Roof

      Leakage Test for Main Gas Valves Leakage Test with Ventilation Via Roof The leakage test checks whether or not the main gas valves are leakproof. For this purpose the gas pressure of the supply is analysed. As leakage test section (space between the two main valves) burns empty whenever the burn- er is switched off, this part is usually pressureless at start-up (gas pressure >…

    • Page 40
      Leakage Test for Main Gas Valves Fig. 6-1 Leakage test process diagram…
    • Page 41: Exhaust Of Test Line Over The Roof

      Leakage Test for Main Gas Valves Exhaust of Test Line Over the Roof NOTICE! Consider diameter of gas line in the roof ventilation. For ventilation, plug X02 is activated for 3 s. Make sure that this period is sufficient even for smallest ventilation line diameter! Fig.

    • Page 42: Technical Data

      Technical Data Technical Data Technical Data BT300 Function Power supply: 230 V +10/-15 % 47-63 Hz 115 V +10/-15 % 47-63 Hz (on request) Maximum backup-fuse: 10 A slow-blow To be used only in a grounded power line network! Power consumption: max.

    • Page 43: Actuators 662R550

      Technical Data Environmental Conditions Storage: Climatic conditions Class 1K3 according to DIN EN 60721-3 Mechanic conditions Class 1M2 according to DIN EN 60721-3 Temperature range -20 … +70 °C (no condensation) Electronic safety: Degree of protection (DIN EN 60529): BT300 – IP40 housing IP20 terminals UI300 –…

    • Page 44: Actuators 662R5001

      Technical Data NOTICE! Damaging the 0,8 Nm actuator by opening the actuator. If you open the actuator at another part as the cover of the electric connection, you will dam- age the actuator.  Do not open the actuator but at the cover of the electric connection. Actuators 662R5001…

    • Page 45
      Technical Data Environmental conditions 662R5001…/662R5003…/662R5009… Repeat frequency 2,5 kHz Electrical safety Protection class 2 as per DIN EN 60730 NOTICE! Damage of the actuator due to opening the actuators housing. You will damage the actuator, if you open the actuator’s housing at another (this affects actu- ators with 1,2, 3,0 and 9,0 Nm).
    • Page 46
      Technical Data…
    • Page 48
      The information in this publication is subject to technical changes. LAMTEC Meß- und Regeltechnik LAMTEC Leipzig GmbH & Co. KG Presented by: für Feuerungen GmbH & Co. KG Wiesenstraße 6 Portitzer Straße 69 D-69190 Walldorf D-04425 Taucha Phone: +49 (0) 6227 / 6052-0…

    9

    Appendix

    9.4

    A * means, that a reset is valid in this error. A blinking error LED signalises, that the system

    will be restarted within a short time. 

    A ** means, the system tries to restart without a limit.

    Fault

    TRD

    Code:

    P425=0

    P836>1

    S000

    0

    S001

    0

    S002

    0

    S003

    0

    S004

    1

    S005

    0

    S006

    0

    S007

    0

    S008

    0

    S009

    0

    S010

    0

    S011

    0

    S012

    0

    S013

    1

    S102

    0

    S103

    0

    S104

    0

    S105

    >88

    S106

    0

    S107

    0

    S108

    0

    S110

    0

    S111

    0

    S112

    0

    S120

    1

    S121

    0

    S122

    0

    S123

    0

    S124

    0

    S125

    0

    S139

    0

    S140

    0

    S141

    0

    S142

    0

    EN676

    Description

    P425=2

    21.1.11

    P836>1

    0

    No fault code available for this fault

    3

    No pilot flame appearing

    0

    light/dark check failure

    3

    Flame fault during ignition

    1

    Flame fault during operation

    3

    Flame signal does not appear during 1sr safety time

    3

    Flame signal goes out during stabilising time

    3

    Flame signal goes out during 1st safety time

    0

    Flame signal goes out during 2nd safety time

    0

    Flame signal does not appear during safety time

    0

    Flame signal goes out immediately after ignition

    0

    Internal fault: 5 sec. outside light monitoring period not kept

    0

    relay module not connected or missing 24V supply for relay

    3

    main flame signals appears during ignition

    0

    Internal fault: Internal communication fifo has overflowed

    0

    Internal fault: Error in misc. data

    0

    Internal Fault: D/A-Converter faulty

    3

    Curve data faulty! Curve set no.:

    0

    parameters not equal for parameter no.:

    0

    Invalid configuration

    0

    Different input signals on main processor and monitoring processor terminal-

    0

    CRC-16 test had found an error

    0

    RAM-Test detected error

    0

    Etamatic selftest exceeds timeout limit

    1

    Different operating modes for mon. and main processor

    0

    Correction is outside permissible range. Channel : 1

    0

    Correction is outside permissible range. Channel : 2

    0

    Correction is outside permissible range. Channel : 3

    0

    Correction is outside permissible range. Channel : 4

    0

    Correction is outside permissible range. Channel : 5

    0

    Integr. Flame Detector: selftest fault

    0

    EEProm is faulty.

    0

    Potentiometer faulty, feedback changing too quickly: channel 1

    0

    Potentiometer faulty, feedback changing too quickly: channel 2

    74

    • Page 1
      Manual BT300 BurnerTronic Sensors and Systems for Combustion Engineering www.lamtec.de…
    • Page 3: Table Of Contents

      Table of Contents Table of Contents Important Information about the Manual ……..6 Validity of these Instructions.

    • Page 4
      Table of Contents 4.8.2 Direction of Rotation/Position Damper Closed ……55 4.8.3 Detection of Actuators with Transposed Connections ….56 4.8.4 Adjusting of Actuators .
    • Page 5
      Table of Contents 5.3.7.2 Access Rights ……….130 5.3.7.3 BurnerTronic .
    • Page 6
      Table of Contents 7.4.2 LEDs …………186 7.4.3 Electrical Connection .
    • Page 7: Important Information About The Manual

      Important Information about the Manual Important Information about the Manual Validity of these Instructions This manual is valid for the burner control system BurnerTronic BT300 in any configuration. The information contained in this document refer to the software versions BT300 v3.5 and UI300 v3.8.

    • Page 8: General Safety Instructions

      General Safety Instructions General Safety Instructions Classification of the Safety Instructions and Warnings The following symbols are used in this document to draw the user’s attention to important safe- ty information. They are located at points where the information is required. It is essential that the safety information is observed and followed, and that applies particularly to the warnings.

    • Page 9: Product-Specific Dangers

      The BT300 is a safety device! The device must not be opened, interfered with or modified. LAMTEC assumes no liability for damages arising as a result of unauthorised interference! • After commissioning and after each maintenance action check the exhaust gas values across the entire power range.

    • Page 10: Commissioning Notes

      General Safety Instructions 2.2.1 Commissioning Notes • Check all safety functions during commissioning! • There is no feature to prevent RASTx connector plugs being transposed. Therefore en- sure the correct assignment of the plant’s plugs prior to commissioning. • Check electromagnetic emissions specific to the application. •…

    • Page 11: Basic Device

      General Safety Instructions 2.2.1.2 Basic Device Check the following items prior to commissioning: • Valves must be assigned correctly to valve outputs on BT300. • Correct setting of time parameters (especially safety and pre-purge times). • Flame sensor functioning well in case of: •…

    • Page 12: Checking The Fuel/Air Ratio Control System

      General Safety Instructions 2.2.2.2 Checking the Fuel/Air Ratio Control System Save setting values (curve parameters) for actuator elements, fuel and combustion air through the complete range of burner firing rate in sufficient number. Select setting values of fuel and combustion air considering combustion chamber pressure, fuel pressure, temperature and pressure of the combustion air in order to guarantee proper operation with adequate excess air through the entire range of burner firing rate.

    • Page 13: Installation Notes

      General Safety Instructions NOTICE Damaging the servomotors with 1.2 Nm and 9.0 Nm through opening. Opening the servomotor destroys the servomotor. The warranty expires. Installation Notes • Lay high-voltage ignition cable always separately and in safe distance from device and other cables.

    • Page 14: Electrical Connection Flame Sensor

      General Safety Instructions Electrical Connection Flame Sensor Interruptions and losses in signal transmission need to be minimised: • Do not wire the sensor cable with other cables. Flame signal is reduced through line capacities.  Use a separate 7-pole cable. •…

    • Page 15: Product Description

      Product Description Product Description Functional Description BT300 combines the benefits of an electronic fuel/air ratio control system with up to three mo- torised actuator elements and optional modules like an analogue output for speed control of the combustion air fan with an electronic burner control unit. The leakage test, flame monitor- ing system, power control unit and (optional) CO/O controller for control and optimisation of an oil or gas-fired forced-draught burner are all integrated.

    • Page 16: Life Cycle

      A cutting and clamping technique (SKT) * B screw terminals * 2 RAST2.5 plug connector for actuator, User interface and LAMTEC SYSTEM BUS in cutting and clamping technique * please note plug-in direction The designed lifetime is not the warranty time specified in the Terms of Delivery…

    • Page 17
      Product Description Fig. 3-1 Dimensions BT320 … 340 (terminal assignment BT330/BT340 only) Fig. 3-2 UI300 side view Fig. 3-3 UI300 front view Fig. 3-4 UI300 panel cut-out…
    • Page 18
      Product Description Function Power supply: 230 V +10/-15 % 47-63 Hz 115 V +10/-15 % 47-63 Hz (on request) Maximum backup-fuse: 10 A slow-blow To be used only in a grounded power line network! Power consumption: max. 30 VA 1 A Switching threshold of ionisation current: Digital signal inputs:…
    • Page 19: Actuator

      Product Description Environmental Conditions Temperature range -20 … +60 °C/-4 °F … +140 °F (condensation is prohibited) Transport: Climatic conditions Class 2K3 according to DIN EN 60721-3 Mechanic conditions Class 2M2 according to DIN EN 60721-3 Temperature range -20 … +70 °C/-4 °F … +158 °F (condensation is prohibited) Storage: Climatic conditions…

    • Page 20
      Product Description 1 15.4 (+0.3/-1) including axial play 2 Cap cannot be removed by hand 3 Flexible control cable (black), length 1.5 m 4 Plug connector (RAST 2.5) pole number 6 5 Brass tube and M4 x 30 DIN 912 cylinder bolt fixed with O-ring Function Power supply 24 VDC ±20 %…
    • Page 21: Actuators 662R5001

      Product Description NOTICE Damaging the 0,8 Nm actuator by opening the actuator. Do not open the actuator at another part as the cover of the electric connection, otherwise the actuator will be damaged. The warranty expires and is invalid.  Do not open the actuator but at the cover of the electric connection. 3.3.2.2 Actuators 662R5001…

    • Page 22
      Product Description Fig. 3-6 Dimensional drawing of motor type 0R5001-1 and type 662R5003-1 with cable Fig. 3-7 Dimensional drawing of motor type 660R5009-0 without cable but with plug…
    • Page 23
      Product Description Function 662R5001… 662R5003… 662R5009… Power supply: 24VDC ±20 % Floating time 5 s/90° 5 s/90° 15 s/90° Direction of rotation 0° left — view to the drive shaft to 90° Effective 1.2 Nm 3 Nm 9 Nm output torque (both directions of rota- (both directions of rota- (both directions of rotation)
    • Page 24: Flame Sensor/Flame Scanner

      Product Description 3.3.3 Flame Sensor/Flame Scanner Fig. 3-8 KLC 1000 Fig. 3-9 Dimensions KLC 1000 (1 = radial scanning opening) KLC10/KLC1000 Input Data Power supply: KLC10: 120 VAC -15/+10 % 50-60 Hz KLC1000: 230/240 VAC -15/+10 % 50-60 Hz Current consumption: 5,5 mA Optical Evaluation Spectral range:…

    • Page 25
      Product Description Fig. 3-10 Dimensions of angle adapter for KLC 2002 Fig. 3-11 Dimensions KLC 2002 KLC20/KLC2002 Input Data Power supply: KLC20: 120 VAC -15/+10 % 50-60 Hz KLC2002: 230/240 VAC -15/+10 % 50-60 Hz Current consumption: 3 — 4 mA Optical Evaluation Spectral range: 380 — 1150 nm…
    • Page 26: Mounting And Functions

      Mounting and Functions Mounting and Functions System Overview Fig. 4-1 System overview of BurnerTronic BT300…

    • Page 27: Connecting Diagrams

      Mounting and Functions Connecting Diagrams X30 = User Interface UI 300 Maximum cable length X31 = LSB Option X01-X6+X08: 10 m X32 = continuous output 1, e.g. air damper X07+X09: 20 m X33 = continuous output 2, e.g. gas damper X10: 20 m X34 = continuous output 3 (optional)

    • Page 28: Optional Connections For The Fuel Line

      Mounting and Functions When running oil/gas burning applications (BT340 in combination with DFM300), the function ’Gas > min’ is aligned with X05. Put in oil/gas applications, the pressure monitoring for ’Oil pressure > min.’ in the oil safety ► interlock chain (SIC). 4.2.1 Optional Connections for the Fuel Line Fuel valve (gas side)

    • Page 29: Optional Connections For The Flame Scanner

      Mounting and Functions Oil pressure min sensor Oil valve 1 stage Oil valve 2 stage Oil valve 3 stage Fig. 4-4 Fuel train — oil 3-stage Oil pressure min sensor Oil valve for modulated operation, oil valve 1 stage at 2-stage operation Oil valve 2 stage at 2-stage operation Optional ignition valve…

    • Page 30
      Mounting and Functions Fig. 4-8 Connecting diagram of the sensor Honeywell IRD1020 Fig. 4-9 Connecting diagram of sensor Honeywell IRD1010, KLC10, KLC20, KLC1000 or KLC2002 Colour code BK = black; BN = brown; BU = blue Fig. 4-10 Connecting diagram F300K via power pack FN20 (also valid for F200K) Fig.
    • Page 31
      Mounting and Functions Dimensional Drawings Fig. 4-12 Dimensional drawing F200K Fig. 4-13 Dimensional drawing F300K Fig. 4-15 Dimensional drawing KLC1000/KLC2002 side view Fig. 4-14 Dimensional drawing KLC1000/KLC2002 top view 1 Radial opening (with KLC1000 only)
    • Page 32: Lsb Module Integration

      Mounting and Functions 4.2.3 LSB Module Integration EBM100 may be used as an alterna- tive field bus module instead of PBM100 Alternative CO/O measurement LEM100 can be used as an alternative to LCM100 to connect LSB to BT100 CO/O measurement Fig.

    • Page 33
      2x2x0,60 twisted pairs with shielding, impedance 120 Devices on LAMTEC SYSTEM BUS (LSB) must be connected in serial/row (see Fig. 4-17 Se- rial BUS connection). The first and the last participant on LSB must be terminated with a ter- mination resistor of 120 . All the other BUS participants are not allowed to be connected to any termination resistor at all.
    • Page 34: Flame Monitoring

      The following types of flame sensor for intermittent operation (burner switched off at least once every 24 hours) are valid for use. Manufacturer Type Settings P 800 Approval LAMTEC F152 with FFS07 o. FFS08 UV (up to v3.1) Continuous contact (from v3.3) F200K with FN20 UV (up to v3.1)

    • Page 35: Flame Sensors

      Mounting and Functions WARNING! Danger from fuel ingress to combustion chamber after loss of flame! Improper use or configuration of flame sensors not approved for continuous operation can re- sult in hazardous situations and possible cause of explosion leading to loss of life and prop- erty.

    • Page 36
      Mounting and Functions NOTICE To avoid any disturbance, do not align the detector direct to the ignition spark. Breakdowns during pre-purge procedure may occur. The maximum length of the connection must be in accordance with the technical data. Install the detector connection cable with most possible distance to the ignition cable or the mains cable.
    • Page 37: Klc 10/Klc 1000

      Mounting and Functions KLC 20/KLC 2002 switches the flame relay ON – the red LED is permanently ON. After 9 sec. the switching output is disconnected – the red LED flashes. NOTICE Due to the safety function of the disturbance frequency cut-off, a flame simulation is not pos- sible by means of a simple art source of light.

    • Page 38
      Mounting and Functions CAUTION! For safety reasons and within the technical regulations, a controlled burner shut-down of the burner must occur and be guaranteed to happen at least once in every 24 hours of operation. Operating Indicator LED The flame detector KLC 10/KLC 1000 indicates the following operating conditions and flame signal strengths via the built-in LED.
    • Page 39: Process Sequence Charts

      Mounting and Functions Process Sequence Charts Key to process sequence charts Any condition Waiting for safety interlock chain gas, scan of air pressure monitor min. Time for pressure build-up in the gas test line (available with activated leakage test) 2,4 s Actuator running time 30 s — 60 s Delay of the recirculation damper…

    • Page 40
      Mounting and Functions Fig. 4-19 Oil with pilot burner BT300…
    • Page 41
      Mounting and Functions Fig. 4-20 Oil without pilot burner BT300…
    • Page 42
      Mounting and Functions Fig. 4-21 Gas with pilot burner and leakage test BT300…
    • Page 43
      Mounting and Functions Fig. 4-22 Gas without pilot burner and leakage test BT300…
    • Page 44: Leakage Test For Main Gas Valves

      Mounting and Functions Fig. 4-23 Leakage test BT300 Leakage Test for Main Gas Valves 4.5.1 Calculation Example With BT300 the gas pressure monitor is also applicable to the monitoring of minimal gas pres- sure. Therefore the minimal gas pressure of the burner must be set. The valve leakage test time t3 (P 311) would be set by BT300.

    • Page 45
      Mounting and Functions Example 1 Burner capacity =1000 KW Fuel = natural gas H, calorific value = 10 kW/m Nominal volumetric flow of the gases = 100 m Leakage rate max. = 0,1 m /h or 100l/h Example 2 Burner capacity =1000 KW Fuel = propane, calorific value = 25,9 kW/m Nominal volumetric flow of propane = 38,6 m Leakage rate max.
    • Page 46
      Mounting and Functions Leakage rate in l/h leak Absolute pressure on the switching point of pressure monitor (adjusted over- pressure + atmosphere pressure) Adjusted overpressure on switching point of pressure monitor sw e Output pressure on gas valve V2 during purge out e Atmospheric pressure (average of 101,3 kPa at sea level) Test volume between the valves…
    • Page 47: Leakage Test Process Flow

      Mounting and Functions 4.5.2 Leakage Test Process Flow The valve leakage test checks if the main gas valves are sealed. For this purpose the gas pressure of the supply is analysed. As valve leakage test section (space between the two main valves) burns empty whenever the burner is switched off, this part is usually pressureless at start-up (gas pressure >…

    • Page 48
      Mounting and Functions Fig. 4-25 Leakage test process diagram…
    • Page 49: Reaction On Gas Deficiency

      Mounting and Functions 4.5.3 Reaction on Gas Deficiency If main gas 1 valve is open and the pressure drops below the minimum pressure, gas deficien- cy is detected. This causes a safety shut down and fault indication H611. Further reactions are depending on the settings in P301 (automatic restart).

    • Page 50: Staged Operation

      Mounting and Functions Fig. 4-27 Wiring proposition for purge of gas line via roof in combination with BurnerTronic Staged Operation Function BT300 has not only the ability of shifting the burner firing rate in oil operation infinitely but 2- stage and 3-stage. Therefore oil valve 2 and oil valve 3 is switched ON and OFF depending on the position of air channel 1.

    • Page 51
      Mounting and Functions Fig. 4-28 Switching threshold of stage operation Switch-on point valve 2 P 528 … P 530 Parameters 528 … 530 Switch-off point valve 2 S1 … S3 Threshold 1 … 3 Switch-on point valve 3 Internal firing rate Switch-off point valve 3 Ignition point Firing Rate Controller…
    • Page 52: Flue Gas Recirculation

      Mounting and Functions NOTICE When using TPS input via X9.x P 531, P 532, P 533 and P 534 are not necessary. Example for a 2 stage oil burner with firing rate controller by LCM100: Situation: • The burner has only one air flap at channel 1. •…

    • Page 53: Actuator

      Mounting and Functions Negative pressure created by the combustion air fan can be used as an alternative to a recir- culation fan to aspirate flue gases. For this method of flue gas recirculation it is sufficient to monitor the combustion air fan. It is not possible to use a VSD controlled recirculation fan with the BT300 system.

    • Page 54: Detection Of Actuators With Transposed Connections

      Mounting and Functions 12 o’clock position  P 458 — P 460 = 0 • 9 o’clock position  P 458 — P 460 = 1 • 4.8.3 Detection of Actuators with Transposed Connections While replacing BT300 make sure actuators are re-connected to the correct channel. Label the plugs/cables to prevent faults or use the ’transposition test’…

    • Page 55
      Mounting and Functions External, mechanical stop on channel 2 for detection of transposition External, mechanical stop on channel 1 for detection of transposition Operational range Reference mark Fig. 4-30 Actuators 662R5001…, 662R5003…, 662R5009 Reference mark Internal mechanical stop Max. angle of rotation for detection of transposition External, mechanical stop on channel 1 for detection of transposition…
    • Page 56: Operating Control And Displays

      Operating Control and Displays Operating Control and Displays User Interface UI300 5.1.1 UI300 User Interface Display BACK key Cursor keys ENTER key Fig. 5-1 User Interface Display The display shows in pictogram: • the menu structure • operating status • parameters •…

    • Page 57
      Operating Control and Displays INFO MANUAL SETTINGS DATA PROCESSING (release level 1 is mandatory) INFO Select INFO path for information about the following: • Burner • Faults/Fault history • Software version • Display of check sums • Serial number • Actuator positions (current damper position for each channel) •…
    • Page 58: Main Menu

      Operating Control and Displays 5.1.3 Main Menu INFORMATION menu path [selected] Display of fuel type Bar graph of internal firing rate in % (0 — 100) MANUAL menu path SETTINGS menu path Release level DATA HANDLING menu path Window number Fig.

    • Page 59: Burner Details

      Operating Control and Displays 5.1.4.1 Burner Details Displaying Operating Hours and Burner Starts Display of operating hours Number of operating hours in total (device connected with mains) Number of operating hours in oil operation Number of operating hours in gas operation Display of burner starts Number of burner starts in oil operation Number of burner starts in gas operation…

    • Page 60: Recalling Fault History

      Operating Control and Displays 5.1.4.2 Recalling Fault History Displaying Burner Faults Fault code (Last 10 faults are stored, No. of operating hours when no. 01 is the latest fault) fault has occurred D1 Diagnostic code 1 Duration of the fault D2 Diagnostic code 2 NOTICE Information concerning fault and diagnostic codes can be found in the list of fault codes.

    • Page 61: Software Version

      Operating Control and Displays Fault unlock How to unlock BT300  A fault is pending and the ENTER key is flashing. 1. Press ENTER key. BT300 is not locked anymore. Changing from fault unlock to main menu:  A fault is pending and the ENTER key is flashing 1.

    • Page 62: Serial Number

      Operating Control and Displays The checksum shows whether the value of one or more parameters have been changed. 5.1.4.5 Serial Number UI = Serial numberUI300 BT = Serial number BT300 5.1.4.6 Positions of Actuators Indication of the channel’s actual (left to right): Channel 1 (oil) Channel 2 (air) Channel 3 (oil)

    • Page 63: Check Digital Inputs/Outputs

      Operating Control and Displays 5.1.4.7 Check Digital Inputs/Outputs Check Digital Inputs and Outputs Fuel selection oil Fan ON/OFF Fuel selection gas Fault Burner ON Ignition transformer ON/ Oil pressure min. is present Ignition valve ON/OFF Gas pressure min. is present SIC* oil is closed SIC* boiler is closed Oil pump OFF…

    • Page 64: Manual Menu Path

      Operating Control and Displays 5.1.5 Manual Menu Path MANUAL Select MANUAL path to carry out actions as follows: Switching burner ON and OFF Presetting of burner firing rate Start burner manually Adjust burner firing rate NOTICE At least release level1 is mandatory to start the burner. The ’Burner ON’…

    • Page 65: Fault Indication

      Operating Control and Displays 5.1.6 Fault Indication Displaying Burner Faults Fault code (Last 10 faults are stored, No. of operating hours when no. 01 is the latest fault) fault has occurred D1 Diagnostic code 1 Duration of the fault D2 Diagnostic code 2 NOTICE Information concerning fault and diagnostic codes can be found in the list of fault codes.

    • Page 66: Settings Menu Path

      Operating Control and Displays Fault unlock How to unlock BT300  A fault is pending and the ENTER key is flashing. 1. Press ENTER key. BT300 is not locked anymore. Changing from fault unlock to main menu:  A fault is pending and the ENTER key is flashing 1.

    • Page 67: Password

      Operating Control and Displays 5.1.7.1 Password Reset access level Enter password to get access level 5.1.7.2 Program Sequence Duration pre-purge period Duration post purge period valve leakage test Pilot burner gas operation Pilot burner oil operation…

    • Page 68
      Operating Control and Displays Set duration of pre-purge period Parameter number UI Parameter modifications are transferred BT = Parameter number BT300 Parameter modifications are discarded NOTICE Both values are identical – Confirm with The values are different – Cancel with NOTICE Pre-purge starts as soon as damper reaches pre-purge position and — if you use a VSM — the last but one point of fuel/air ratio curve is passed.
    • Page 69
      Operating Control and Displays Set duration of the post-purge NOTICE Both values are identical – Confirm with The values are different – Cancel with…
    • Page 70
      Operating Control and Displays Valve Leakage Test Valve leakage test ON/OFF P802 P802 = 0 = Valve leakage test OFF P802 = 1 = If valve leakage test before ignition is configured, the test runs during ignition. P802 = 2 = If valve leakage test before ignition is configured, the test runs after pre-purge.
    • Page 71
      Operating Control and Displays Activate pilot burner in gas operation Pilot burner ON Pilot burner OFF Activate pilot burner in oil operation Pilot burner ON Pilot burner OFF Ignition point Firing rate points 200, 250, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800, 900, 999 S 0 …
    • Page 72
      Operating Control and Displays NOTICE The following firing rate points are available: Ignition point , 200, 250, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800, 900, 999 Use BACK key to switch to menu settings after having completed curve settings. NOTICE Pressing while setting firing rate points discards the modifications.
    • Page 73: Configuration Of The Actuators

      Operating Control and Displays NOTICE The points are approached from above by using the overshoot-function. If you use the over- shoot-function in operation, you must program all points from above. Only if you do so, the required position will match the actual position. 5.1.7.3 Configuration of the Actuators Displaying the Actuators’…

    • Page 74: Deleting Curves

      Operating Control and Displays NOTICE The actuators are running to the new position immediately after the modification. To adjust channel 4 the fan motor must be running. The feedback setpoint curve of channel 4 must rise continuously. Pressing key BACK for longer than 2 s in menu ’Curve settings of the actuators’ causes a fault shut down.

    • Page 75: Ui300 Settings

      Operating Control and Displays CO/O Controller Settings • ON/OFF • Correction mask • Correction spreading Trim Settings • Correction range • Testing O trim • curve settings • Delete O setpoint curve or optimisation curve • Adjusting P term and dead time •…

    • Page 76: Edit Parameter

      Operating Control and Displays 5.1.7.8 Edit Parameter Setting Parameters up to Release Level 2 NOTICE Only parameters of the present release level can be modified.

    • Page 77: Menu Path Dataset Processing

      Operating Control and Displays 5.1.8 Menu Path Dataset Processing Saving/Restoring BT300 Dataset Saving dataset from BT300 Transfer dataset to BT300 NOTICE Check the checksum for equality each time after saving the data: Check the settings from chapter 2.4 Installation Notes after transferring data to BT300: Other Displays No connection between UI300 and BT300 UI300 User Interface pictogram…

    • Page 78
      Operating Control and Displays Termination Communication error pictogram connection unavailable Fig. 5-4 Termination Error Mode H120 Failure number Diagnostics 1 Diagnostics 2 Failure occurs at that time Fig. 5-5 BT300 ferror mode CO/O2 Hint Number of the currently pending hint. The hint can be released by the RESET but- ton.
    • Page 79
      Operating Control and Displays CO/O2 Fault Number of the currently pending fault. The fault can be released by the RESET button. Fig. 5-8 CO/O fault CO Faultr Number of the currently pending fault. The fault can be released by the RESET button.
    • Page 80: Lsb Remote Software

      Resolution of the display 1024 x 768 pixel 5.3.1.2 Install Software The remote software visualises parameters and curve data of the end devices on LAMTEC SYSTEM BUS (LSB). Values are edited and saved. A USB-CAN module connects the end device via LSB. For this purpose, install the driver for the USB-CAN module.

    • Page 81: Install Software

      Operating Control and Displays The current status of the end device, which is determined by the settings for the parameters and curve data can be saved (backed-up) in a data set on the PC. Once backed-up, these data sets can then be restored later to reproduce a certain status in the BT300. You will find a schematic diagram in chapter 4.1 System Overview.

    • Page 82
      Operating Control and Displays Fig. 5-14 Software setup assistant 3. Select ’Next’. The window to select destination folder opens. Fig. 5-15 Select destination folder 4. Specify the folder where the LSB Remote Software should be installed. A warning if the folder already exists is displayed. 5.
    • Page 83
      Operating Control and Displays Fig. 5-16 Select start menu folder 6. To proceed, select ’Next’ 7. Create a program short cut. a) Check the box to launch an icon for the application on the desktop. Fig. 5-17 Create a desktop icon 8.
    • Page 84
      Operating Control and Displays Fig. 5-18 Select USB-CAN drivers 10. «Next» to continue, «Cancel» to exit. NOTICE Do not connect an USB-CAN converter to the computer during installation of the USB-CAN driver! 11. Click on “Install“ to start the installation. Otherwise select «Cancel» to cancel the installa- tion.
    • Page 85
      Operating Control and Displays Fig. 5-20 Installation in progress The progress bar shows installation process. NOTICE As soon as the bar fills up the USB-CAN driver setup starts. Do not connect a USB-CAN converter to the computer during installation of the USB-CAN driver! 12.
    • Page 86
      Operating Control and Displays Fig. 5-22 Start window of the USB-CAN driver installation Select ’Next’ to start installation. 14. Read and accept the license agreement. Then proceed by clicking “Next”. (The ’Next’ button will be active after accepting the license agreement. Fig.
    • Page 87
      Operating Control and Displays Fig. 5-24 Preparing USB-CAN-driver installation «Next» to continue, «Cancel» to exit. 16. Fill out the fields in the following window Fig. 5-25 User information «Next» to continue, «Cancel» to exit. 17. Select installation folder for installation of USB-CAN-driver.
    • Page 88
      Operating Control and Displays Fig. 5-26 Selection of the installation folder «Next» to continue, «Cancel» to exit. 18. Read following information carefully and answer question with ’YES’. NOTICE It is important that you read the information window thoroughly and fully understand its con- tents.
    • Page 89
      Operating Control and Displays Fig. 5-28 Selection of the components «Next» to continue, «Cancel» to exit. 20. Confirm selection of storage folder for program’s short cuts (standard = start menu). Fig. 5-29 Storage of short cuts «Next» to continue, «Cancel» to exit. 21.
    • Page 90
      Operating Control and Displays Fig. 5-30 Additional functions «Next» to continue, «Cancel» to exit. 22. Additional options regarding driver update Fig. 5-31 Additional options «Next» to continue, «Cancel» to exit. 23. Select “Install“ to start the installation. Otherwise select «Cancel» to cancel the installation.
    • Page 91
      Operating Control and Displays Fig. 5-32 Start the driver installation 24. The installation starts. The bar indicates the progress of the installation. Wait until the bar fills up. Fig. 5-33 USB-CAN driver installation Process 25. During installation you will receive the following security prompt.
    • Page 92
      Operating Control and Displays Fig. 5-34 Security dialogue Select “Install“ to continue 26. When the installation is completed you will receive the following version information. Fig. 5-35 Important information regarding the USB-CAN driver version «Next» to continue 27. Complete the driver installation by clicking “Finish”…
    • Page 93
      Operating Control and Displays Fig. 5-36 Driver setup has been completed 28. Connect the USB/CAN module to the computer. As soon as the module is connected to the system the system recognises the module and starts installing the driver software. 29.
    • Page 94: First Connection With The End Device

      Operating Control and Displays Fig. 5-38 USB/CAN module is now ready to use 30. End the installation by clicking “Close” The installation is completed and the LSB Remote Software can be used. 5.3.1.4 First Connection with the End Device NOTICE If you start the software without connected and available USB-CAN module you will receive the following message: Fig.

    • Page 95: Release Codes/Release Levels

      This code is pro- vided by LAMTEC in combination with an USB-CAN module. Access to the input mask for this activation code is available either via menu (Options >> Enter…

    • Page 96: Offline/Online

      Operating Control and Displays 1. Click Key icon in the bottom left The following entry mask opens: Fig. 5-42 Dialogue window Access code NOTICE The activation code applies exclusively to one particular USB-CAN module in each case. For entering a code this USB-CAN module has to be connected already. NOTICE If a USB-CAN module is present, the serial number ’Systec SN’…

    • Page 97: Online Mode

      1. Connect USB/CAN converter directly with SUB D 9 plug for LSB to LCM100. 2. Connect USB/CAN converter via USB to the PC. Call up the LSB Remote Software 1. Select the path C: ProgrammeLamtec. 2. Double-click LSBRemote.exe The initial screen opens.

    • Page 98
      Operating Control and Displays Fig. 5-44 Initial screen LSB Remote Software Initial screen Select function (pictograms) Device list Menu bar Device status ’Set online’ button 3. Select device type BT300. 4. Click button ’set Online’. The following ’device selection’ window opens: Fig.
    • Page 99
      Operating Control and Displays 5. Select device you want to establish a connection with and press OK to confirm. The software starts to establish a connection. Fig. 5-46 Reading data On display ’Set online’ orange and green progress bars are displayed showing status of synchronisation of PC’s data with data of the connected device.
    • Page 100
      Operating Control and Displays Fig. 5-48 Change customer abbreviation NOTICE The customer ID process must be carried out for each device once. This process sets pass- words specific to each customer. The customer ID cannot be deleted or changed. Enter Password Entering the level 1 password 1.
    • Page 101
      Operating Control and Displays 3. Enter your customer password for access level 1 in the ’Password’ text box. 4. Click the ’Set password’ button. Access to all level 1 functions is granted now. NOTICE The ’Check password’ button allows you to check the validity of the password. Edit Parameter 1.
    • Page 102
      Operating Control and Displays 4. Select parameter group 5 (System). You can now set properties for UI300 User Interface. NOTICE For changes in parameter group 5 no additional confirmation is necessary. NOTICE Parameter group 10 ’Maintenance’ is without function at present. NOTICE Parameter groups 15 to 35 were described in relation to corresponding system options.
    • Page 103
      Operating Control and Displays Parameters of Operating Modes Fig. 5-53 Parameters of the operating modes * available with BT340 only…
    • Page 104
      Operating Control and Displays Controller Parameters For setting the control parameters the LSB Remote Software is providing special input win- dows. According to the access level functions can be activated/deactivated and values can be edited within these windows. Call up windows through parameter sub menu. Fig.
    • Page 105
      Operating Control and Displays Fig. 5-56 Window for setting O trim parameters Fig. 5-57 Window for setting CO control parameters…
    • Page 106: Read Out Faults

      Operating Control and Displays Fig. 5-58 Window for setting correction parameters NOTICE You will find settings of the CO/O control in the commissioning supplement for «Integrated CO/O control», print no. DLT1207. 5.3.3 Read Out Faults 1. From the ’BurnerTronic’ menu, select the sub menus ’Histories’ and ’Fault history’. The window for selecting the fault history opens.

    • Page 107
      Operating Control and Displays Fig. 5-60 Fault information Fault selection tab Description of fault Time that fault occurred (estimated) Burner status display…
    • Page 108
      Operating Control and Displays NOTICE The date and time of the fault are calculated basing on the operating hours accumulated at the time of the fault, the current BurnerTronic operating hours, and the computer time. If BT300 was disconnected from the mains after fault occurred and before fault has been read, the date and time of the fault will not be calculated correctly.
    • Page 109: Bt300 Curve Dialogue

      Operating Control and Displays Fig. 5-62 Temperature statistics NOTICE The temperature is measured directly on the circuit board of the BT300. Due to self-heating this temperature is always slightly higher the ambient temperature. 5.3.4 BT300 Curve Dialogue The curve dialogue window shows the setpoint curves of the channels (ratio controller) per curve set — either oil (1) or gas (2).

    • Page 110: Setpoint Graphic

      Operating Control and Displays 5.3.4.1 Setpoint Graphic Fig. 5-64 Setpoint graphic window 5.3.4.2 Curve Table Fig. 5-65 Curve table window…

    • Page 111: Set Curve

      Operating Control and Displays 5.3.4.3 Set Curve To make curve changes to BT300, change BT300 to ’setting mode’ first. Fig. 5-66 Setting dialogue NOTICE This function affects safety. The function must be re-confirmed within eight seconds. In setting mode of the curve set two functions of the device are available: Save point Delete curve set NOTICE…

    • Page 112
      Operating Control and Displays Fig. 5-67 Setting window NOTICE While using the overshoot-function you should program all points top down because they must be approached in overshoot-process that way. Only when you act according to this procedure the required position will match the actual position in operation. NOTICE Pre-purge starts as soon as the damper reaches pre-purge position and — if you use a VSM — the last but one point of the fuel/air ratio control curve is passed.
    • Page 113: Programming Of Fuel/Air Ratio Control

      Operating Control and Displays 5.3.5 Programming of Fuel/Air Ratio Control 1. Click on menu ’Curves (Fuel/Air ratio control)’. Fig. 5-68 Curves window 2. Click on button ’Start EI-Mode (Setting)’. 3. Press OK to confirm the message ’Setting start’. Automatic EI Mode is active now. NOTICE To use channel 4 set a continuously increasing curve! NOTICE…

    • Page 114
      Operating Control and Displays Take note of following information in this window: – A blue frame around curve and channels’ positioning information is indicating selection of channels you want to set. – Fields ’Setpoint’ show respective setpoint position of the actuator. –…
    • Page 115
      Operating Control and Displays Warm setting/Cold setting 1. Start the burner by connecting voltage on terminal X10 Pin 2/’burner on’. NOTICE Knowing the curve settings allows to adjust the burner in ’cold’ condition. The specifications are the same as in ’warm’ condition. In ’cold’ condition the burner is OFF. A red frame around the basic screen shows the burner’s actual state.
    • Page 116
      Operating Control and Displays Fig. 5-71 Values are read As soon as the point has been stored, the program reads the data back from BT300. Programming firing rate curve 1. Click button to select first curve point of the firing rate curve. Fig.
    • Page 117
      Operating Control and Displays Fig. 5-73 Programming the firing rate curve 3. Click on button to select a higher curve point of firing rate curve and adjust burner at this point. 4. Adjust burner this way up to the firing rate point 999 (nominal output). NOTICE Following firing rate points are available: 200, 250, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800, 900, and 999.
    • Page 118
      Operating Control and Displays Fig. 5-74 Programming of firing rate curve NOTICE You do not need to adjust all provided curve points on the firing rate curve. The BT300 inter- polates between two adjacent curve points linearly, regardless curve points in between are plausible or not.
    • Page 119: Programming A Staged Operation

      Operating Control and Displays 5.3.6 Programming a Staged Operation 1. Click in menu on ’Curves (Fuel/Air ratio control)’ Fig. 5-75 Curve selection Window ’Curves (Fuel/Air ratio control)’ opens. Fig. 5-76 Curves window 2. Click button ’Start EI-Mode (Setting)’. 3. Quit the message ’Start setting’ with OK. NOTICE Click button OK in the message during running time of the blue bar.

    • Page 120
      Operating Control and Displays NOTICE Take the following information from this window: A blue frame around curve and around channels’ position information indicates channel selection for setting. Fields ’Setpoint’ show setpoint position of the actuator. Fields ’Actual Value’ show actual position of the actuator. ’Big’…
    • Page 121
      Operating Control and Displays Fig. 5-78 Adjust stage operation Adjust levels finely (warm setting) 1. Connect voltage to terminal X10 Pin2 (burner ON) to start-up burner. Fig. 5-79 Status field — pre-purge [setting] 2. Wait until the burner is in control mode. 3.
    • Page 122
      Operating Control and Displays Fig. 5-80 Adjust ignition position in staged operation 4. Click button ’save point’ to confirm the settings. The point is stored. Once a point has been stored, the program reads the data back from the device . 5.
    • Page 123: Software Interface Lsb Remote Software

      Operating Control and Displays 8. Enter the values in field ’1  2’ and ’2  1’. Switch-on point and switch-off point of the 2 stage are adjusted. Fig. 5-82 Adjust 2 stage in staged operation 9. Click button to choose 2 stage of firing rate curve.

    • Page 124
      Operating Control and Displays Fig. 5-84 Menu file — active connection to device Fig. 5-83 Menu file — no connection to device Open dataset 1. Click on menu to ’open dataset’. The window for selecting data set opens. Fig. 5-85 Open dataset window (Language of window depends on language of operating system) 2.
    • Page 125
      Operating Control and Displays Save dataset 1. Click on menu to ’save dataset’. The window for saving dataset opens. Fig. 5-86 Save dataset window (Language of window depends on language of operating system) 2. Browse to directory you want to save your dataset to (destination folder). 3.
    • Page 126
      Operating Control and Displays Fig. 5-87 Dataset information 4. Enter information of dataset to be saved in text boxes. Button ’Print’  print of information. • Button ’Clear fields’  deletion of all entries in text boxes • Button ’Reload’  loading information of actual dataset •…
    • Page 127
      Operating Control and Displays Upload dataset to device 1. Click on menu to «Upload dataset into device». Window for opening dataset opens. Fig. 5-88 Upload dataset to device (Language of the window depends on language of operating system) 2. Browse to dataset you want to load and click on button «open». The window «dataset information»…
    • Page 128: Access Rights

      Operating Control and Displays NOTICE It is obligatory to document all parameter changes on the device. Note at least the date and the name of dataset. The dataset will be transferred. 7. Confirm message «Please CRC(s) receipt» with «OK». NOTICE Without confirmation or cancellation the device will remain in blocked mode.

    • Page 129: Burnertronic

      Operating Control and Displays Fig. 5-90 Menu access rights Enter password 1. The description, how to enter the password see chapter Enter Password Change password for customer-level 1 1. Click in menu on ’change password level 1’. The window for entering a new password opens. Fig.

    • Page 130
      Operating Control and Displays Fig. 5-92 Menu ’BurnerTronic’ Parameter 1. Find the description how to read or change parameters in chapter Edit Parameter. Reading level CRCs 1. Click in menu on ’Parameters’ >> ’CRCs level’. The window with CRC16 checksums of all level opens. The calculated parameters and the parameters of the remote device are compared.
    • Page 131
      Operating Control and Displays Get the current status of digital outputs of remote device. Fig. 5-94 Status of digital outputs Proceed cold check (check digital outputs) 1. Click in menu on ’Cold check’. The dialogue to proceed the check of outputs starts. Fig.
    • Page 132: Options

      Operating Control and Displays NOTICE Not confirming this message during default time with OK, aborts the process. The process can be repeated immediately. Cold check mode is activated now. To illustrate this status, the choice box of outputs re- ceives a red frame. 5.

    • Page 133
      Operating Control and Displays Fig. 5-97 Flash DLL client For more information see chapter 6.2 Firmware Update BT300 and chapter 6.3 Firmware Up- date UI300.
    • Page 134
      Operating Control and Displays USB-CAN (Systec) 1. Click in menu on ’USB-CAN (Systec)’. The USB-CAN window opens. Fig. 5-98 USB-CAN (Systec) 2. Click button to establish a connection to LSB module. 3. Click button to interrupt connection to LSB module. 4.
    • Page 135
      Operating Control and Displays Select language 1. Click in menu on ’Language’. Language selection window opens. Fig. 5-99 Changing language 2. Select language of LSB remote software and confirm with ’OK’. Activation Code 1. Click in the menu on ’Activation Code’. Activation Code window opens.
    • Page 136: Help

      Operating Control and Displays 5.3.7.5 Help In menu path ’Help’ it is possible to • call up help to LSB Remote Software • get information about version of LSB Remote Software Fig. 5-101 Menu help Getting help 1. Click in the menu on ’LSB Remote Software/User Manual F1’. The BT300 manual opens.

    • Page 137: Maintenance

      Maintenance Maintenance BT300 Data Back-Up At any time, you are able to create a protected data set (DS) for storage (back up) of current status of device. Therefore you must set LSB remote software to online mode. Fig. 6-1 Select the protected dataset menu In contrast to a ‘normal’ data set the protected data set includes storage of check sums of pa- rameter values (etc.).

    • Page 138: Firmware Update Bt300

      Firmware Updates can only be processed with LSB Remote Software version OEM-Level and higher. NOTICE To switch OFF the burner before starting the firmware update via LAMTEC SYSTEM BUS is mandatory! NOTICE Only one device of the same type as the one you want to update may be connected to LAMTEC SYSTEM BUS (p.

    • Page 139
      Maintenance 7. Click button ’Open HEX Image (HP)’ and search for the file containing the software of the main processor of the BT300 in the window ’Open HEX image’. 8. Repeat the procedure in no. 3 but click Button ’Open HEX Image (UP)’ and select the file containing the software of the watchdog processor of the BT300 in the window ’Open HEX image’.
    • Page 140
      Maintenance 12. The progress bar shows the progress of the update. 13. Software versions 1.12.0.0 and higher display a success message. 14. Software versions prior to V1.12.0.0 show the end of the update by a message from the boot loader of the respective device. 15.
    • Page 141: Firmware Update Ui300

      Maintenance Firmware Update UI300 Preparation of the UI300 firmware update 1. Connect LAMTEC SYSTEM BUS to your computer and start LSB Remote Software. 2. Do not set BT300 online. Switch on BT300. UI300 firmware update 1. Process the firmware update analogue to the BT300 firmware update. Start with step 3.

    • Page 142: Options

      Options Options Firing-Rate Controller Module LCM100 The LCM100 adds the function of a firing rate controller to the BurnerTronic. Additional com- ponents of the module are: – An integrated power supply for external 24 V consumers (sensors, additional BurnerTronic expansion modules) –…

    • Page 143: Range Limits

      Options 7.1.1 Range Limits You must set limit values in the parameters, switching the burner on and off. After a burner shut-down while actual temperature has not reached the switch-on threshold yet, a display will inform you that firing rate controller is refusing a start-up. Fig.

    • Page 144: Enter Setpoint Of Firing Rate Controller

      Options 7.1.2 Enter Setpoint of Firing Rate Controller Use the arrow keys to select switching point (ON or OFF) and to set switch- ing point afterwards. If you confirm settings with ENTER in a preset time slot, the value is stored in the parameter.

    • Page 145: Operating Description

      Options 7.1.3 Operating Description The burner start-up is carried out as described above. At least ’Burner ON’ signal and ’Re- lease’ must be sent by firing rate controller. The burner starts as soon as it is receiving signals ’Burner ON’ and ’Release’ from firing rate controller.

    • Page 146: Setpoint Changeover

      Options External Setpoint Presetting For the external setpoint values to be activated, parameter 40 must be set to the value 2 (con- trol by atmospheric condition). The terminals 25, 26 and 27 must be short-circuited. At terminal 16 (-) and 17 (+) of the LCM100, a 0/4 … 20 mA would be connected. Lower limit P 52 Upper limit…

    • Page 147: Start-Up Sequence

      Options 7.1.6 Start-up Sequence The firing rate controller has a start-up cycle in order to slow down burners’ firing rate while starting. The start-up cycle is passed during each new burner start. The internal firing rate is held at user-adjusted value (P 0044) as long as the boiler is cold. The actual value is below parameter set limit (P 0043.

    • Page 148: Control Range

      Options 7.1.8 Control Range The control range is located around setpoint. The content of ’burner ON’ parameter is sub- tracted from setpoint to form switch-on value. ’Upper control range’ parameter value (P 0055) is added to setpoint to form the upper limit of control range. The control range may therefore be located asymmetrically around setpoint.The shut-off range is limited by ’Burner off’…

    • Page 149: Aides For Setting

      Options value. I > → faster approximation to setpoint → danger of overshooting! • D term The difference term is calculated from variation of actual values. This may result in accel- erating, respectively retarding effects. In practice adjustments of PID-controller is orientated by given controlled system. Out of char- acteristics of the controlled system data can be deduced, i.e.

    • Page 150: External/Manual Firing-Rate Presetting (Terminals 16 — 19)

      Options Characteristic Control Process Control Mode Start-up Procedure I term higher decrease of atten- stronger reaction with faster start-up with ten- uation tendency to oscillate dency to oscillate I term smaller increase of attenu- less reaction, less ten- slower start-up ation dency to oscillate Fig.

    • Page 151: Dip Switch

      Options Connection external/manual regular firing rate input (Terminal 16 — 19) Fig. 7-9 Connection possibilities of external firing rate input NOTICE If 0 … 10 V input is used for the presetting of the firing rate the sensor must be able to load the input of the LCM100 with 100 A to 0.

    • Page 152: Leds

      Options You can set LSB Family by DIP switches 2 — 3. DIP switch 2 DIP switch 3 LSB Family You can set sensor inputs by DIP switches 4 — 6. DIP switch 4 DIP switch 5 DIP switch 6 Input –…

    • Page 153
      Options TPS (Three-Point-Step) Potentiometer 0 … 10 V 4 … 20 mA R = 2.2 k — 22 k LED1 = Error LED2 = CAN data traffic LED3 = Power ON…
    • Page 154: Galvanic Isolation

      Options Cable assembly Type Shield Cable length max [m] Mains AC in 24 V external DC out BT-CAN Fuel measurement oil Fuel measurement gas Setpoint changeover Fault reset Flue gas temperature Ambient temperature Boiler water temperature Steam pressure Combination input 20 mA Combination input term.

    • Page 155: Terminal Assignment

      Options DANGER! Attention! Short-circuit danger and electrical shock! An improper wiring connection could lead to a short-circuit, which may cause damages to the connected devices or to an electrical shock.  Please ensure all connections on SELV have a safe separation from main voltage in wiring and with connected devices! 7.1.15.2 Terminal Assignment LCM100 has a 24 V power supply for pressure transmitter and for power supplies of other LSB…

    • Page 156
      CAN Interface (Terminal 10 — 13) Recommendation: Connect BT300 plug X31 to LCM100 by a prefabricated cable with LAMTEC Order No. 667P0515. The plug X31 is already installed on this cable and terminal numbers for LCM100 are marked on the wires.
    • Page 157
      Options CAUTION! Short circuit and electric shock! If the analogue standard signals are not separated from the mains, a buffer amplifier must be used for galvanic separation. Pressure sensor connections Fig. 7-20 Connection pressure sensor 2-wire-system * Fig. 7-21 Connection pressure sensor 3-wire-system * Fig.
    • Page 158: Technical Data Lcm100

      Options 7.1.16 Technical data LCM100 Fig. 7-24 Dimensions LCM100 General data Power supply: 90 — 250 V 47 — 63 Hz Power consumption: 18,2 VA Housing: Polyamide 6.6 (panel: polycarbonate) Dimensions: 65x70x80 mm Weight: 270 g Flammability: UL-94 V0 (panel: UL-94 V2) Mounting position: as desired Installation:…

    • Page 159
      Cable length max.: Digital inputs (setpoint switching and reserve input) Input frequency max.: 300 Hz Cable length max.: 10 m LAMTEC SYSTEM BUS Bit rate: 125 kbit/s Address: static LSB address, device family 1-4, selection with dip-switch Termination: integrated, activation with dip-switch…
    • Page 160: Dual Fuel Module Dfm300

      (e.g. oil pressure monitor during gas oper- ation) to be open. The DFM300 is connected to BT300 via LSB (LAMTEC SYSTEM BUS). DFM300 is providing a 230 VAC input for selection of current fuel.

    • Page 161
      Options Device Description Attributes 0525 BT300 Setting of number of stages for staged operation in oil mode (0 = modulated operation/ 1 = 2 stages/2 = 3 stages) 0 = 1 stage = modulated operation Group: 60 1 = 2 stages Min.: 0 2 = 3 stages Max.: 2…
    • Page 162: Dip Switch 1

      Options DIP switch 1 LSB terminating resistor deactivated LSB terminating resistor activated You can set LSB family by DIP switch 2-3. DIP switch 2 DIP switch 3 LSB Family DIP switches 4 — 6 are not assigned. 7.2.2 LEDs The DFM300 has 4 LEDs connected as mentioned below: Colour Description Fault (LED1)

    • Page 163: Electrical Connection

      Options 7.2.3 Electrical Connection LED1 = Error LED2 = CAN LED3 = Oil active LED4 = Gas active Signal Line Type Shield Cable length max. [m] Fuel valve 1 10 m — Gas valve 1/oil valve 1 Fuel valve 2 10 m — Gas valve 2/oil valve 2 Fuel valve 3 10 m — Gas valve 2/oil valve 2/ignition…

    • Page 164: Galvanic Isolation

      Options Signal Line Type Shield Cable length max. [m] SIC gas 10 m — input SIC fuel Ignition transformer gas 10 m — input ignition transformer Oil valve 1 10 m — input fuel valve 1 Oil valve 2 10 m — input fuel valve 2 Oil valve 3/ignition valve 10 m — input fuel valve 3 SIC oil…

    • Page 165: Terminal Assignment

      Options DANGER! Attention! Short-circuit danger and electrical shock! An improper wiring could lead to a short-circuit which may cause damages to connected de- vices or an electrical shock.  Please ensure all connections on SELV have a safe separation from main voltage in wir- ing and with connected devices! 7.2.3.2 Terminal Assignment Oil acknowledgement/Gas acknowledgement (Terminals 36;…

    • Page 166
      Options Fig. 7-29 Circuit diagram for modulating 2/3 stage oil and gas NOTICE You must integrate the oil pressure monitor into safety interlock chain oil. For the purposes of leakage test you must connect the gas pressure monitor to pressure monitor input of BT300.
    • Page 167: Technical Data Dfm300

      Installation: TS35 mounting rail as per EN 50022 or TS32 as per EN 50035 Connection cross section: 2.5 mm LAMTEC SYSTEM BUS Bit rate: 125 kbit/s Addressing: fixed LSB address, device family 1-4 selected by DIP switch Termination:…

    • Page 168: Adapter System Rast5

      Options Environmental Conditions Electronic safety: Degree of protection (DIN EN 60529) IP40 housing IP20 terminals 7.2.5 Adapter System Rast5 The burner is connected to DFM in general via BTR/Riaconn-screw terminal block. In order to connect DFM exactly the same way as BT300 which means directly at a mono-fuel burner the Rast5 module is transposing connectors provided by DFM.

    • Page 169
      Options Fig. 7-31 Connection Rast5 module…
    • Page 170
      Options Connection to burner Rast5 adapter offers following options to connect the burner: Connection Terminal type Plug Terminal Terminal assignment block GV1 Valve gas 1 X01-Gas GV2 Valve gas 2 X02-Gas X700 GV3 Valve gas 3 X03-Gas ZT Gas Ignition transformer X04-Gas ÖV1…
    • Page 171: Technical Data Rast5-Module

      Options Connection to DFM and BT300 Rast5 adapter offers following options to connect DFM and BT300: Connection Terminal type Plug Terminal Terminal assignment block to BT300 X028 X28-BT X706 Fuel selection to DFM X41-DFM Security chain gas X42-DFM Ignition transformer gas Security chain oil Ignition transformer oil firing rate input -…

    • Page 172: Variable Speed Drive Module Vsm100

      Use VSM and DFM only with BT300 software version 3.0.0.0 or higher. Software versionens before 3.0.0.0 do not support all necessary safety functions. Connect the RPM module VSM100 via LSB (LAMTEC SYSTEM BUS) to BT300. To insulate LSB from potential power supply voltage of BT300 a LCM100 or a LEM with power supply 24 VDC SELV is needed.

    • Page 173: Dip Switch

      Options Device Description Attributes 0403 BT300 Specification of channel 4 functions see P 400 Group: 50 Min.: 0 Max.: 6 Default: 0 Write: 2 Version: 1.0.0.0 0405 BT300 Channel release for curve set 1 Switch-off bit for each curve set. If bit ’x’ is set, channel in curve set ’x’ is in use. Group: 50 Define with this parameter active channel in a curve set.

    • Page 174
      Options DIP-Switch 1 LSB terminating resistor deactivated LSB terminating resistor activated You can set LSB family by DIP switch 2-3. DIP switch 2 DIP switch 3 LSB family Select sensor input with DIP switch 4 — 7 for acknowledgement and range of values settings. DIP switch 4 DIP switch 5 DIP switch 6…
    • Page 175: Leds

      Options 7.3.2 LEDs The VSM100 has 5 LEDs which should be connected as described below: Colour Relevance ERR (LED1) During normal operation LED is switched off. It will light up subject to following conditions: — Initialisation incomplete or not yet successfully com- pleted (e.g.

    • Page 176: Electrical Connection

      Options 7.3.3 Electrical Connection LED1 = Error LED2 = ON LED3 = CAN data traffic LED4 = Namur LED5 = 3-wire CAUTION! Short circuit and electric shock! If the analogue standard signals are not separated from the mains, a buffer amplifier must be used for galvanic separation.

    • Page 177: Galvanic Isolation

      Options Circuit Type Shielding Cable length max. [m] Speed feedback 0/4 … 20 mA Speed setpoint 0/4 … 20 mA Speed setpoint 0 … 10 V Input Output NOTICE If cable shielding is provided you must connect this shielding to an extra protected earth ter- minal.

    • Page 178: Terminal Assignment

      Options 7.3.3.2 Terminal Assignment Fig. 7-34 Namur Sensor, 2-wire system BN = brown BU = blue BK = black Fig. 7-35 Inductive proximity switch with switch contact, 3-wire-system The damping element for the inductive proximity switch and the Namur sensor has to consist of magnetic material.

    • Page 179: Technical Data Vsm100

      Options 7.3.4 Technical Data VSM100 Fig. 7-37 Dimensions VSM100 General data Power supply: 24 VDC +10/-15 % SELV Current consumption: 60 mA Housing: Polyamide 6.6 (panel: polycarbonate) Dimensions: 65x70x35 mm Weight: ca. 80 g Flammability: UL-94 V0 (panel: UL-94 V2) Mounting position: as desired Installation:…

    • Page 180: Expansion Module For Lsb — Lem100

      Options Digital speed feedback input Input pulse width: min. 200 μs Environmental Conditions Operation: Climatic conditions Class 3K5 according to DIN EN 60721-3 Mechanic conditions Class 3M5 according to DIN EN 60721-3 Temperature range -20 … +60 °C (condensation is prohibited) Transport: Climatic conditions Class 2K3 according to DIN EN 60721-3…

    • Page 181: Electrical Connection

      DC-Supply (low voltage) CAN/LSB CAN interface from BT300 NOTICE You will find wiring, cable length and definition of the interface in the respective documentation of the field bus systems: LAMTEC SYSTEM BUS LSB – print no. DLT6095 PROFIBUS – print no. DLT6100…

    • Page 182: Galvanic Isolation

      Options 7.4.3.1 Galvanic Isolation Fig. 7-38 Electrical isolation LEM100 FELV Functional Extra Low Voltage Cannot be used as safety measure against electrical shock. SELV Safety Extra Low Voltage offers protection against electrical shock. DANGER! Attention! Short-circuit danger! An improper wiring connection could lead to a short-circuit, which may cause damages to the connected devices or to an electrical shock.

    • Page 183: Field Bus Modules

      7.5.1 Field Bus Module for PROFIBUS PBM100 The burner control system communicates via LAMTEC SYSTEM BUS (LSB) with its modules consistently. PROFIBUS module PBM100 integrates LAMTEC burner control system into field bus environment (PROFIBUS). PBM100 listens for different, measured process values on…

    • Page 184: Dip Switch

      Options 7.5.1.1 DIP Switch Use DIP switches to configure settings of PBM100. Functions of DIP switches DIP switches 1 — 7 Binary coded PROFIBUS address Switch no. 1 = bit 6 Switch no. 7 = bit 0 Example: LSB family is set by DIP switch 8-9. DIP switch 8 DIP switch 9 LSB family…

    • Page 185: Electrical Connection

      NOTICE You will find wiring, cable length and definition of the interface in the respective documentation of the field bus systems: LAMTEC SYSTEM BUS LSB – print no. DLT6095 PROFIBUS – print no. DLT6100 7.5.1.4 PROFIBUS Communication While PBM is connected to PROFIBUS MASTER in active way, following messages were sent…

    • Page 186
      Options Byte position Description Note 14 — 15 Operating mode O controller v 3.0 and higher: Byte 15 active curve set Byte 14 condition corresponding to 7.5.3 Appendix 16 — 17 Error information O controller v. 3.0 and higher: Bit pattern corresponding to 7.5.3 Appendix 18 — 19 Actual value O Actual value O…
    • Page 187: Technical Data Pbm100

      Options 7.5.1.5 Technical Data PBM100 Fig. 7-40 Dimensions PBM100 PBM100 Power supply: 24 VDC +10/-15% via bus terminals Current consumption: 100 mA Housing: PA6.6 UL94-V0 Cover: Polycarbonate, transparent Installation: Support rail TH35 according to EN 60715 Dimensions (H x W x D) [mm]: 72 x 51 x 70 Weight [g]: Flammability:…

    • Page 188: Field Bus Module For Modbus Tcp Ebm100

      7.5.2 Field Bus Module for MODBUS TCP EBM100 The burner control system communicates via LAMTEC SYSTEM BUS (LSB) with its modules consistently. The MODBUS module EBM100 integrates LAMTEC burner control system into fieldbus environment (MODBUS TCP). EBM100 listens for different, measured process val- ues on LSB, processes these signals and transfers them to fieldbus.

    • Page 189: Leds

      Options 7.5.2.3 LEDs EBM100 has 4 LED and 2 additional LED at the RJ45 socket, which should be connected as described below: Colour Description green ON: Module working in normal mode = fully initialised and without any fault. green OFF: No communication or CAN BUS error Flashing with 2 Hz: Sporadic errors (optional, if a CAN warning is detectable).

    • Page 190
      Options Condition Flashing Flashing Flashing either – Device started – Connection error CAN and Ethernet – Device started – Connection error CAN – Ethernet OK – Fieldbus master not connected – Error in initialising Ethernet – Error in initialising CAN either –…
    • Page 191: Electrical Connection

      NOTICE You will find information to wiring, cable length, and interface definition in the documentation of the particular fieldbus systems: LAMTEC SYSTEM BUS LSB – document no. DLT6095 Ethernet Connection – document no. DLT6096 7.5.2.5 Ethernet Communication Sending Data on the Modbus/TCP (Master-Input-Data) In the table below input data are specified, which EBM transfers to the master (Modbus/TCP –Client):…

    • Page 192
      Options Register Description Configuration Active curve set Bit pattern corresponding to 7.5.3 Appendix table ’Bit Pattern curve set’ Condition of digital outputs Bit pattern corresponding to 7.5.3 Appendix Value 0 to 250  0,0 % to 25,0 % Setpoint value O Operating mode O controller v 3.0 and higher:…
    • Page 193: Technical Data Ebm100

      Options Holding Description – Configuration register Status of firing rate controller setpoint Validity bit 15 =1 (b1XXXXXXX XXXXXXXX): sets analysis of setpoint shift by LCM Smooth setpoint shift of firing rate controller (int16), value range is defined by config- ured upper and lower limits Status smooth setpoint shift of firing rate controller Validity bit 15 =1 (b1XXXXXXX XXXXXXXX): sets analysis of setpoint shift by LCM…

    • Page 194: Appendix

      Options Environmental Conditions Operation: Climatic conditions Class 3K5 according to DIN EN 60721-3 Mechanic conditions Class 3M5 according to DIN EN 60721-3 Temperature range -20 … +50 °C (condensation is prohibited) Transport: Climatic conditions Class 2K3 according to DIN EN 60721-3 Mechanic conditions Class 2M2 according to DIN EN 60721-3 Temperature range…

    • Page 195
      Options Digital input Active (bit pattern) Boiler safety interlock circuit 0x0080 Safety interlock circuit oil 0x0040 Firing rate + 0x0020 External high firing-rate acknowledgement 0x0010 (always 1) Air pressure monitor 0x0008 Gas pressure > Min 0x0004 Ignition acknowledgement 0x0002 Curve set selection = curve set 1 0x0001 Bit Pattern Curve Set Curve set…
    • Page 196
      Options Description Value controller inactive at SETTING/DELETE MEMORY controller inactive due to O value too small during pre-purge controller inactive due to O value too high during pre-purge controller inactive due to O -value too high after ignition controller pre-purge and ignition Bit Pattern Cause of Failure O Trim Failure cause…
    • Page 197
      Options Bit Pattern Cause of Failure CO Controller Failure cause Active (Bit pattern) No valid threshold information on LSB available 0x0001 Probe voltage out of monitoring range 0x0002 Probe offset voltage out of monitoring range, or no dynamics 0x0004 Cell resistance out of monitoring range 0x0008 Cell temperature out of monitoring range 0x0010…
    • Page 198
      Options Value Description Switched OFF Permanent purge ON Pre-purge gas Leakage test for pre-purge 2 Leakage test for pre-purge 1 Ignition position gas Ignition transformer gas Ignition pilot burner gas Ignition gas safety time 1 has expired Ignition gas safety time 2 is running Control of ignition firing-rate gas Switch OFF gas valve 1 Switch OFF gas valve 2…
    • Page 199: Disposal Notes

      Disposal Notes Disposal Notes The device contains electrical and electronic components and must not be disposed of as do- mestic waste. The local and currently valid legislation absolutely must be observed.

    • Page 200: Declaration Of Conformity

      Declaration of Conformity Declaration of Conformity…

    • Page 201
      Declaration of Conformity…
    • Page 202
      Declaration of Conformity…
    • Page 203: Appendix

      Appendix Appendix 10.1 Display Symbols Hint 4: No effects of the CO/O controller. Hint 6: The number of 250 000 burner starts has exceeded. Hint 7: Maintenance mode is active. Hint 8: Fuel selection is missing. Hint 9: Safety interlock chain boiler is not closed (symbol is flashing). Hint 10: Air pressure is still pending.

    • Page 204: Indication Symbols

      Appendix Hint 1096: Maintenance of the burner is necessary. Hint 2001: The time running between the signal ’Valve is open’ and the signal ’Flame’ is relatively long. Hint 2002: Dynamic test of the fuel/air ratio control is running. Hint 2003: No burner release but the signal ’Burner ON’…

    • Page 205
      Appendix Under the INFO path, you can obtain information regarding: • Burner • Fault • Software version • Display of the check sums • Serial number • Servomotor position (current flap position per channel) • Digital input/output Use MANUAL for: •…
    • Page 206
      Appendix Check sums Display of operating hours [selected] Number of burner starts Burner at fault [selected] Digital input [selected] Digital output Password [selected] Access level (e.g. 1) Delete curve Display programme settings…
    • Page 207
      Appendix Burner firing-rate controller settings Read continuous output configuration Password settings Curve settings Display settings Length of pre-purge time Length of post-purge time Pilot burner oil operation Valve leakage test Pilot burner gas operation…
    • Page 208
      Appendix Valve leakage test On/Off Valve leakage test before ignition Valve leakage test after ignition Length of valve leakage test time…
    • Page 209
      Appendix…
    • Page 210
      The information in this publication is subject to technical changes. LAMTEC Meß- und Regeltechnik für Feuerungen GmbH & Co. KG Wiesenstraße 6 D-69190 Walldorf Telefon: +49 (0) 6227 6052-0 info@lamtec.de Telefax: +49 (0) 6227 6052-57 www.lamtec.de Printed in Germany | Copyright  2017…
    www.lamtec.de
    Sensors and Systems for Combustion Engineering
    Quick Reference for Endusers
    BurnerTronic BT300
    2
    Table of Contents
    Table of Contents
    1  General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   . . 4
    1.1  Validity of these Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   . . 4
    1.2  Life Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   . . 4
    1.3  Disposal Notes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   . . 4
    2  Safety  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   . . 5
    2.1  Safety Instructions - Common Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   . . 5
    3  For Your Safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   . . 6
    3.1  Mounting Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   . . 7
    3.2  Security Advice - Mounting  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   . . 8
    3.3  Installation Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   . . 9
    3.4  Electrical Connection Flame Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   . . 9
    3.5  Commissioning Notes  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   . 10
    3.5.1  Fuel/Air Ratio Control  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   . 10
    3.5.2  Basic Device  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   .  11
    3.6  Tasks fulfilled by "authority on the subject" during Approval Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   .  11
    3.6.1  Checking for Correct Parameter Setting in System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   .  11
    3.6.2  Checking the Fuel/Air Ratio Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   .  11
    3.6.3  Checking Burner Sequencer Part  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   . 12
    4  Functional Description  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  . 13
    5  Operating Control and Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   . 14
    5.1  UI300 User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   . 14
    5.2  Menu Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   . 15
    5.3  Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  . 16
    5.4  Information Menu Path. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   . 16
    5.4.1  Burner Details  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   . 17
    5.4.2  Recalling Fault History. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   . 18
    5.4.3  Software Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   . 20
    5.4.4  Display of Check Sums . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   . 20
    5.4.5  Serial Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   . 21
    5.4.6  Positions of Actuators  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   . 21
    5.4.7  Check Digital Inputs/Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   . 22
    5.4.8  Digital Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   . 23
    5.5  Manual Menu Path. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   . 25
    5.6  Settings Menu Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   . 26
    5.6.1  Enter Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   . 26
    5.6.2  Program Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   . 27
    5.6.3  Other Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   . 32
    6  Leakage Test for Main Gas Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   . 35
    6.1  Calculation Example  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   . 35
    6.2  Leakage Test Process Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   . 37
    3
    Table of Contents
    6.3  Valve Leakage Test Venting Over the Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   . 39
    7  Technical Data  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   . 40
    7.1  Technical Data BT300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   . 40
    7.2  Actuators 662R550... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   . 41
    7.3  Actuators 662R5001... / 662R5003.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   . 43
    4
    1   General Information
    1 General Information
    1.1 Validity of these Instructions
    This manual is valid for the burner control system  BurnerTronic BT300 in any configuration.
    The information contained in this document refer to the software versions BT300 v3.5 and 
    UI300 v3.8. If you use any other software version as mentioned previously some of the de-
    scribed functions may not be available or not all available functions work as described in this 
    document.
    1.2 Life Cycle
    BurnerTronic BT300 burner management system has a designed lifetime 
    *
    of 250,000 burner 
    start-up cycles, which, under normal operating conditions in heating mode, correspond to ap-
    prox. 10 years of usage (starting from the production date given on the type plate). 
    This lifetime is based on the endurance tests specified in standard EN230/EN298 and the ta-
    ble containing the relevant test documentation as published by the European Association of 
    Component Manufacturers (Afecor) (www.afecor.org).
    The designed lifetime is based on use of BT300 according to the manufacturer’s basic docu-
    mentation. After reaching designed lifetime in terms of number of burner start-up cycles, or the 
    respective time of usage, the BT300 must be replaced by authorized personnel.
    1.3 Disposal Notes
    The device contains electrical and electronic components and must not be disposed of as do-
    mestic waste. The local and currently valid legislation absolutely must be observed.
    *
    The designed lifetime is not the warranty time specified in the Terms of Delivery
    5
    2  Safety
    2 Safety
    2.1 Safety Instructions - Common Information
    The following symbols are used in this document to draw the user's attention to important safe-
    ty information. They are located at points where the information is required. It is essential that 
    the safety information is observed and followed, and that applies particularly to the warnings.
    DANGER!
    This draws the user's attention to imminent danger. If it is not avoided, it will result in death or 
    very serious injury. The plant including its surroundings could be damaged.
    WARNING!
    This draws the user's attention to the possibility of imminent danger. If it is not avoided, it may 
    result in death or very serious injury. The plant including its surroundings could be damaged.
    CAUTION!
    This draws the user's attention to the possibility of imminent danger. If it is not avoided, it may 
    result in minor injuries. The plant including its surroundings could be damaged.
    NOTICE
    This draws the user's attention to important additional information about the system or system 
    components and offers further tips.
    The safety information described above is incorporated into the instructions.
    Thus, the operator is requested to:
    1 Comply with the accident prevention regulations whenever work is being carried out.
    2 Do everything possible within his control to prevent personal injury and damage to prop-
    erty.
    6
    3   For Your Safety
    3 For Your Safety
    Please observe the safety instructions to avoid personal injury and damage to property and 
    the environment! 
    The BT300 is a safety device! The device must not be opened, interfered with or modified. 
    LAMTEC assumes no liability for damages arising as a result of unauthorised interference! 
    • After commissioning and after each maintenance action check the exhaust gas values
    across the entire power range. 
    • Qualified specialist staff are required to carry out all activities (assembly, installation, ser-
    vicing, etc.).
    • The burner or boiler manufacturer will ensure that the BT300 base unit is compliant with
    protection class IP40 or IP54 for outdoor use in accordance with DIN EN 60 529.
    • The hazard risk in the event of external fire, traffic, wind, tidal waves and earthquakes de-
    pends on the installation situation and the location of the gas appliance. It shall be as-
    sessed separately where appropriate.
    • Before working in the connection area, switch off the power supply to the plant from all
    poles. Ensure that it cannot be switched back on and that the plant is voltage-free. There 
    is a risk of electric shock when the plant is not switched off.
    • Place and secure the protection against contact on the BT300 and on all connected elec-
    trical parts. The cover must fulfil the design, stability and protection requirements of 
    EN 60730. 
    • Plug connectors X30 - X34 have no protective separation from the mains voltage. To re-
    place or disconnect the plug connectors, all poles of the plant must be disconnected from 
    the mains.
    • After each activity (e.g. assembly, installation, servicing, etc.) check wiring and
    parameters to make sure it is in good working condition.
    • If the equipment is dropped or suffers impact, you should no longer commission it. The
    safety functions may also be impaired but fail to show any obvious external damage.
    • When the ratio curves are being programmed, the adjuster will continually monitor the
    quality of the plant's combustion (e.g. using an exhaust gas analysis station). In the event 
    that the combustion values are inadequate or the conditions are potentially harmful, the 
    adjuster will take suitable action, e.g. switch off the system manually.
    • These operating instructions describe many possible applications and functions and
    should be used as guidelines. Carry out functional tests on the test bench and/or in the 
    plant application to ensure correct functioning and document the results. 
    Follow additional instructions to guarantee safety and reliability while operating the BT300:
    • Condensation and humidity are to be avoided. If necessary, make sure that the installation
    is sufficiently dry before you switch it on.
    • Avoid static charge having a destructive effect in case of touching the device's electronic
    components.
    NOTICE
    LAMTEC recommends that you use ESD equipment while working on electrics/electronics.
    7
    3   For Your Safety
    3.1 Mounting Notes
    • Please consider protection against contact when installing the Gerät. Protection classes
    as IP 40 - IP 54 are minimum requirements for outdoor use in accordance with EN 60529
    and therefore obligatory.
    • The protective cover of the BurnerTronic may only be opened by trained, qualified person-
    nel.
    • Make sure that settings for safety-relevant parameters are set in line with the requirements 
    applicable to each type of combustion requiring monitoring and conform to the applicable
    standards (by checking device parameters via operating elements or using remote-control
    software after commissioning). To verify settings you should also refer to manufacturer’s
    documentation of the combustion plant. Protecting the parameters in level 1 by setting a
    password will prevent any unauthorised change.
    • Save setting values for the actuating elements across the power range of the burner as
    follows:
    – Quantity of fuel
    – Quantity of air
    – All additional, safety-relevant actuating variables of the combustion
    – While burner is modulating with at least five different firing-rate points
    • Make sure that the combustion equipment operates stably and safely throughout the pow-
    er range and in all combustion modes. For this purpose you should adjust the following
    values correctly:
    – Actuating elements
    – Parameter settings of the CO/O
    2
    controller
    – Combustion chamber pressure
    – Fuel pressure
    – Temperature
    – Pressure of combustion air
    – Heating value of fuel
    • Ensure the connection between the actuators and control valves is form-fit throughout,
    gearing this towards the maximum controlling torques of the actuators.
    • Only use external flame monitors compliant with DIN EN 298 or DIN EN 230 and author-
    ised for continuous operation. Safety time of flame monitor must not extend 1 s.
    • If the valve testing system is activated, connect the supply-side solenoid valve to terminal
    X01 and the burner-side solenoid valve to terminal X02. Connect the pressure monitor of
    the valve testing system to terminal X05. Adjust the gas pressure monitor and the dimen-
    sions of the test section in order to make sure that the valve testing system is detecting a
    maximum leakage gas volume of 0.1 % in relation to the gas flow rate (minimum 50 dm³/
    h) at maximum combustion heat output.
    • Consider the potential danger depending on installation situation and position where the-
    pressure equipment is being installed. Bear in mind the risk of external fire and the impact
    from traffic, wind and earthquake.
    • When fixing duomodul plug-in connectors to insulation displacement technology (IDT) use
    HZ-M35 a modular crimping tool from Lumberg (see www.lumberg.com).
    8
    3   For Your Safety
    3.2 Security Advice - Mounting
    • Compliance with national safety regulations and standards is obligatory at all times.
    • During the assembly and installation process, you must meet the standard requirements
    of DIN VDE  0100, 0550 and DIN VDE 0722
    • To mount the BT300 basic unit, use screw fittings with an M4 thread (UNC32) and a max-
    imum tightening torque of 1.8  Nm for fastening all four fixing points. Keep in mind that
    housings have improved mechanical stability when connected on surrounding contact sur-
    faces.
    Generally connect to an even mounting surface.
    NOTICE
    Deterioration of the 0.8 Nm servomotor through opening.
    Opening the servomotor in a different position other than the cap of the electrical connection, 
    destroys the servomotor. 
    The warranty expires. 
     Open the servomotor at the cap of the electrical connection only.
    NOTICE
    Damaging the servomotors with 1.2 Nm and 9.0 Nm through opening.
    Opening the servomotor destroys the servomotor. 
    The warranty expires. 
    9
    3   For Your Safety
    3.3 Installation Notes
    • Lay high-voltage ignition cable always separately and in safe distance from device and
    other cables.
    • Only trained, qualified personnel may open the BurnerTronic’s cover.
    • Observe local and national regulations when wiring the electric cables inside the burner.
    • Tighten the screw terminals of the BT300 using a tightening torque of > 0.5 Nm.
    • Supply the feed cable with L, N and PE only. The N neutral conductor must not have po-
    tential difference to the PE protective conductor.
    • The pre-fuse for the BT300 should be max.10  A slow-blow.
    • Phase, neutral and central point conductors must not be interchanged (this would lead to
    dangerous malfunctioning, loss of protection against contact, etc.).
    • The strain relief for the connected cables must comply with standards (e.g. DIN EN 60730
    and DIN EN 60335).
    • Make sure that no spliced strands can come into contact with any of the adjacent connec-
    tions. Use appropriate end sleeves.
    • The burner manufacturer is obligated to supply unused connections on the BT300 with
    dummy plugs.
    • To replace or disconnect the plug connectors, all poles of the plant must be disconnected
    from the mains.
    • Make a form-fit connection between the actuators and actuating elements for fuel and
    combustion air, as well as a form-fit connection for any additional actuator element.
    • Optional components with safety extra low voltage (SELV) must be safely separated from
    the mains. Otherwise this can cause an electrical shock or damage the device due to a
    short-circuit.
    • You may connect only passive devices or devices without feedback effects at the 230V
    outputs of the BT300 (like relays without additional voltage connection). In case of error it
    must be guaranteed that BT300 is not fed with 230 V by this terminals.
    • To avoid disruption of the UI300’s display during ignition, a damping resistor of 1 ... 5 k
    must be installed in the high-voltage ignition line.
    • To avoid disturbance on the Bus, the termination must be active on the first and the last
    device connected to the bus must be terminated.
    3.4 Electrical Connection Flame Sensor
    Interruptions and losses in signal transmission need to be minimised: 
    • Do not wire the sensor cable with other cables.
    Flame signal is reduced through line capacities.   Use a separate 7-pole cable.
    • Consider the permitted length of sensor cables.
    • The ionisation flame sensor supplied from the mains is not protected against contact. Pro-
    tection against accidental contact is therefore obligatory.
    • Ground the burner according to instructions – grounding the boiler itself is not sufficient!
    • Position ignition electrode and ionisation flame sensor where spark cannot hit ionisation
    flame sensor (risk of electrical overloading).
    10
    3   For Your Safety
    3.5 Commissioning Notes
    • Check all safety functions during commissioning!
    • There is no feature to prevent RASTx connector plugs being transposed. Therefore en-
    sure the correct assignment of the plant's plugs prior to commissioning.
    • Check electromagnetic emissions specific to the application.
    • While installing and commissioning the plant, the person in charge of the plant/heating 
    technician needs to document the following: 
    – Parameter set values
    – Setting values (e.g. curve progressions)
    – Values describing the fuel/air ratio control.
    This data can be printed using LSB remote software or alternatively being kept as a hand-
    written note.
    Retain this documentation and have it checked by the ’authority on the subject’.
    WARNING!
    For BT300 parameter settings which deviate from the application standards can be carried out 
    in access level 2. For this reason, check whether the parameter settings are consistent with 
    the corresponding application standards (e.g. EN 298, EN 230, EN 676, EN 267, etc.) or the 
    respective plant has to be approved separately.
    WARNING!
    While unlocking the safety interlock chain in the mode ’BURNER OFF’ BT300 does not lock 
    the system. BT300 prevents a burner start-up until safety interlock chains are locked.
     In case your application needs an interlock of the plant while unlocking the safety interlock 
    chain also in ’BURNER OFF’ mode you must take suitable measures at the plant.
    NOTICE
    Should the safety times be changed, these changes must be documented on the devices
     Bring an additional sticker for the device.
     Note the changed safety times on this sticker.
     The details on this sticker must be clear for reading and non-smudge.
    3.5.1 Fuel/Air Ratio Control
    • Guarantee proper operation by ensuring adequate excess air.  
    In order to do this, set the values for fuel and combustion air in such a way that
    – combustion chamber pressure
    – fuel pressure
    – temperature and pressure of the combustion air
    can ensure proper, stable operation through the entire range of burner firing rate until next 
    periodic inspection.
    • Pay attention to wear and tear of actuators and actuator elements.
    • Measure characteristic values of combustion process to document proper operation.
    11
    3   For Your Safety
    3.5.2 Basic Device
    Check the following items prior to commissioning: 
    • Valves must be assigned correctly to valve outputs on BT300.
    • Correct setting of time parameters (especially safety and pre-purge times).
    • Flame sensor functioning well in case of:
    • flame blow-off during operation (incl. flame-out response time)
    • ambient light is present during pre-purge period
    • at a missing flame formation while end of safety period starts
    • Activation of the valve leakage control function of gas valves and correct leakage meas-
    urement, when required by an application.
    3.6 Tasks fulfilled by "authority on the subject" during Approval Test 
    By specifying the assigned DIN registration number and product ID number the manufacturer 
    confirms that model BT300 burner control system is consistent with type-tested system.
    The connection between actuators and actuator elements for fuel and combustion air and also 
    to any additional actuator elements used must be form-fit.
    3.6.1 Checking for Correct Parameter Setting in System
    While installing and commissioning the plant the person in charge of the plant/heating techni-
    cian needs to document the following: 
    • Parameter set values
    • Setting values (e.g. curve progressions)
    • Values describing fuel/air ratio control.
    This data can be printed using LSB Remote Software or alternatively being kept as a hand-
    written note.
    Retain this documentation and have it checked by the ’authority on the subject’.
    NOTICE
    For BT300 parameter settings which deviate from application standards can be carried out in 
    access level 2. For this reason, check whether the parameter settings are consistent with the 
    corresponding application standards (e.g. EN 676, EN 267, etc.) or the respective plant has 
    to be approved separately.
    3.6.2 Checking the Fuel/Air Ratio Control System
    Save setting values (curve parameters) for actuator elements, fuel and combustion air through 
    the complete range of burner firing rate in sufficient number. 
    Select setting values of fuel and combustion air considering combustion chamber pressure, 
    fuel pressure, temperature and pressure of the combustion air in order to guarantee proper 
    operation with adequate excess air through the entire range of burner firing rate. 
    The burner/boiler manufacturer has to document this by measuring reference values of the 
    combustion process.
    12
    3   For Your Safety
    3.6.3 Checking Burner Sequencer Part
    Check the following:
    • Correct setting of time parameters (especially safety and pre-purge periods).
    • Whether an ionisation or approved self-checking flame sensor is used as only these types
    allow continuous operation.
    • Functioning of flame sensor
    – in case of flame blow-off during operation
    – parasitic light being present during pre-purge period
    – missing flame formation at the end of the safety-period
    • Check the performance of all available and/or essential incoming signals, such as:
    – Air pressure switch
    – Gas pressure - min./oil pressure - min.
    – Safety interlock chain (e.g. STB)
    • Activated leakage control function for gas valves if required for application purposes.
    – If necessary, ensure a correct leakage quantification.
    13
    4   Functional Description
    4 Functional Description
    BT300 combines the benefits of an electronic fuel/air ratio control system with up to three mo-
    torised actuator elements and optional modules like an analogue output for speed control of 
    the combustion air fan with an electronic burner control unit. The leakage test, flame monitor-
    ing system, power control unit and (optional) CO/O
    2
    controller for control and optimisation of 
    an oil or gas-fired forced-draught burner are all integrated.
    BT300 is suitable for virtually all combustion plants. Safety interlock chains, monitors (e.g. gas 
    and air pressure) and sensors are wired directly to the BT300. This greatly reduces the cost 
    of additional relays and wiring. The BT300 is designed to be attached to the burner. The short 
    wiring paths also save money. As a result, BT300 is particularly suitable as standard equip-
    ment for monoblock burners.
    The compact design of BT300 burner control system also has its advantages during commis-
    sioning. Standardisation of wiring and operator interface minimises sources of errors right from 
    the start. Moreover, intelligent display information is making search for errors much easier.
    The BT300 is available in five designs:
    Burner sequencer and fuel/air ratio control can be adjusted for a wide range of combustion 
    conditions by setting parameters. The BT300 for oil and gas can be set to start with and with-
    out pilot burner. The integrated leakage test can be run before ignition or after shutting down 
    the burner.
    Starting without pre-purge using gas is available in accordance with EN676.
    The setting of fuel/air ratio curves can be optimised using optional CO/O
    2
    control during op-
    eration. This helps to counteract conditions that interfere with combustion. This ensures a per-
    manent burner operation at the greatest possible efficiency.
    Operating and fault messages are displayed by symbols and numbers on UI300 User Inter-
    face. Plant-specific configurations and settings of fuel/air ratio control curves are operated via 
    menu of UI300 User Interface.
    An operating and start-up counter is integrated.
    The optional LCM100 power control unit with two setpoints, external setpoint shift (control by 
    atmospheric condition) and start-up control is also available.
    • BT320 2 motorised control outputs 
    1 continuous output 0 ... 10 V, 0/4 ... 20 mA for speed control of the  
    combustion air fan using VSM100 (optional) 
    intermittent operation
    • BT330 3 motorised control outputs 
    1 continuous output 0 ... 10 V, 0/4 ... 20 mA for speed control of the  
    combustion air fan using VSM100 (optional) 
    Approved for continuous operation only in combination with  
    flame sensors capable of running continuously
    • BT331 Same range of functions as BT330 but including following certificates: 
    DIN EN 61508:2002 parts 1-7 for SIL 3  
    Performance Level PLE according DIN EN ISO 13849-1
    • BT340  3 motorised control outputs 
    Oil-gas dual-fuel operation via DFM300 
    1 continuous output 0 ... 10 V, 0/4 ... 20 mA for speed control of the  
    combustion air fan using VSM100 (optional) 
    approved for continuous operation only in combination with 
    flame sensors capable of running continuously
    • BT341 Same range of functions as BT340 but also including following certificates: 
    DIN EN 61508:2002 parts 1-7 for SIL 3  
    Performance Level PLE according DIN EN ISO 13849-1
    14
    5   Operating Control and Displays
    5 Operating Control and Displays
    5.1 UI300 User Interface
    Display
    The display shows in pictogram:
    • the menu structure
    • operating status
    • parameters
    • error messages
    Back key
    Back to previous window.
    Cursor keys
    ENTER keys
    Fig. 5-1 User interface
    1 Display
    2 BACK key
    3 Cursor keys
    4 ENTER key
    To navigate in the menu using cursor keys 
    Use ’left’ and ’right’ keys to move step by step in a selected row. At the end of the 
    selected row the cursor jumps down to the next row, if possible.
    In a multiline menu use ’up’ and ’down’ keys to switch to other rows.
    To display parameters, switch between various fields.
    Press ENTER to call up a menu on the start screen. Select a sub-menu in the menu 
    window. Transfer setting values by pressing ENTER key in a parameter window.
    Use a flushing, red ENTER key to release a fault interlocker.
    If the ENTER key is permanently lit red, a fault with an automatic restart is displayed.
    15
    5   Operating Control and Displays
    5.2 Menu Functions
    The menu is divided into five paths:
    INFO
    Select INFO path for information about the following:
    • Burner
    • Faults/Fault history
    • Software version
    • Display of check sums
    • Serial number
    • Actuator positions (current damper position for each channel)
    • Digital inputs/outputs
    MANUAL
    Select MANUAL to: 
    • Start and stop burner by hand
    • Adjust internal burner firing rate
    SETTINGS
    Select the SETTINGS path for getting information/make changes to:
    • Password
    • Burner settings (display and settings)
    • Actuator elements settings (display)
    • Air/fuel control system
    • Deletion of curve sets
    • Display settings
    INFO
    MANUAL
    SETTINGS
    DATA PROCESSING (release level 1 is mandatory)
    16
    5   Operating Control and Displays
    DATA PROCESSING
    Use DATA PROCESSING to:
    • Read out datasets from the BT300
    • To transfer datasets to the BT300
    5.3 Main Menu
    NOTICE
    The parameters of release level 1 must be protected by a password against unauthorised 
    changes. This password must differ to ’0000’.
    5.4 Information Menu Path
    Fig. 5-2 Main menu
    1 INFORMATION menu path [selected]
    2 Display of fuel type
    3 Bar graph of internal firing rate in %  
    (0 - 100)
    4 MANUAL menu path
    5 SETTINGS menu path
    6 Release level
    7 DATA HANDLING menu path
    *
    8 Window number
    * Excess level 1 is mandatory
    Burner information  Error history  Software ver-
    sion
    Checksums
    Serial number  Continuous output configuration  
    (display only)
    Digital  
    inputs/outputs
    17
    5   Operating Control and Displays
    5.4.1 Burner Details
    Displaying Operating Hours and Burner Starts
    Display of operating hours Number of operating hours in total (device 
    connected with mains)
    Number of operating hours in oil operation
    Number of operating hours in gas operation
    Display of burner starts Number of burner starts in oil operation
    Number of burner starts in gas operation
    18
    5   Operating Control and Displays
    5.4.2 Recalling Fault History
    Displaying Burner Faults
    NOTICE
    Information concerning fault and diagnostic codes can be found in the list of fault codes. 
    For fault analysis a fault code and diagnostic code D1 or D2 is required.
    01 
    02
    Fault code (Last 10 faults are stored,  
    no. 01 is the latest fault)
    No. of operating hours when 
    fault has occurred
    D1 Diagnostic code 1 Duration of the fault
    D2 Diagnostic code 2
    19
    5   Operating Control and Displays
    Fault unlock
    How to unlock BT300
     A fault is pending and the ENTER key is flashing.
    1. Press ENTER key.
    BT300 is not locked anymore.
    Changing from fault unlock to main menu:
     A fault is pending and the ENTER key is flashing
    1. Press BACK key.
    ENTER key isn’t flashing any more.
    The display returns to main menu.
    An error number is flashing in the display on top, left hand.
    UI300 can be used as usual.
    Back to fault unlock
     An error number is flashing in the display on top, left hand.
    1. Use BACK key to switch back to main menu.
    2. Press arrow-key left.
    ENTER key is flashing again.
    BT300 can be unlocked.
    NOTICE
    A permanent red light on the ENER key indicates gas shortage. A countdown is running to the 
    next start. This countdown can be interrupted by the ENTER key.
    20
    5   Operating Control and Displays
    5.4.3 Software Version
    Display software version
    UI = Software version UI300 
    BT = Software version BT300
    5.4.4 Display of Check Sums
    Displaying Check Sums
    0 ... 4 = Check sum, access levels 0 ... 4
    The checksums are generated from the device parameters. The BT300 calculates one 
    checksum for the parameters of each access level (0, 1, 2 or 4). The UI300 indicates the 
    checksums in hexadecimal code. 
    The checksum shows whether the value of one or more parameters have been changed. 
    21
    5   Operating Control and Displays
    5.4.5 Serial Number
    UI = Serial numberUI300 
    BT = Serial number BT300
    5.4.6 Positions of Actuators
    Indication of the channel’s actual (left to right):  
    Channel 1 (oil) 
    Channel 2 (air) 
    Channel 3 (oil) 
    Optional channel (OFF; control of the frequency inverter)
    NOTICE
    The assignment of channels is depending on configuration settings!
    22
    5   Operating Control and Displays
    5.4.7 Check Digital Inputs/Outputs
    Check Digital Inputs and Outputs
    NOTICE
    The signals ’Fuel selection oil’ and ’Fuel selection gas’ are logical and not physical signals. 
    Background: Some signals have more sources than one (terminals, LSB, field buses, param-
    eters).
    Fuel selection oil 
    Fuel selection gas 
    Burner ON 
    Fan ON/OFF 
    Fault 
    Ignition transformer ON/
    OFF
    Oil pressure min. is present 
    Gas pressure min. is present 
    SIC* oil is closed
    Ignition valve ON/OFF 
    SIC* boiler is closed 
    Flame signal is present 
    Fault release
    Oil pump OFF
    * SIC = safety interlock chain
    23
    5   Operating Control and Displays
    5.4.8 Digital Outputs
    Check digital outputs
    1. Use the cursor keys   to select the menu   and press ENTER  to confirm.
    The display shows ’Page 1 digital outputs’ menu:
    Call up 2
    nd 
    page of outputs
    1. Use the cursor keys   to select the next page and press ENTER  to confirm.
    The display shows ’Page 2 digital outputs’ menu:
    Call up 3
    rd
    page of outputs
    1. Use the cursor keys   to select the next page and press ENTER  to confirm.
    The display shows ’Page 3 digital outputs’ menu:
    Fig. 5-3 Page 1 digital outputs menu
    1 Digital outputs pictogram
    2 Jump to next page
    3 Fan [on] - terminal X25
    4 Error [off] - terminal X24 
    (adjustable with P 809)
    5 Ignition transformer [off] - terminal X04
    Fig. 5-4 Page 2 digital outputs menu
    1 Digital outputs pictogram
    2 Jump to previous page
    3 Jump to next page
    4 Oil valve 1 [on] - terminal X01
    5 Oil valve 2 [off] - terminal X02
    6 Oil valve 3 [off] - terminal X03
    Fig. 5-5 Page 3 digital outputs menu
    1 Digital outputs pictogram
    2 Jump to previous page
    3 Jump to next page
    4 Ignition valve [on] - terminal X03
    5 Gas valve 1 [off] - terminal X01
    6 Gas valve 2 [off] - terminal X02
    24
    5   Operating Control and Displays
    Call up 4
    th
    page of outputs
    1. Use the cursor keys  to select the next page and press ENTER  to confirm.
    The display shows "Page 4 digital outputs" menu:
    Fig. 5-6 Page 4 digital outputs menu
    1 Digital outputs pictogram
    2 Jump to previous page
    3 Oil pump [off] - terminal X26
    4 Fuel selection oil [off] - terminal X24 
    (adjustable with P 809)
    5 Fuel selection gas [off] - terminal X24 
    (adjustable with P 809)
    25
    5   Operating Control and Displays
    5.5 Manual Menu Path
    MANUAL
    Select MANUAL path to carry out actions as follows:
    1 Switching burner ON and OFF
    2 Presetting of burner firing rate 
    NOTICE
    At least release level1 is required to start the burner.
    The ’Burner ON’ control loop does not need to be switched on to start the burner from this 
    menu. The user interface assumes control in this menu.
    If there is no ’Burner ON’ signal from other sources (terminal X10.2) software switches off the 
    burner when you exit the menu.
    CAUTION!
    If you carry out a manual start-up via display BT300 no longer responds to ’Burner ON’ signal 
    input at connector X10.2. Therefore that limiters, monitors and other similar safety functions 
    must not be operated with this input!
    NOTICE
    Leaving of window will terminate manual burner operation!
    Adjust burner firing rate
    1. Use cursor keys   to select adjustment of burner firing rate in % and press ENTER 
    to confirm  .
    2. Change burner firing rate with the cursor keys   and press ENTER   to confirm.
    Start burner manually
    Adjust burner firing rate
    26
    5   Operating Control and Displays
    NOTICE
    Changes of burner firing rate are possible only while burner is running.
    If you want to adjust burner firing rate remember to start-up the burner first.
    5.6 Settings Menu Path
    NOTICE
    The level 1 parameters must be protected against unauthorised modification by setting a 
    password different to "0000".
    5.6.1 Enter Password
    Password  Display settings 
    for 
    program 
    sequence 
    Read configura-
    tion for 
    continuous out-
    put 
    Configure curve
    Delete curve  Configure 
    controller
    Configure 
    password
    Configure 
    parameters
    Configure display
    Reset access level   Password entry
    27
    5   Operating Control and Displays
    5.6.2 Program Sequence
    Set duration of pre-purge period
    NOTICE
    Both values are identical – Confirm with   . 
    The values are different – Cancel with   .
    Duration pre-purge period  Duration post purge period  valve leakage test
    Pilot burner gas operation  Pilot burner oil operation
    Parameter number UI  Parameter modifications are transferred
    BT = Parameter number BT300  Parameter modifications are discarded
    28
    5   Operating Control and Displays
    NOTICE
    Pre-purge starts as soon as damper reaches pre-purge position and - if you use a VSM - the 
    last but one point of fuel/air ratio curve is passed.
    NOTICE
    The second to last channel’s position must be lower than the position of the last curve point.
    Set duration of the post-purge
    NOTICE
    Both values are identical – Confirm with   . 
    The values are different – Cancel with   .
    29
    5   Operating Control and Displays
    Valve Leakage Test
    Valve leakage test ON/OFF P802
    OFF P802 = 0 = Valve leakage test OFF
    P802 = 1 = If valve leakage test before ignition is configured, the test runs 
    during ignition.
    P802 = 2 = If valve leakage test before ignition is configured, the test runs 
    after pre-purge.
    Valve leakage test before ignition P312
    Valve leakage test after burner OFF P315
    Duration of Valve leakage test P311
    30
    5   Operating Control and Displays
    Activate pilot burner in gas operation
    Activate pilot burner in oil operation
    NOTICE
    Actuators move according to changes immediately to the set position.
    If you want to change channel 4 the fan motor must be running.
    Pilot burner ON
    Pilot burner OFF
    Pilot burner ON
    Pilot burner OFF
    Ignition point
    Firing rate points 200, 250, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800, 900, 999
    S 0 ... 999 Setpoint value (to adjust)
    I  0 ... 999 Actual value
    31
    5   Operating Control and Displays
    NOTICE
    The following firing rate points are available:  
    Ignition point , 200, 250, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800, 900, 999
    Use BACK key   to switch to menu settings after having completed curve settings.
    NOTICE
    Pressing   while setting firing rate points discards the modifications.
    Set Multi Stage Operation
    NOTICE
    Set the following stages according to this procedure!
    NOTICE
    Pressing die key   while modifying the firing-rate points discards the changes.
    NOTICE
    The following points are available for multi stage operation: 
    Ignition point  ,  
    1 (first stage),  
    1   2 (valve switch-on threshold for stage 2),  
    2   1 (valve switch-off threshold for stage 2),  
    2 (second stage),  
    2   3 (valve switch-on threshold for stage 3)  
    3  2 (valve switch-off threshold for stage 3) ,  
    3 (third stage)
    AIR Air channel  Switching from 1. stage to 2. stage
    S Setpoint position of air 
    damper
    The internal setpoint curve always has 
    200 digit in stage 1, 300 digit in stage 2 and 400 
    digit in stage 3. 
    I Actual position of air damper
    32
    5   Operating Control and Displays
    NOTICE
    The points are approached from above by using the overshoot-function. If you use the over-
    shoot-function in operation, you must program all points from above. Only if you do so, the 
    required position will match the actual position.
    5.6.3 Other Displays
    No connection between UI300 and BT300
    Display shown e.g. when using LSB remote software and communication between BT300 and 
    UI300 is temporarily unavailable.
    Termination
    Error Mode
    Fig. 5-7 No connection
    1 UI300 User Interface pictogram
    2 No connection symbol 
    3 BT300 burner control
    Fig. 5-8 Termination
    1 Communication error pictogram 
    connection unavailable
    Fig. 5-9 BT300 ferror mode
    H120 Failure number
    D1 Diagnostics 1
    D2 Diagnostics 2
    Failure occurs at that time
    33
    5   Operating Control and Displays
    CO/O2 Hint
    CO Hingt
    CO/O2 Fault
    CO Faultr
    Fig. 5-10 CO/O
    2
    hint
    Number of the currently pending hint.
    The hint can be released by the RESET but-
    ton.
    Fig. 5-11 CO hint
    Number of the currently pending hint..
    The hint can be released by the RESET but-
    ton.
    Fig. 5-12 CO/O
    2
    fault
    Number of the currently pending fault.
    The fault can be released by the RESET 
    button.
    Fig. 5-13 CO fault
    Number of the currently pending fault.
    The fault can be released by the RESET 
    button.
    34
    5   Operating Control and Displays
    O
    2
    /CO-Fehlerhistorie
    Fig. 5-14 CO/O
    2
    fault history
    Fault history including the time when the 
    fault occurs
    Fig. 5-15 Details of the fault history
    01 - 001 Fault number
    D1 Diagnostics 1
    D2 Diagnostics 2
    Fault occurs at that time
    || Duration of the fault
    35
    6   Leakage Test for Main Gas Valves
    6 Leakage Test for Main Gas Valves 
    6.1 Calculation Example
    With BT300 the gas pressure monitor is also applicable to the monitoring of minimal gas pres-
    sure. Therefore the minimal gas pressure of the burner must be set. 
    The valve leakage test time t3 (P 311) would be set by BT300. The time t2 for BT300 is fixed 
    to 2s. The time t3 (P 311) must be set in a way that the maximum allowable leakage rate Q
    Leck
    can be securely detected. The maximum leakage rate stated in EN1643 and ISO23551-4 is 
    0.1% of the nominal volumetric flow of the gases or a minimum of 50l/h. 
    Example 1
    Burner capacity =1000 KW 
    Fuel = natural gas H, calorific value = 10 kW/m
    3
    Nominal volumetric flow of the gases = 100 m
    3
    /h 
    Leakage rate max. = 0,1 m
    3
    /h or 100l/h
    Example 2
    Burner capacity =1000 KW 
    Fuel = propane, calorific value = 25,9 kW/m
    3
    Nominal volumetric flow of propane = 38,6 m
    3
    /h 
    Leakage rate max. = 50 l/h (not 38,6 l/h)
    Calculation
    Fig. 6-1 Principle scheme
    The test volume V
    test
    must be calculated with tube diameter and valve volume. The value vol-
    umes are provided by the valve manufacturer. If valve 1 and valve 2 are be used as a double 
    valve, the test volume would be provided by the valve manufacturer. 
    The leakage test V
    Leak
    is calculated according to the Boyle-Mariotte principle.
    36
    6   Leakage Test for Main Gas Valves
    p
    1
     V
    1
    = p
    2
     V
    2
    p = absolute pressure 
    V = gas volume
    This is valid for the test of valve 1 V1:
    Should t3 be negative, at least 1s must be set.  
    If the calculation of t3 for valve 2 is higher than t3 for valve 1, the value for the calculation of 
    valve 2 must be adjusted. 
    NOTICE
    p
    Schalt 
    must always be higher than p
    out.
    Otherwise V1 would be recognised as leaking even if it is not. 
    This is valid for the test of valve 2 V2:
    If t3 is negative, at least 1 s must be set.  
    If the calculated t3 value of valve 1 is higher than t3 for valve 2, the calculated value of valve 
    1 must be adjusted. 
    Q
    leak
    Leakage rate in l/h
    p
    sw
    Absolute pressure on the switching point of pressure monitor (adjusted over-
    pressure + atmosphere pressure)
    p
    sw e
    Adjusted overpressure on switching point of pressure monitor 
    p
    out e
    Output pressure on gas valve V2 during purge
    p
    Atm
    Atmospheric pressure (average of 101,3 kPa at sea level)
    V
    test
    Test volume between the valves
    t2 Settling time is always 2 s
    t3 Adjusted leakage check time
    Q
    leak
    Leakage rate in l/h
    p
    sw
    Absolute pressure on switching point of pressure monitor (adjusted overpres-
    sure + atmosphere pressure)
    p
    sw e
    Adjusted overpressure on the switching point of pressure monitor
    p
    in
    Absolute input pressure on gas valve V1
    p
    in e
    Overpressure at gas valve V1 input
    p
    Atm
    Atmosphere pressure (average of 101,3 kPa at sea level)
    V
    test
    Test volume between the valves
    t2 Settling time is always 2 s
    t3 Adjusted leakage check time 
    37
    6   Leakage Test for Main Gas Valves
    6.2 Leakage Test Process Flow
    The valve leakage test checks if the main gas valves are sealed. For this purpose the gas 
    pressure of the supply is analysed.
    As valve leakage test section (space between the two main valves) burns empty whenever the 
    burner is switched off, this part is usually pressureless at start-up (gas pressure > min = 0). 
    This is checked by BT300. At this point, main gas 1 opens briefly and gas flows into test sec-
    tion (gas pressure > min switches from 0 to 1). While main gas 1 valve is open gas pressure 
    must apply.Otherwise BT300. detects gas deficiency. Gas pressure must remain at least con-
    stant during valve leakage test period (2 s + P 311). The valve leakage test is considered com-
    plete then. 
    If leakage test section is not empty at start-up (e.g. resulting from a previous fault shut down), 
    main gas valve 2 opens first. The leakage test line is then purged (depending on the plant, 
    either in the combustion chamber or through the roof). During leakage test period section is 
    checked whether it remains pressureless or not. Apart from that the process is the same as 
    described above. 
    The leakage test takes place prior to ignition.
    The pressure monitor for the leakage test line must be connected to the ’Gas pressure > min’ 
    input on plug X05. It also monitors the minimum pressure during operation. If a different min-
    imum pressure should be monitored during operation, the pressure monitor must be inserted 
    into the safety interlock chain gas or into the controller loop (burner ON). 
    38
    6   Leakage Test for Main Gas Valves
    Fig. 6-2 Leakage test process diagram
    39
    6   Leakage Test for Main Gas Valves
    6.3 Valve Leakage Test Venting Over the Roof
    NOTICE
    Consider diameter of gas line in the roof purge. For purge, plug X02 is activated for 3 s.  
    Make sure that this period is sufficient even for smallest purge line diameter!
    Fig. 6-3 Wiring proposition for purge of gas line via roof in combination with BurnerTronic
    40
    7   Technical Data
    7 Technical Data
    7.1 Technical Data BT300
    Function
    Power supply: 230  V  +10/-15  %  47-63 Hz
    115  V  +10/-15  %  47-63  Hz (on request)
    Maximum backup-fuse: 10 A slow-blow
    To be used only in a grounded power line network!
    Power consumption: max. 30 VA
    Switching threshold of ionisation 
    current:
    1  A
    Digital signal inputs: Max. line length 10 m/33 ft 
    Max. line length 20  m/66 ft for the following signals: 
    Firing rate+ / firing rate- 
    Boiler safety interlock chain (SIC) 
    Burner ON 
    Reset  
    Alarm 
    Fuel selection DFM
    Digital outputs: 3 fuel valves max. 1 A cos   0,4 
    VL fan max. 2 A cos   0,4  
    oil pump max. 2 A cos   0,4 
    ignition transformer max. 2 A cos   0,2 
    alarm output max. 1 A cos   0,3
    Resolution: 999 digit, 10 bit
    Number of curve sets: BT320/33x: 1 curve set (oil or gas) 
    BT34x: 2 curve sets (oil/gas switchable; DFM300 or LCM100 required)
    Number of programs: unlimited (EEPROM)
    Field bus-coupling (optional): PROFIBUS DP 
    Modbus TCP 
    PROFINET 
    LEM100 or LCM100 always required
    Housing: Polycarbonate + ABS
    Dimensions: 200x115x61 mm/7.87x4.53x2.4 in
    Weight: 1,0 kg/2.20 lb
    Flammability: UL-94 V0
    Display UI300
    Display: 128x64 pixel, monochrome 
    White backlighting (dimmable)
    Dimensions: 112x64x24 mm/4.41x2.52x0.94 in
    Weight: 140 g/0.31 lb
    Housing: Basic housing: Polyamide glass fibre reinforced  
    LCD-display window: Polycarbonate
    Flammability: UL-94 V0 
    Cable length: 1 m/3.28 ft
    41
    7   Technical Data
    7.2 Actuators 662R550...
    Environmental Conditions
    Operation: Climatic conditions Class 3K5 according to DIN EN 60721-3
    Mechanic conditions Class 3M5 according to DIN EN 60721-3
    Temperature range -20 ... +60  °C/-4 °F ... +140 °F 
    (condensation is prohibited)
    Transport: Climatic conditions Class 2K3 according to DIN EN 60721-3
    Mechanic conditions Class 2M2 according to DIN EN 60721-3
    Temperature range -20 ... +70  °C/-4 °F ... +158 °F 
    (condensation is prohibited)
    Storage: Climatic conditions Class 1K3 according to DIN EN 60721-3
    Mechanic conditions Class 1M2 according to DIN EN 60721-3
    Temperature range -20 ... +70  °C/-4 °F ... +158 °F 
    (condensation is prohibited)
    Electronic safety: Degree of protection (DIN EN 60529): BT300 – IP00 housing 
    IP20 (terminals covered) 
    UI300 –  IP40 (clamping) 
    IP54 (glued assembly)
    Function
    Power supply 24 VDC ±20 %
    Floating time 5 s / 90° at 180 Hz
    Direction of rotation 0° to 90° right
    Torque 0.8 Nm (both directions)
    Holding torque 0.4 Nm (no power) 
    0.7 Nm
    Permissible radial load 30 Nm (centre of output shaft)
    Permissible axial load 5 N
    Axial play of drive shaft 0.1 ... 0.2 mm
    Cable length securely connected 0.6 m
    pluggable max. 3 m
    Environmental conditions
    Operation Climatic condition Class 3K3 according to DIN EN 60721-3
    Mechanical condition Class 3M3 according to DIN EN 60721-3
    Temperature range -20 ... +60 °C (condensation is prohibited)
    Transport Climatic condition Class 2K3 according to DIN EN 60721-3
    Mechanical condition Class 2M2 according to DIN EN 60721-3
    Temperature range -20 ... +70 °C (condensation is prohibited)
    Storage Climatic condition Class 1K3 according to DIN EN 60721-3
    Mechanical condition Class 1M2 according to DIN EN 60721-3
    Temperature range -20 ... +70 °C (condensation is prohibited)
    42
    7   Technical Data
    DANGER!
    Danger by electrical shock!
    Shut BT300 down before opening the cover, otherwise it is possible to get in contact with con-
    ducting parts. This may cause an electrical shock. Only open BT300 when it is disconnected 
    it all-pole.
     Disconnect BurnerTronic all-pole.
    NOTICE
    Damaging the 0,8 Nm actuator by opening the actuator.
    Do not open the actuator at another part as the cover of the electric connection, otherwise the 
    actuator will be damaged. 
    The warranty expires and is invalid.
     Do not open the actuator but at the cover of the electric connection.
    NOTICE
    The limits of the technical data must be strictly adhered to.
    Bursting strength Peak voltage 4 kV
    Repeat frequency 2,5 kHz
    Electrical safety Protection class 2 as per DIN EN 60730
    Environmental conditions
    43
    7   Technical Data
    7.3 Actuators 662R5001... / 662R5003... 
    Function 662R5001... 662R5003... 662R5009...
    Power supply: 24VDC ±20 %
    Floating time 5 s/90° 5 s/90° 15 s/90°
    Direction of rotation 0° 
    to 90°
    left - view to the drive shaft
    Effective  
    output torque
    1.2 Nm  
    (both directions of rota-
    tion)
    3 Nm  
    (both directions of rota-
    tion)
    9 Nm  
    (both directions of rotation)
    Holding torque 0.82 Nm (currentless) 2.8 Nm (currentless) 6 Nm (currentless)
    Permissible  
    radial load 100 N (centre of output shaft)
    Permissible axial load 10 N
    Axial play of drive shaft 0.1 ... 0.2 mm 0.1 ... 0.2 mm
    Motor RDM 51/6 stepper motor
    Angular resolution 0.1°/motor step 0.1°/motor step 0.03°/motor step
    Rated resolution  
    encoder monitoring 0,7°
    Monitoring 
    accuracy
     0,5°  0,5°  1.3125° 
    (corresponds 44 motor 
    steps)
    Repeat accuracy  0,1°  0,1°  0,1°
    Life cycle 2,000,000 motions forward and back performed on complete actuator range
    Degree of protection IP54 according to DIN EN 60529-1
    Weight 1400 g
    Cable length securely connected 
    1.5mpluggable max. 3 m
    securely connected 
    1.5mpluggable max. 3 m
    pluggable max. 3 m
    Environmental conditions 662R5001.../662R5003.../662R5009...
    Operation Climatic condition Class 3K5 according to DIN EN 60721-3
    Mechanical condition Class 3M5 according to DIN EN 60721-3
    Temperature range -20 ... +60 °C (condensation is prohibited)
    Transport Climatic condition Class 2K3 according to DIN EN 60721-3
    Mechanical condition Class 2M2 according to DIN EN 60721-3
    Temperature range -20 ... +70 °C (condensation is prohibited)
    Storage Climatic condition Class 1K3 according to DIN EN 60721-3
    Mechanical condition Class 1M2 according to DIN EN 60721-3
    Temperature range -20 ... +70 °C (condensation is prohibited)
    Bursting strength Peak voltage 4 kV
    Repeat frequency 2,5 kHz
    Electrical safety Protection class 2 as per DIN EN 60730
    44
    7   Technical Data
    NOTICE
    Damage of the actuator  with 1.2, 3.0 and 9.0 Nm due to opening the actuators housing.
    Opening the actuator’s housing will damage the actuator .  
    The warranty expires.
    NOTICE
    The limits of the technical data must be strictly adhered to.
    45
    7   Technical Data
    46
    7   Technical Data
    LAMTEC Meß- und Regeltechnik
    für Feuerungen GmbH & Co. KG
    Wiesenstraße 6
    D-69190 Walldorf
    Telefon: +49 (0) 6227 6052-0 
    Telefax: +49 (0) 6227 6052-57
    [email protected]
    www.lamtec.de
    print no. DLT1206-18-aEN-010
    The information in this publication is subject to technical changes.
    Printed in Germany | Copyright  2018
    
    • Page 1
      Manual BT300 BurnerTronic Sensors and Systems for Combustion Engineering www.lamtec.de…
    • Page 3: Table Of Contents

      Table of Contents Table of Contents Important Information about the Manual ……..6 Validity of these Instructions.

    • Page 4
      Table of Contents 4.8.2 Direction of Rotation/Position Damper Closed ……55 4.8.3 Detection of Actuators with Transposed Connections ….56 4.8.4 Adjusting of Actuators .
    • Page 5
      Table of Contents 5.3.7.2 Access Rights ……….130 5.3.7.3 BurnerTronic .
    • Page 6
      Table of Contents 7.4.2 LEDs …………186 7.4.3 Electrical Connection .
    • Page 7: Important Information About The Manual

      Important Information about the Manual Important Information about the Manual Validity of these Instructions This manual is valid for the burner control system BurnerTronic BT300 in any configuration. The information contained in this document refer to the software versions BT300 v3.5 and UI300 v3.8.

    • Page 8: General Safety Instructions

      General Safety Instructions General Safety Instructions Classification of the Safety Instructions and Warnings The following symbols are used in this document to draw the user’s attention to important safe- ty information. They are located at points where the information is required. It is essential that the safety information is observed and followed, and that applies particularly to the warnings.

    • Page 9: Product-Specific Dangers

      The BT300 is a safety device! The device must not be opened, interfered with or modified. LAMTEC assumes no liability for damages arising as a result of unauthorised interference! • After commissioning and after each maintenance action check the exhaust gas values across the entire power range.

    • Page 10: Commissioning Notes

      General Safety Instructions 2.2.1 Commissioning Notes • Check all safety functions during commissioning! • There is no feature to prevent RASTx connector plugs being transposed. Therefore en- sure the correct assignment of the plant’s plugs prior to commissioning. • Check electromagnetic emissions specific to the application. •…

    • Page 11: Basic Device

      General Safety Instructions 2.2.1.2 Basic Device Check the following items prior to commissioning: • Valves must be assigned correctly to valve outputs on BT300. • Correct setting of time parameters (especially safety and pre-purge times). • Flame sensor functioning well in case of: •…

    • Page 12: Checking The Fuel/Air Ratio Control System

      General Safety Instructions 2.2.2.2 Checking the Fuel/Air Ratio Control System Save setting values (curve parameters) for actuator elements, fuel and combustion air through the complete range of burner firing rate in sufficient number. Select setting values of fuel and combustion air considering combustion chamber pressure, fuel pressure, temperature and pressure of the combustion air in order to guarantee proper operation with adequate excess air through the entire range of burner firing rate.

    • Page 13: Installation Notes

      General Safety Instructions NOTICE Damaging the servomotors with 1.2 Nm and 9.0 Nm through opening. Opening the servomotor destroys the servomotor. The warranty expires. Installation Notes • Lay high-voltage ignition cable always separately and in safe distance from device and other cables.

    • Page 14: Electrical Connection Flame Sensor

      General Safety Instructions Electrical Connection Flame Sensor Interruptions and losses in signal transmission need to be minimised: • Do not wire the sensor cable with other cables. Flame signal is reduced through line capacities.  Use a separate 7-pole cable. •…

    • Page 15: Product Description

      Product Description Product Description Functional Description BT300 combines the benefits of an electronic fuel/air ratio control system with up to three mo- torised actuator elements and optional modules like an analogue output for speed control of the combustion air fan with an electronic burner control unit. The leakage test, flame monitor- ing system, power control unit and (optional) CO/O controller for control and optimisation of an oil or gas-fired forced-draught burner are all integrated.

    • Page 16: Life Cycle

      A cutting and clamping technique (SKT) * B screw terminals * 2 RAST2.5 plug connector for actuator, User interface and LAMTEC SYSTEM BUS in cutting and clamping technique * please note plug-in direction The designed lifetime is not the warranty time specified in the Terms of Delivery…

    • Page 17
      Product Description Fig. 3-1 Dimensions BT320 … 340 (terminal assignment BT330/BT340 only) Fig. 3-2 UI300 side view Fig. 3-3 UI300 front view Fig. 3-4 UI300 panel cut-out…
    • Page 18
      Product Description Function Power supply: 230 V +10/-15 % 47-63 Hz 115 V +10/-15 % 47-63 Hz (on request) Maximum backup-fuse: 10 A slow-blow To be used only in a grounded power line network! Power consumption: max. 30 VA 1 A Switching threshold of ionisation current: Digital signal inputs:…
    • Page 19: Actuator

      Product Description Environmental Conditions Temperature range -20 … +60 °C/-4 °F … +140 °F (condensation is prohibited) Transport: Climatic conditions Class 2K3 according to DIN EN 60721-3 Mechanic conditions Class 2M2 according to DIN EN 60721-3 Temperature range -20 … +70 °C/-4 °F … +158 °F (condensation is prohibited) Storage: Climatic conditions…

    • Page 20
      Product Description 1 15.4 (+0.3/-1) including axial play 2 Cap cannot be removed by hand 3 Flexible control cable (black), length 1.5 m 4 Plug connector (RAST 2.5) pole number 6 5 Brass tube and M4 x 30 DIN 912 cylinder bolt fixed with O-ring Function Power supply 24 VDC ±20 %…
    • Page 21: Actuators 662R5001

      Product Description NOTICE Damaging the 0,8 Nm actuator by opening the actuator. Do not open the actuator at another part as the cover of the electric connection, otherwise the actuator will be damaged. The warranty expires and is invalid.  Do not open the actuator but at the cover of the electric connection. 3.3.2.2 Actuators 662R5001…

    • Page 22
      Product Description Fig. 3-6 Dimensional drawing of motor type 0R5001-1 and type 662R5003-1 with cable Fig. 3-7 Dimensional drawing of motor type 660R5009-0 without cable but with plug…
    • Page 23
      Product Description Function 662R5001… 662R5003… 662R5009… Power supply: 24VDC ±20 % Floating time 5 s/90° 5 s/90° 15 s/90° Direction of rotation 0° left — view to the drive shaft to 90° Effective 1.2 Nm 3 Nm 9 Nm output torque (both directions of rota- (both directions of rota- (both directions of rotation)
    • Page 24: Flame Sensor/Flame Scanner

      Product Description 3.3.3 Flame Sensor/Flame Scanner Fig. 3-8 KLC 1000 Fig. 3-9 Dimensions KLC 1000 (1 = radial scanning opening) KLC10/KLC1000 Input Data Power supply: KLC10: 120 VAC -15/+10 % 50-60 Hz KLC1000: 230/240 VAC -15/+10 % 50-60 Hz Current consumption: 5,5 mA Optical Evaluation Spectral range:…

    • Page 25
      Product Description Fig. 3-10 Dimensions of angle adapter for KLC 2002 Fig. 3-11 Dimensions KLC 2002 KLC20/KLC2002 Input Data Power supply: KLC20: 120 VAC -15/+10 % 50-60 Hz KLC2002: 230/240 VAC -15/+10 % 50-60 Hz Current consumption: 3 — 4 mA Optical Evaluation Spectral range: 380 — 1150 nm…
    • Page 26: Mounting And Functions

      Mounting and Functions Mounting and Functions System Overview Fig. 4-1 System overview of BurnerTronic BT300…

    • Page 27: Connecting Diagrams

      Mounting and Functions Connecting Diagrams X30 = User Interface UI 300 Maximum cable length X31 = LSB Option X01-X6+X08: 10 m X32 = continuous output 1, e.g. air damper X07+X09: 20 m X33 = continuous output 2, e.g. gas damper X10: 20 m X34 = continuous output 3 (optional)

    • Page 28: Optional Connections For The Fuel Line

      Mounting and Functions When running oil/gas burning applications (BT340 in combination with DFM300), the function ’Gas > min’ is aligned with X05. Put in oil/gas applications, the pressure monitoring for ’Oil pressure > min.’ in the oil safety ► interlock chain (SIC). 4.2.1 Optional Connections for the Fuel Line Fuel valve (gas side)

    • Page 29: Optional Connections For The Flame Scanner

      Mounting and Functions Oil pressure min sensor Oil valve 1 stage Oil valve 2 stage Oil valve 3 stage Fig. 4-4 Fuel train — oil 3-stage Oil pressure min sensor Oil valve for modulated operation, oil valve 1 stage at 2-stage operation Oil valve 2 stage at 2-stage operation Optional ignition valve…

    • Page 30
      Mounting and Functions Fig. 4-8 Connecting diagram of the sensor Honeywell IRD1020 Fig. 4-9 Connecting diagram of sensor Honeywell IRD1010, KLC10, KLC20, KLC1000 or KLC2002 Colour code BK = black; BN = brown; BU = blue Fig. 4-10 Connecting diagram F300K via power pack FN20 (also valid for F200K) Fig.
    • Page 31
      Mounting and Functions Dimensional Drawings Fig. 4-12 Dimensional drawing F200K Fig. 4-13 Dimensional drawing F300K Fig. 4-15 Dimensional drawing KLC1000/KLC2002 side view Fig. 4-14 Dimensional drawing KLC1000/KLC2002 top view 1 Radial opening (with KLC1000 only)
    • Page 32: Lsb Module Integration

      Mounting and Functions 4.2.3 LSB Module Integration EBM100 may be used as an alterna- tive field bus module instead of PBM100 Alternative CO/O measurement LEM100 can be used as an alternative to LCM100 to connect LSB to BT100 CO/O measurement Fig.

    • Page 33
      2x2x0,60 twisted pairs with shielding, impedance 120 Devices on LAMTEC SYSTEM BUS (LSB) must be connected in serial/row (see Fig. 4-17 Se- rial BUS connection). The first and the last participant on LSB must be terminated with a ter- mination resistor of 120 . All the other BUS participants are not allowed to be connected to any termination resistor at all.
    • Page 34: Flame Monitoring

      The following types of flame sensor for intermittent operation (burner switched off at least once every 24 hours) are valid for use. Manufacturer Type Settings P 800 Approval LAMTEC F152 with FFS07 o. FFS08 UV (up to v3.1) Continuous contact (from v3.3) F200K with FN20 UV (up to v3.1)

    • Page 35: Flame Sensors

      Mounting and Functions WARNING! Danger from fuel ingress to combustion chamber after loss of flame! Improper use or configuration of flame sensors not approved for continuous operation can re- sult in hazardous situations and possible cause of explosion leading to loss of life and prop- erty.

    • Page 36
      Mounting and Functions NOTICE To avoid any disturbance, do not align the detector direct to the ignition spark. Breakdowns during pre-purge procedure may occur. The maximum length of the connection must be in accordance with the technical data. Install the detector connection cable with most possible distance to the ignition cable or the mains cable.
    • Page 37: Klc 10/Klc 1000

      Mounting and Functions KLC 20/KLC 2002 switches the flame relay ON – the red LED is permanently ON. After 9 sec. the switching output is disconnected – the red LED flashes. NOTICE Due to the safety function of the disturbance frequency cut-off, a flame simulation is not pos- sible by means of a simple art source of light.

    • Page 38
      Mounting and Functions CAUTION! For safety reasons and within the technical regulations, a controlled burner shut-down of the burner must occur and be guaranteed to happen at least once in every 24 hours of operation. Operating Indicator LED The flame detector KLC 10/KLC 1000 indicates the following operating conditions and flame signal strengths via the built-in LED.
    • Page 39: Process Sequence Charts

      Mounting and Functions Process Sequence Charts Key to process sequence charts Any condition Waiting for safety interlock chain gas, scan of air pressure monitor min. Time for pressure build-up in the gas test line (available with activated leakage test) 2,4 s Actuator running time 30 s — 60 s Delay of the recirculation damper…

    • Page 40
      Mounting and Functions Fig. 4-19 Oil with pilot burner BT300…
    • Page 41
      Mounting and Functions Fig. 4-20 Oil without pilot burner BT300…
    • Page 42
      Mounting and Functions Fig. 4-21 Gas with pilot burner and leakage test BT300…
    • Page 43
      Mounting and Functions Fig. 4-22 Gas without pilot burner and leakage test BT300…
    • Page 44: Leakage Test For Main Gas Valves

      Mounting and Functions Fig. 4-23 Leakage test BT300 Leakage Test for Main Gas Valves 4.5.1 Calculation Example With BT300 the gas pressure monitor is also applicable to the monitoring of minimal gas pres- sure. Therefore the minimal gas pressure of the burner must be set. The valve leakage test time t3 (P 311) would be set by BT300.

    • Page 45
      Mounting and Functions Example 1 Burner capacity =1000 KW Fuel = natural gas H, calorific value = 10 kW/m Nominal volumetric flow of the gases = 100 m Leakage rate max. = 0,1 m /h or 100l/h Example 2 Burner capacity =1000 KW Fuel = propane, calorific value = 25,9 kW/m Nominal volumetric flow of propane = 38,6 m Leakage rate max.
    • Page 46
      Mounting and Functions Leakage rate in l/h leak Absolute pressure on the switching point of pressure monitor (adjusted over- pressure + atmosphere pressure) Adjusted overpressure on switching point of pressure monitor sw e Output pressure on gas valve V2 during purge out e Atmospheric pressure (average of 101,3 kPa at sea level) Test volume between the valves…
    • Page 47: Leakage Test Process Flow

      Mounting and Functions 4.5.2 Leakage Test Process Flow The valve leakage test checks if the main gas valves are sealed. For this purpose the gas pressure of the supply is analysed. As valve leakage test section (space between the two main valves) burns empty whenever the burner is switched off, this part is usually pressureless at start-up (gas pressure >…

    • Page 48
      Mounting and Functions Fig. 4-25 Leakage test process diagram…
    • Page 49: Reaction On Gas Deficiency

      Mounting and Functions 4.5.3 Reaction on Gas Deficiency If main gas 1 valve is open and the pressure drops below the minimum pressure, gas deficien- cy is detected. This causes a safety shut down and fault indication H611. Further reactions are depending on the settings in P301 (automatic restart).

    • Page 50: Staged Operation

      Mounting and Functions Fig. 4-27 Wiring proposition for purge of gas line via roof in combination with BurnerTronic Staged Operation Function BT300 has not only the ability of shifting the burner firing rate in oil operation infinitely but 2- stage and 3-stage. Therefore oil valve 2 and oil valve 3 is switched ON and OFF depending on the position of air channel 1.

    • Page 51
      Mounting and Functions Fig. 4-28 Switching threshold of stage operation Switch-on point valve 2 P 528 … P 530 Parameters 528 … 530 Switch-off point valve 2 S1 … S3 Threshold 1 … 3 Switch-on point valve 3 Internal firing rate Switch-off point valve 3 Ignition point Firing Rate Controller…
    • Page 52: Flue Gas Recirculation

      Mounting and Functions NOTICE When using TPS input via X9.x P 531, P 532, P 533 and P 534 are not necessary. Example for a 2 stage oil burner with firing rate controller by LCM100: Situation: • The burner has only one air flap at channel 1. •…

    • Page 53: Actuator

      Mounting and Functions Negative pressure created by the combustion air fan can be used as an alternative to a recir- culation fan to aspirate flue gases. For this method of flue gas recirculation it is sufficient to monitor the combustion air fan. It is not possible to use a VSD controlled recirculation fan with the BT300 system.

    • Page 54: Detection Of Actuators With Transposed Connections

      Mounting and Functions 12 o’clock position  P 458 — P 460 = 0 • 9 o’clock position  P 458 — P 460 = 1 • 4.8.3 Detection of Actuators with Transposed Connections While replacing BT300 make sure actuators are re-connected to the correct channel. Label the plugs/cables to prevent faults or use the ’transposition test’…

    • Page 55
      Mounting and Functions External, mechanical stop on channel 2 for detection of transposition External, mechanical stop on channel 1 for detection of transposition Operational range Reference mark Fig. 4-30 Actuators 662R5001…, 662R5003…, 662R5009 Reference mark Internal mechanical stop Max. angle of rotation for detection of transposition External, mechanical stop on channel 1 for detection of transposition…
    • Page 56: Operating Control And Displays

      Operating Control and Displays Operating Control and Displays User Interface UI300 5.1.1 UI300 User Interface Display BACK key Cursor keys ENTER key Fig. 5-1 User Interface Display The display shows in pictogram: • the menu structure • operating status • parameters •…

    • Page 57
      Operating Control and Displays INFO MANUAL SETTINGS DATA PROCESSING (release level 1 is mandatory) INFO Select INFO path for information about the following: • Burner • Faults/Fault history • Software version • Display of check sums • Serial number • Actuator positions (current damper position for each channel) •…
    • Page 58: Main Menu

      Operating Control and Displays 5.1.3 Main Menu INFORMATION menu path [selected] Display of fuel type Bar graph of internal firing rate in % (0 — 100) MANUAL menu path SETTINGS menu path Release level DATA HANDLING menu path Window number Fig.

    • Page 59: Burner Details

      Operating Control and Displays 5.1.4.1 Burner Details Displaying Operating Hours and Burner Starts Display of operating hours Number of operating hours in total (device connected with mains) Number of operating hours in oil operation Number of operating hours in gas operation Display of burner starts Number of burner starts in oil operation Number of burner starts in gas operation…

    • Page 60: Recalling Fault History

      Operating Control and Displays 5.1.4.2 Recalling Fault History Displaying Burner Faults Fault code (Last 10 faults are stored, No. of operating hours when no. 01 is the latest fault) fault has occurred D1 Diagnostic code 1 Duration of the fault D2 Diagnostic code 2 NOTICE Information concerning fault and diagnostic codes can be found in the list of fault codes.

    • Page 61: Software Version

      Operating Control and Displays Fault unlock How to unlock BT300  A fault is pending and the ENTER key is flashing. 1. Press ENTER key. BT300 is not locked anymore. Changing from fault unlock to main menu:  A fault is pending and the ENTER key is flashing 1.

    • Page 62: Serial Number

      Operating Control and Displays The checksum shows whether the value of one or more parameters have been changed. 5.1.4.5 Serial Number UI = Serial numberUI300 BT = Serial number BT300 5.1.4.6 Positions of Actuators Indication of the channel’s actual (left to right): Channel 1 (oil) Channel 2 (air) Channel 3 (oil)

    • Page 63: Check Digital Inputs/Outputs

      Operating Control and Displays 5.1.4.7 Check Digital Inputs/Outputs Check Digital Inputs and Outputs Fuel selection oil Fan ON/OFF Fuel selection gas Fault Burner ON Ignition transformer ON/ Oil pressure min. is present Ignition valve ON/OFF Gas pressure min. is present SIC* oil is closed SIC* boiler is closed Oil pump OFF…

    • Page 64: Manual Menu Path

      Operating Control and Displays 5.1.5 Manual Menu Path MANUAL Select MANUAL path to carry out actions as follows: Switching burner ON and OFF Presetting of burner firing rate Start burner manually Adjust burner firing rate NOTICE At least release level1 is mandatory to start the burner. The ’Burner ON’…

    • Page 65: Fault Indication

      Operating Control and Displays 5.1.6 Fault Indication Displaying Burner Faults Fault code (Last 10 faults are stored, No. of operating hours when no. 01 is the latest fault) fault has occurred D1 Diagnostic code 1 Duration of the fault D2 Diagnostic code 2 NOTICE Information concerning fault and diagnostic codes can be found in the list of fault codes.

    • Page 66: Settings Menu Path

      Operating Control and Displays Fault unlock How to unlock BT300  A fault is pending and the ENTER key is flashing. 1. Press ENTER key. BT300 is not locked anymore. Changing from fault unlock to main menu:  A fault is pending and the ENTER key is flashing 1.

    • Page 67: Password

      Operating Control and Displays 5.1.7.1 Password Reset access level Enter password to get access level 5.1.7.2 Program Sequence Duration pre-purge period Duration post purge period valve leakage test Pilot burner gas operation Pilot burner oil operation…

    • Page 68
      Operating Control and Displays Set duration of pre-purge period Parameter number UI Parameter modifications are transferred BT = Parameter number BT300 Parameter modifications are discarded NOTICE Both values are identical – Confirm with The values are different – Cancel with NOTICE Pre-purge starts as soon as damper reaches pre-purge position and — if you use a VSM — the last but one point of fuel/air ratio curve is passed.
    • Page 69
      Operating Control and Displays Set duration of the post-purge NOTICE Both values are identical – Confirm with The values are different – Cancel with…
    • Page 70
      Operating Control and Displays Valve Leakage Test Valve leakage test ON/OFF P802 P802 = 0 = Valve leakage test OFF P802 = 1 = If valve leakage test before ignition is configured, the test runs during ignition. P802 = 2 = If valve leakage test before ignition is configured, the test runs after pre-purge.
    • Page 71
      Operating Control and Displays Activate pilot burner in gas operation Pilot burner ON Pilot burner OFF Activate pilot burner in oil operation Pilot burner ON Pilot burner OFF Ignition point Firing rate points 200, 250, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800, 900, 999 S 0 …
    • Page 72
      Operating Control and Displays NOTICE The following firing rate points are available: Ignition point , 200, 250, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800, 900, 999 Use BACK key to switch to menu settings after having completed curve settings. NOTICE Pressing while setting firing rate points discards the modifications.
    • Page 73: Configuration Of The Actuators

      Operating Control and Displays NOTICE The points are approached from above by using the overshoot-function. If you use the over- shoot-function in operation, you must program all points from above. Only if you do so, the required position will match the actual position. 5.1.7.3 Configuration of the Actuators Displaying the Actuators’…

    • Page 74: Deleting Curves

      Operating Control and Displays NOTICE The actuators are running to the new position immediately after the modification. To adjust channel 4 the fan motor must be running. The feedback setpoint curve of channel 4 must rise continuously. Pressing key BACK for longer than 2 s in menu ’Curve settings of the actuators’ causes a fault shut down.

    • Page 75: Ui300 Settings

      Operating Control and Displays CO/O Controller Settings • ON/OFF • Correction mask • Correction spreading Trim Settings • Correction range • Testing O trim • curve settings • Delete O setpoint curve or optimisation curve • Adjusting P term and dead time •…

    • Page 76: Edit Parameter

      Operating Control and Displays 5.1.7.8 Edit Parameter Setting Parameters up to Release Level 2 NOTICE Only parameters of the present release level can be modified.

    • Page 77: Menu Path Dataset Processing

      Operating Control and Displays 5.1.8 Menu Path Dataset Processing Saving/Restoring BT300 Dataset Saving dataset from BT300 Transfer dataset to BT300 NOTICE Check the checksum for equality each time after saving the data: Check the settings from chapter 2.4 Installation Notes after transferring data to BT300: Other Displays No connection between UI300 and BT300 UI300 User Interface pictogram…

    • Page 78
      Operating Control and Displays Termination Communication error pictogram connection unavailable Fig. 5-4 Termination Error Mode H120 Failure number Diagnostics 1 Diagnostics 2 Failure occurs at that time Fig. 5-5 BT300 ferror mode CO/O2 Hint Number of the currently pending hint. The hint can be released by the RESET but- ton.
    • Page 79
      Operating Control and Displays CO/O2 Fault Number of the currently pending fault. The fault can be released by the RESET button. Fig. 5-8 CO/O fault CO Faultr Number of the currently pending fault. The fault can be released by the RESET button.
    • Page 80: Lsb Remote Software

      Resolution of the display 1024 x 768 pixel 5.3.1.2 Install Software The remote software visualises parameters and curve data of the end devices on LAMTEC SYSTEM BUS (LSB). Values are edited and saved. A USB-CAN module connects the end device via LSB. For this purpose, install the driver for the USB-CAN module.

    • Page 81: Install Software

      Operating Control and Displays The current status of the end device, which is determined by the settings for the parameters and curve data can be saved (backed-up) in a data set on the PC. Once backed-up, these data sets can then be restored later to reproduce a certain status in the BT300. You will find a schematic diagram in chapter 4.1 System Overview.

    • Page 82
      Operating Control and Displays Fig. 5-14 Software setup assistant 3. Select ’Next’. The window to select destination folder opens. Fig. 5-15 Select destination folder 4. Specify the folder where the LSB Remote Software should be installed. A warning if the folder already exists is displayed. 5.
    • Page 83
      Operating Control and Displays Fig. 5-16 Select start menu folder 6. To proceed, select ’Next’ 7. Create a program short cut. a) Check the box to launch an icon for the application on the desktop. Fig. 5-17 Create a desktop icon 8.
    • Page 84
      Operating Control and Displays Fig. 5-18 Select USB-CAN drivers 10. «Next» to continue, «Cancel» to exit. NOTICE Do not connect an USB-CAN converter to the computer during installation of the USB-CAN driver! 11. Click on “Install“ to start the installation. Otherwise select «Cancel» to cancel the installa- tion.
    • Page 85
      Operating Control and Displays Fig. 5-20 Installation in progress The progress bar shows installation process. NOTICE As soon as the bar fills up the USB-CAN driver setup starts. Do not connect a USB-CAN converter to the computer during installation of the USB-CAN driver! 12.
    • Page 86
      Operating Control and Displays Fig. 5-22 Start window of the USB-CAN driver installation Select ’Next’ to start installation. 14. Read and accept the license agreement. Then proceed by clicking “Next”. (The ’Next’ button will be active after accepting the license agreement. Fig.
    • Page 87
      Operating Control and Displays Fig. 5-24 Preparing USB-CAN-driver installation «Next» to continue, «Cancel» to exit. 16. Fill out the fields in the following window Fig. 5-25 User information «Next» to continue, «Cancel» to exit. 17. Select installation folder for installation of USB-CAN-driver.
    • Page 88
      Operating Control and Displays Fig. 5-26 Selection of the installation folder «Next» to continue, «Cancel» to exit. 18. Read following information carefully and answer question with ’YES’. NOTICE It is important that you read the information window thoroughly and fully understand its con- tents.
    • Page 89
      Operating Control and Displays Fig. 5-28 Selection of the components «Next» to continue, «Cancel» to exit. 20. Confirm selection of storage folder for program’s short cuts (standard = start menu). Fig. 5-29 Storage of short cuts «Next» to continue, «Cancel» to exit. 21.
    • Page 90
      Operating Control and Displays Fig. 5-30 Additional functions «Next» to continue, «Cancel» to exit. 22. Additional options regarding driver update Fig. 5-31 Additional options «Next» to continue, «Cancel» to exit. 23. Select “Install“ to start the installation. Otherwise select «Cancel» to cancel the installation.
    • Page 91
      Operating Control and Displays Fig. 5-32 Start the driver installation 24. The installation starts. The bar indicates the progress of the installation. Wait until the bar fills up. Fig. 5-33 USB-CAN driver installation Process 25. During installation you will receive the following security prompt.
    • Page 92
      Operating Control and Displays Fig. 5-34 Security dialogue Select “Install“ to continue 26. When the installation is completed you will receive the following version information. Fig. 5-35 Important information regarding the USB-CAN driver version «Next» to continue 27. Complete the driver installation by clicking “Finish”…
    • Page 93
      Operating Control and Displays Fig. 5-36 Driver setup has been completed 28. Connect the USB/CAN module to the computer. As soon as the module is connected to the system the system recognises the module and starts installing the driver software. 29.
    • Page 94: First Connection With The End Device

      Operating Control and Displays Fig. 5-38 USB/CAN module is now ready to use 30. End the installation by clicking “Close” The installation is completed and the LSB Remote Software can be used. 5.3.1.4 First Connection with the End Device NOTICE If you start the software without connected and available USB-CAN module you will receive the following message: Fig.

    • Page 95: Release Codes/Release Levels

      This code is pro- vided by LAMTEC in combination with an USB-CAN module. Access to the input mask for this activation code is available either via menu (Options >> Enter…

    • Page 96: Offline/Online

      Operating Control and Displays 1. Click Key icon in the bottom left The following entry mask opens: Fig. 5-42 Dialogue window Access code NOTICE The activation code applies exclusively to one particular USB-CAN module in each case. For entering a code this USB-CAN module has to be connected already. NOTICE If a USB-CAN module is present, the serial number ’Systec SN’…

    • Page 97: Online Mode

      1. Connect USB/CAN converter directly with SUB D 9 plug for LSB to LCM100. 2. Connect USB/CAN converter via USB to the PC. Call up the LSB Remote Software 1. Select the path C: ProgrammeLamtec. 2. Double-click LSBRemote.exe The initial screen opens.

    • Page 98
      Operating Control and Displays Fig. 5-44 Initial screen LSB Remote Software Initial screen Select function (pictograms) Device list Menu bar Device status ’Set online’ button 3. Select device type BT300. 4. Click button ’set Online’. The following ’device selection’ window opens: Fig.
    • Page 99
      Operating Control and Displays 5. Select device you want to establish a connection with and press OK to confirm. The software starts to establish a connection. Fig. 5-46 Reading data On display ’Set online’ orange and green progress bars are displayed showing status of synchronisation of PC’s data with data of the connected device.
    • Page 100
      Operating Control and Displays Fig. 5-48 Change customer abbreviation NOTICE The customer ID process must be carried out for each device once. This process sets pass- words specific to each customer. The customer ID cannot be deleted or changed. Enter Password Entering the level 1 password 1.
    • Page 101
      Operating Control and Displays 3. Enter your customer password for access level 1 in the ’Password’ text box. 4. Click the ’Set password’ button. Access to all level 1 functions is granted now. NOTICE The ’Check password’ button allows you to check the validity of the password. Edit Parameter 1.
    • Page 102
      Operating Control and Displays 4. Select parameter group 5 (System). You can now set properties for UI300 User Interface. NOTICE For changes in parameter group 5 no additional confirmation is necessary. NOTICE Parameter group 10 ’Maintenance’ is without function at present. NOTICE Parameter groups 15 to 35 were described in relation to corresponding system options.
    • Page 103
      Operating Control and Displays Parameters of Operating Modes Fig. 5-53 Parameters of the operating modes * available with BT340 only…
    • Page 104
      Operating Control and Displays Controller Parameters For setting the control parameters the LSB Remote Software is providing special input win- dows. According to the access level functions can be activated/deactivated and values can be edited within these windows. Call up windows through parameter sub menu. Fig.
    • Page 105
      Operating Control and Displays Fig. 5-56 Window for setting O trim parameters Fig. 5-57 Window for setting CO control parameters…
    • Page 106: Read Out Faults

      Operating Control and Displays Fig. 5-58 Window for setting correction parameters NOTICE You will find settings of the CO/O control in the commissioning supplement for «Integrated CO/O control», print no. DLT1207. 5.3.3 Read Out Faults 1. From the ’BurnerTronic’ menu, select the sub menus ’Histories’ and ’Fault history’. The window for selecting the fault history opens.

    • Page 107
      Operating Control and Displays Fig. 5-60 Fault information Fault selection tab Description of fault Time that fault occurred (estimated) Burner status display…
    • Page 108
      Operating Control and Displays NOTICE The date and time of the fault are calculated basing on the operating hours accumulated at the time of the fault, the current BurnerTronic operating hours, and the computer time. If BT300 was disconnected from the mains after fault occurred and before fault has been read, the date and time of the fault will not be calculated correctly.
    • Page 109: Bt300 Curve Dialogue

      Operating Control and Displays Fig. 5-62 Temperature statistics NOTICE The temperature is measured directly on the circuit board of the BT300. Due to self-heating this temperature is always slightly higher the ambient temperature. 5.3.4 BT300 Curve Dialogue The curve dialogue window shows the setpoint curves of the channels (ratio controller) per curve set — either oil (1) or gas (2).

    • Page 110: Setpoint Graphic

      Operating Control and Displays 5.3.4.1 Setpoint Graphic Fig. 5-64 Setpoint graphic window 5.3.4.2 Curve Table Fig. 5-65 Curve table window…

    • Page 111: Set Curve

      Operating Control and Displays 5.3.4.3 Set Curve To make curve changes to BT300, change BT300 to ’setting mode’ first. Fig. 5-66 Setting dialogue NOTICE This function affects safety. The function must be re-confirmed within eight seconds. In setting mode of the curve set two functions of the device are available: Save point Delete curve set NOTICE…

    • Page 112
      Operating Control and Displays Fig. 5-67 Setting window NOTICE While using the overshoot-function you should program all points top down because they must be approached in overshoot-process that way. Only when you act according to this procedure the required position will match the actual position in operation. NOTICE Pre-purge starts as soon as the damper reaches pre-purge position and — if you use a VSM — the last but one point of the fuel/air ratio control curve is passed.
    • Page 113: Programming Of Fuel/Air Ratio Control

      Operating Control and Displays 5.3.5 Programming of Fuel/Air Ratio Control 1. Click on menu ’Curves (Fuel/Air ratio control)’. Fig. 5-68 Curves window 2. Click on button ’Start EI-Mode (Setting)’. 3. Press OK to confirm the message ’Setting start’. Automatic EI Mode is active now. NOTICE To use channel 4 set a continuously increasing curve! NOTICE…

    • Page 114
      Operating Control and Displays Take note of following information in this window: – A blue frame around curve and channels’ positioning information is indicating selection of channels you want to set. – Fields ’Setpoint’ show respective setpoint position of the actuator. –…
    • Page 115
      Operating Control and Displays Warm setting/Cold setting 1. Start the burner by connecting voltage on terminal X10 Pin 2/’burner on’. NOTICE Knowing the curve settings allows to adjust the burner in ’cold’ condition. The specifications are the same as in ’warm’ condition. In ’cold’ condition the burner is OFF. A red frame around the basic screen shows the burner’s actual state.
    • Page 116
      Operating Control and Displays Fig. 5-71 Values are read As soon as the point has been stored, the program reads the data back from BT300. Programming firing rate curve 1. Click button to select first curve point of the firing rate curve. Fig.
    • Page 117
      Operating Control and Displays Fig. 5-73 Programming the firing rate curve 3. Click on button to select a higher curve point of firing rate curve and adjust burner at this point. 4. Adjust burner this way up to the firing rate point 999 (nominal output). NOTICE Following firing rate points are available: 200, 250, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800, 900, and 999.
    • Page 118
      Operating Control and Displays Fig. 5-74 Programming of firing rate curve NOTICE You do not need to adjust all provided curve points on the firing rate curve. The BT300 inter- polates between two adjacent curve points linearly, regardless curve points in between are plausible or not.
    • Page 119: Programming A Staged Operation

      Operating Control and Displays 5.3.6 Programming a Staged Operation 1. Click in menu on ’Curves (Fuel/Air ratio control)’ Fig. 5-75 Curve selection Window ’Curves (Fuel/Air ratio control)’ opens. Fig. 5-76 Curves window 2. Click button ’Start EI-Mode (Setting)’. 3. Quit the message ’Start setting’ with OK. NOTICE Click button OK in the message during running time of the blue bar.

    • Page 120
      Operating Control and Displays NOTICE Take the following information from this window: A blue frame around curve and around channels’ position information indicates channel selection for setting. Fields ’Setpoint’ show setpoint position of the actuator. Fields ’Actual Value’ show actual position of the actuator. ’Big’…
    • Page 121
      Operating Control and Displays Fig. 5-78 Adjust stage operation Adjust levels finely (warm setting) 1. Connect voltage to terminal X10 Pin2 (burner ON) to start-up burner. Fig. 5-79 Status field — pre-purge [setting] 2. Wait until the burner is in control mode. 3.
    • Page 122
      Operating Control and Displays Fig. 5-80 Adjust ignition position in staged operation 4. Click button ’save point’ to confirm the settings. The point is stored. Once a point has been stored, the program reads the data back from the device . 5.
    • Page 123: Software Interface Lsb Remote Software

      Operating Control and Displays 8. Enter the values in field ’1  2’ and ’2  1’. Switch-on point and switch-off point of the 2 stage are adjusted. Fig. 5-82 Adjust 2 stage in staged operation 9. Click button to choose 2 stage of firing rate curve.

    • Page 124
      Operating Control and Displays Fig. 5-84 Menu file — active connection to device Fig. 5-83 Menu file — no connection to device Open dataset 1. Click on menu to ’open dataset’. The window for selecting data set opens. Fig. 5-85 Open dataset window (Language of window depends on language of operating system) 2.
    • Page 125
      Operating Control and Displays Save dataset 1. Click on menu to ’save dataset’. The window for saving dataset opens. Fig. 5-86 Save dataset window (Language of window depends on language of operating system) 2. Browse to directory you want to save your dataset to (destination folder). 3.
    • Page 126
      Operating Control and Displays Fig. 5-87 Dataset information 4. Enter information of dataset to be saved in text boxes. Button ’Print’  print of information. • Button ’Clear fields’  deletion of all entries in text boxes • Button ’Reload’  loading information of actual dataset •…
    • Page 127
      Operating Control and Displays Upload dataset to device 1. Click on menu to «Upload dataset into device». Window for opening dataset opens. Fig. 5-88 Upload dataset to device (Language of the window depends on language of operating system) 2. Browse to dataset you want to load and click on button «open». The window «dataset information»…
    • Page 128: Access Rights

      Operating Control and Displays NOTICE It is obligatory to document all parameter changes on the device. Note at least the date and the name of dataset. The dataset will be transferred. 7. Confirm message «Please CRC(s) receipt» with «OK». NOTICE Without confirmation or cancellation the device will remain in blocked mode.

    • Page 129: Burnertronic

      Operating Control and Displays Fig. 5-90 Menu access rights Enter password 1. The description, how to enter the password see chapter Enter Password Change password for customer-level 1 1. Click in menu on ’change password level 1’. The window for entering a new password opens. Fig.

    • Page 130
      Operating Control and Displays Fig. 5-92 Menu ’BurnerTronic’ Parameter 1. Find the description how to read or change parameters in chapter Edit Parameter. Reading level CRCs 1. Click in menu on ’Parameters’ >> ’CRCs level’. The window with CRC16 checksums of all level opens. The calculated parameters and the parameters of the remote device are compared.
    • Page 131
      Operating Control and Displays Get the current status of digital outputs of remote device. Fig. 5-94 Status of digital outputs Proceed cold check (check digital outputs) 1. Click in menu on ’Cold check’. The dialogue to proceed the check of outputs starts. Fig.
    • Page 132: Options

      Operating Control and Displays NOTICE Not confirming this message during default time with OK, aborts the process. The process can be repeated immediately. Cold check mode is activated now. To illustrate this status, the choice box of outputs re- ceives a red frame. 5.

    • Page 133
      Operating Control and Displays Fig. 5-97 Flash DLL client For more information see chapter 6.2 Firmware Update BT300 and chapter 6.3 Firmware Up- date UI300.
    • Page 134
      Operating Control and Displays USB-CAN (Systec) 1. Click in menu on ’USB-CAN (Systec)’. The USB-CAN window opens. Fig. 5-98 USB-CAN (Systec) 2. Click button to establish a connection to LSB module. 3. Click button to interrupt connection to LSB module. 4.
    • Page 135
      Operating Control and Displays Select language 1. Click in menu on ’Language’. Language selection window opens. Fig. 5-99 Changing language 2. Select language of LSB remote software and confirm with ’OK’. Activation Code 1. Click in the menu on ’Activation Code’. Activation Code window opens.
    • Page 136: Help

      Operating Control and Displays 5.3.7.5 Help In menu path ’Help’ it is possible to • call up help to LSB Remote Software • get information about version of LSB Remote Software Fig. 5-101 Menu help Getting help 1. Click in the menu on ’LSB Remote Software/User Manual F1’. The BT300 manual opens.

    • Page 137: Maintenance

      Maintenance Maintenance BT300 Data Back-Up At any time, you are able to create a protected data set (DS) for storage (back up) of current status of device. Therefore you must set LSB remote software to online mode. Fig. 6-1 Select the protected dataset menu In contrast to a ‘normal’ data set the protected data set includes storage of check sums of pa- rameter values (etc.).

    • Page 138: Firmware Update Bt300

      Firmware Updates can only be processed with LSB Remote Software version OEM-Level and higher. NOTICE To switch OFF the burner before starting the firmware update via LAMTEC SYSTEM BUS is mandatory! NOTICE Only one device of the same type as the one you want to update may be connected to LAMTEC SYSTEM BUS (p.

    • Page 139
      Maintenance 7. Click button ’Open HEX Image (HP)’ and search for the file containing the software of the main processor of the BT300 in the window ’Open HEX image’. 8. Repeat the procedure in no. 3 but click Button ’Open HEX Image (UP)’ and select the file containing the software of the watchdog processor of the BT300 in the window ’Open HEX image’.
    • Page 140
      Maintenance 12. The progress bar shows the progress of the update. 13. Software versions 1.12.0.0 and higher display a success message. 14. Software versions prior to V1.12.0.0 show the end of the update by a message from the boot loader of the respective device. 15.
    • Page 141: Firmware Update Ui300

      Maintenance Firmware Update UI300 Preparation of the UI300 firmware update 1. Connect LAMTEC SYSTEM BUS to your computer and start LSB Remote Software. 2. Do not set BT300 online. Switch on BT300. UI300 firmware update 1. Process the firmware update analogue to the BT300 firmware update. Start with step 3.

    • Page 142: Options

      Options Options Firing-Rate Controller Module LCM100 The LCM100 adds the function of a firing rate controller to the BurnerTronic. Additional com- ponents of the module are: – An integrated power supply for external 24 V consumers (sensors, additional BurnerTronic expansion modules) –…

    • Page 143: Range Limits

      Options 7.1.1 Range Limits You must set limit values in the parameters, switching the burner on and off. After a burner shut-down while actual temperature has not reached the switch-on threshold yet, a display will inform you that firing rate controller is refusing a start-up. Fig.

    • Page 144: Enter Setpoint Of Firing Rate Controller

      Options 7.1.2 Enter Setpoint of Firing Rate Controller Use the arrow keys to select switching point (ON or OFF) and to set switch- ing point afterwards. If you confirm settings with ENTER in a preset time slot, the value is stored in the parameter.

    • Page 145: Operating Description

      Options 7.1.3 Operating Description The burner start-up is carried out as described above. At least ’Burner ON’ signal and ’Re- lease’ must be sent by firing rate controller. The burner starts as soon as it is receiving signals ’Burner ON’ and ’Release’ from firing rate controller.

    • Page 146: Setpoint Changeover

      Options External Setpoint Presetting For the external setpoint values to be activated, parameter 40 must be set to the value 2 (con- trol by atmospheric condition). The terminals 25, 26 and 27 must be short-circuited. At terminal 16 (-) and 17 (+) of the LCM100, a 0/4 … 20 mA would be connected. Lower limit P 52 Upper limit…

    • Page 147: Start-Up Sequence

      Options 7.1.6 Start-up Sequence The firing rate controller has a start-up cycle in order to slow down burners’ firing rate while starting. The start-up cycle is passed during each new burner start. The internal firing rate is held at user-adjusted value (P 0044) as long as the boiler is cold. The actual value is below parameter set limit (P 0043.

    • Page 148: Control Range

      Options 7.1.8 Control Range The control range is located around setpoint. The content of ’burner ON’ parameter is sub- tracted from setpoint to form switch-on value. ’Upper control range’ parameter value (P 0055) is added to setpoint to form the upper limit of control range. The control range may therefore be located asymmetrically around setpoint.The shut-off range is limited by ’Burner off’…

    • Page 149: Aides For Setting

      Options value. I > → faster approximation to setpoint → danger of overshooting! • D term The difference term is calculated from variation of actual values. This may result in accel- erating, respectively retarding effects. In practice adjustments of PID-controller is orientated by given controlled system. Out of char- acteristics of the controlled system data can be deduced, i.e.

    • Page 150: External/Manual Firing-Rate Presetting (Terminals 16 — 19)

      Options Characteristic Control Process Control Mode Start-up Procedure I term higher decrease of atten- stronger reaction with faster start-up with ten- uation tendency to oscillate dency to oscillate I term smaller increase of attenu- less reaction, less ten- slower start-up ation dency to oscillate Fig.

    • Page 151: Dip Switch

      Options Connection external/manual regular firing rate input (Terminal 16 — 19) Fig. 7-9 Connection possibilities of external firing rate input NOTICE If 0 … 10 V input is used for the presetting of the firing rate the sensor must be able to load the input of the LCM100 with 100 A to 0.

    • Page 152: Leds

      Options You can set LSB Family by DIP switches 2 — 3. DIP switch 2 DIP switch 3 LSB Family You can set sensor inputs by DIP switches 4 — 6. DIP switch 4 DIP switch 5 DIP switch 6 Input –…

    • Page 153
      Options TPS (Three-Point-Step) Potentiometer 0 … 10 V 4 … 20 mA R = 2.2 k — 22 k LED1 = Error LED2 = CAN data traffic LED3 = Power ON…
    • Page 154: Galvanic Isolation

      Options Cable assembly Type Shield Cable length max [m] Mains AC in 24 V external DC out BT-CAN Fuel measurement oil Fuel measurement gas Setpoint changeover Fault reset Flue gas temperature Ambient temperature Boiler water temperature Steam pressure Combination input 20 mA Combination input term.

    • Page 155: Terminal Assignment

      Options DANGER! Attention! Short-circuit danger and electrical shock! An improper wiring connection could lead to a short-circuit, which may cause damages to the connected devices or to an electrical shock.  Please ensure all connections on SELV have a safe separation from main voltage in wiring and with connected devices! 7.1.15.2 Terminal Assignment LCM100 has a 24 V power supply for pressure transmitter and for power supplies of other LSB…

    • Page 156
      CAN Interface (Terminal 10 — 13) Recommendation: Connect BT300 plug X31 to LCM100 by a prefabricated cable with LAMTEC Order No. 667P0515. The plug X31 is already installed on this cable and terminal numbers for LCM100 are marked on the wires.
    • Page 157
      Options CAUTION! Short circuit and electric shock! If the analogue standard signals are not separated from the mains, a buffer amplifier must be used for galvanic separation. Pressure sensor connections Fig. 7-20 Connection pressure sensor 2-wire-system * Fig. 7-21 Connection pressure sensor 3-wire-system * Fig.
    • Page 158: Technical Data Lcm100

      Options 7.1.16 Technical data LCM100 Fig. 7-24 Dimensions LCM100 General data Power supply: 90 — 250 V 47 — 63 Hz Power consumption: 18,2 VA Housing: Polyamide 6.6 (panel: polycarbonate) Dimensions: 65x70x80 mm Weight: 270 g Flammability: UL-94 V0 (panel: UL-94 V2) Mounting position: as desired Installation:…

    • Page 159
      Cable length max.: Digital inputs (setpoint switching and reserve input) Input frequency max.: 300 Hz Cable length max.: 10 m LAMTEC SYSTEM BUS Bit rate: 125 kbit/s Address: static LSB address, device family 1-4, selection with dip-switch Termination: integrated, activation with dip-switch…
    • Page 160: Dual Fuel Module Dfm300

      (e.g. oil pressure monitor during gas oper- ation) to be open. The DFM300 is connected to BT300 via LSB (LAMTEC SYSTEM BUS). DFM300 is providing a 230 VAC input for selection of current fuel.

    • Page 161
      Options Device Description Attributes 0525 BT300 Setting of number of stages for staged operation in oil mode (0 = modulated operation/ 1 = 2 stages/2 = 3 stages) 0 = 1 stage = modulated operation Group: 60 1 = 2 stages Min.: 0 2 = 3 stages Max.: 2…
    • Page 162: Dip Switch 1

      Options DIP switch 1 LSB terminating resistor deactivated LSB terminating resistor activated You can set LSB family by DIP switch 2-3. DIP switch 2 DIP switch 3 LSB Family DIP switches 4 — 6 are not assigned. 7.2.2 LEDs The DFM300 has 4 LEDs connected as mentioned below: Colour Description Fault (LED1)

    • Page 163: Electrical Connection

      Options 7.2.3 Electrical Connection LED1 = Error LED2 = CAN LED3 = Oil active LED4 = Gas active Signal Line Type Shield Cable length max. [m] Fuel valve 1 10 m — Gas valve 1/oil valve 1 Fuel valve 2 10 m — Gas valve 2/oil valve 2 Fuel valve 3 10 m — Gas valve 2/oil valve 2/ignition…

    • Page 164: Galvanic Isolation

      Options Signal Line Type Shield Cable length max. [m] SIC gas 10 m — input SIC fuel Ignition transformer gas 10 m — input ignition transformer Oil valve 1 10 m — input fuel valve 1 Oil valve 2 10 m — input fuel valve 2 Oil valve 3/ignition valve 10 m — input fuel valve 3 SIC oil…

    • Page 165: Terminal Assignment

      Options DANGER! Attention! Short-circuit danger and electrical shock! An improper wiring could lead to a short-circuit which may cause damages to connected de- vices or an electrical shock.  Please ensure all connections on SELV have a safe separation from main voltage in wir- ing and with connected devices! 7.2.3.2 Terminal Assignment Oil acknowledgement/Gas acknowledgement (Terminals 36;…

    • Page 166
      Options Fig. 7-29 Circuit diagram for modulating 2/3 stage oil and gas NOTICE You must integrate the oil pressure monitor into safety interlock chain oil. For the purposes of leakage test you must connect the gas pressure monitor to pressure monitor input of BT300.
    • Page 167: Technical Data Dfm300

      Installation: TS35 mounting rail as per EN 50022 or TS32 as per EN 50035 Connection cross section: 2.5 mm LAMTEC SYSTEM BUS Bit rate: 125 kbit/s Addressing: fixed LSB address, device family 1-4 selected by DIP switch Termination:…

    • Page 168: Adapter System Rast5

      Options Environmental Conditions Electronic safety: Degree of protection (DIN EN 60529) IP40 housing IP20 terminals 7.2.5 Adapter System Rast5 The burner is connected to DFM in general via BTR/Riaconn-screw terminal block. In order to connect DFM exactly the same way as BT300 which means directly at a mono-fuel burner the Rast5 module is transposing connectors provided by DFM.

    • Page 169
      Options Fig. 7-31 Connection Rast5 module…
    • Page 170
      Options Connection to burner Rast5 adapter offers following options to connect the burner: Connection Terminal type Plug Terminal Terminal assignment block GV1 Valve gas 1 X01-Gas GV2 Valve gas 2 X02-Gas X700 GV3 Valve gas 3 X03-Gas ZT Gas Ignition transformer X04-Gas ÖV1…
    • Page 171: Technical Data Rast5-Module

      Options Connection to DFM and BT300 Rast5 adapter offers following options to connect DFM and BT300: Connection Terminal type Plug Terminal Terminal assignment block to BT300 X028 X28-BT X706 Fuel selection to DFM X41-DFM Security chain gas X42-DFM Ignition transformer gas Security chain oil Ignition transformer oil firing rate input -…

    • Page 172: Variable Speed Drive Module Vsm100

      Use VSM and DFM only with BT300 software version 3.0.0.0 or higher. Software versionens before 3.0.0.0 do not support all necessary safety functions. Connect the RPM module VSM100 via LSB (LAMTEC SYSTEM BUS) to BT300. To insulate LSB from potential power supply voltage of BT300 a LCM100 or a LEM with power supply 24 VDC SELV is needed.

    • Page 173: Dip Switch

      Options Device Description Attributes 0403 BT300 Specification of channel 4 functions see P 400 Group: 50 Min.: 0 Max.: 6 Default: 0 Write: 2 Version: 1.0.0.0 0405 BT300 Channel release for curve set 1 Switch-off bit for each curve set. If bit ’x’ is set, channel in curve set ’x’ is in use. Group: 50 Define with this parameter active channel in a curve set.

    • Page 174
      Options DIP-Switch 1 LSB terminating resistor deactivated LSB terminating resistor activated You can set LSB family by DIP switch 2-3. DIP switch 2 DIP switch 3 LSB family Select sensor input with DIP switch 4 — 7 for acknowledgement and range of values settings. DIP switch 4 DIP switch 5 DIP switch 6…
    • Page 175: Leds

      Options 7.3.2 LEDs The VSM100 has 5 LEDs which should be connected as described below: Colour Relevance ERR (LED1) During normal operation LED is switched off. It will light up subject to following conditions: — Initialisation incomplete or not yet successfully com- pleted (e.g.

    • Page 176: Electrical Connection

      Options 7.3.3 Electrical Connection LED1 = Error LED2 = ON LED3 = CAN data traffic LED4 = Namur LED5 = 3-wire CAUTION! Short circuit and electric shock! If the analogue standard signals are not separated from the mains, a buffer amplifier must be used for galvanic separation.

    • Page 177: Galvanic Isolation

      Options Circuit Type Shielding Cable length max. [m] Speed feedback 0/4 … 20 mA Speed setpoint 0/4 … 20 mA Speed setpoint 0 … 10 V Input Output NOTICE If cable shielding is provided you must connect this shielding to an extra protected earth ter- minal.

    • Page 178: Terminal Assignment

      Options 7.3.3.2 Terminal Assignment Fig. 7-34 Namur Sensor, 2-wire system BN = brown BU = blue BK = black Fig. 7-35 Inductive proximity switch with switch contact, 3-wire-system The damping element for the inductive proximity switch and the Namur sensor has to consist of magnetic material.

    • Page 179: Technical Data Vsm100

      Options 7.3.4 Technical Data VSM100 Fig. 7-37 Dimensions VSM100 General data Power supply: 24 VDC +10/-15 % SELV Current consumption: 60 mA Housing: Polyamide 6.6 (panel: polycarbonate) Dimensions: 65x70x35 mm Weight: ca. 80 g Flammability: UL-94 V0 (panel: UL-94 V2) Mounting position: as desired Installation:…

    • Page 180: Expansion Module For Lsb — Lem100

      Options Digital speed feedback input Input pulse width: min. 200 μs Environmental Conditions Operation: Climatic conditions Class 3K5 according to DIN EN 60721-3 Mechanic conditions Class 3M5 according to DIN EN 60721-3 Temperature range -20 … +60 °C (condensation is prohibited) Transport: Climatic conditions Class 2K3 according to DIN EN 60721-3…

    • Page 181: Electrical Connection

      DC-Supply (low voltage) CAN/LSB CAN interface from BT300 NOTICE You will find wiring, cable length and definition of the interface in the respective documentation of the field bus systems: LAMTEC SYSTEM BUS LSB – print no. DLT6095 PROFIBUS – print no. DLT6100…

    • Page 182: Galvanic Isolation

      Options 7.4.3.1 Galvanic Isolation Fig. 7-38 Electrical isolation LEM100 FELV Functional Extra Low Voltage Cannot be used as safety measure against electrical shock. SELV Safety Extra Low Voltage offers protection against electrical shock. DANGER! Attention! Short-circuit danger! An improper wiring connection could lead to a short-circuit, which may cause damages to the connected devices or to an electrical shock.

    • Page 183: Field Bus Modules

      7.5.1 Field Bus Module for PROFIBUS PBM100 The burner control system communicates via LAMTEC SYSTEM BUS (LSB) with its modules consistently. PROFIBUS module PBM100 integrates LAMTEC burner control system into field bus environment (PROFIBUS). PBM100 listens for different, measured process values on…

    • Page 184: Dip Switch

      Options 7.5.1.1 DIP Switch Use DIP switches to configure settings of PBM100. Functions of DIP switches DIP switches 1 — 7 Binary coded PROFIBUS address Switch no. 1 = bit 6 Switch no. 7 = bit 0 Example: LSB family is set by DIP switch 8-9. DIP switch 8 DIP switch 9 LSB family…

    • Page 185: Electrical Connection

      NOTICE You will find wiring, cable length and definition of the interface in the respective documentation of the field bus systems: LAMTEC SYSTEM BUS LSB – print no. DLT6095 PROFIBUS – print no. DLT6100 7.5.1.4 PROFIBUS Communication While PBM is connected to PROFIBUS MASTER in active way, following messages were sent…

    • Page 186
      Options Byte position Description Note 14 — 15 Operating mode O controller v 3.0 and higher: Byte 15 active curve set Byte 14 condition corresponding to 7.5.3 Appendix 16 — 17 Error information O controller v. 3.0 and higher: Bit pattern corresponding to 7.5.3 Appendix 18 — 19 Actual value O Actual value O…
    • Page 187: Technical Data Pbm100

      Options 7.5.1.5 Technical Data PBM100 Fig. 7-40 Dimensions PBM100 PBM100 Power supply: 24 VDC +10/-15% via bus terminals Current consumption: 100 mA Housing: PA6.6 UL94-V0 Cover: Polycarbonate, transparent Installation: Support rail TH35 according to EN 60715 Dimensions (H x W x D) [mm]: 72 x 51 x 70 Weight [g]: Flammability:…

    • Page 188: Field Bus Module For Modbus Tcp Ebm100

      7.5.2 Field Bus Module for MODBUS TCP EBM100 The burner control system communicates via LAMTEC SYSTEM BUS (LSB) with its modules consistently. The MODBUS module EBM100 integrates LAMTEC burner control system into fieldbus environment (MODBUS TCP). EBM100 listens for different, measured process val- ues on LSB, processes these signals and transfers them to fieldbus.

    • Page 189: Leds

      Options 7.5.2.3 LEDs EBM100 has 4 LED and 2 additional LED at the RJ45 socket, which should be connected as described below: Colour Description green ON: Module working in normal mode = fully initialised and without any fault. green OFF: No communication or CAN BUS error Flashing with 2 Hz: Sporadic errors (optional, if a CAN warning is detectable).

    • Page 190
      Options Condition Flashing Flashing Flashing either – Device started – Connection error CAN and Ethernet – Device started – Connection error CAN – Ethernet OK – Fieldbus master not connected – Error in initialising Ethernet – Error in initialising CAN either –…
    • Page 191: Electrical Connection

      NOTICE You will find information to wiring, cable length, and interface definition in the documentation of the particular fieldbus systems: LAMTEC SYSTEM BUS LSB – document no. DLT6095 Ethernet Connection – document no. DLT6096 7.5.2.5 Ethernet Communication Sending Data on the Modbus/TCP (Master-Input-Data) In the table below input data are specified, which EBM transfers to the master (Modbus/TCP –Client):…

    • Page 192
      Options Register Description Configuration Active curve set Bit pattern corresponding to 7.5.3 Appendix table ’Bit Pattern curve set’ Condition of digital outputs Bit pattern corresponding to 7.5.3 Appendix Value 0 to 250  0,0 % to 25,0 % Setpoint value O Operating mode O controller v 3.0 and higher:…
    • Page 193: Technical Data Ebm100

      Options Holding Description – Configuration register Status of firing rate controller setpoint Validity bit 15 =1 (b1XXXXXXX XXXXXXXX): sets analysis of setpoint shift by LCM Smooth setpoint shift of firing rate controller (int16), value range is defined by config- ured upper and lower limits Status smooth setpoint shift of firing rate controller Validity bit 15 =1 (b1XXXXXXX XXXXXXXX): sets analysis of setpoint shift by LCM…

    • Page 194: Appendix

      Options Environmental Conditions Operation: Climatic conditions Class 3K5 according to DIN EN 60721-3 Mechanic conditions Class 3M5 according to DIN EN 60721-3 Temperature range -20 … +50 °C (condensation is prohibited) Transport: Climatic conditions Class 2K3 according to DIN EN 60721-3 Mechanic conditions Class 2M2 according to DIN EN 60721-3 Temperature range…

    • Page 195
      Options Digital input Active (bit pattern) Boiler safety interlock circuit 0x0080 Safety interlock circuit oil 0x0040 Firing rate + 0x0020 External high firing-rate acknowledgement 0x0010 (always 1) Air pressure monitor 0x0008 Gas pressure > Min 0x0004 Ignition acknowledgement 0x0002 Curve set selection = curve set 1 0x0001 Bit Pattern Curve Set Curve set…
    • Page 196
      Options Description Value controller inactive at SETTING/DELETE MEMORY controller inactive due to O value too small during pre-purge controller inactive due to O value too high during pre-purge controller inactive due to O -value too high after ignition controller pre-purge and ignition Bit Pattern Cause of Failure O Trim Failure cause…
    • Page 197
      Options Bit Pattern Cause of Failure CO Controller Failure cause Active (Bit pattern) No valid threshold information on LSB available 0x0001 Probe voltage out of monitoring range 0x0002 Probe offset voltage out of monitoring range, or no dynamics 0x0004 Cell resistance out of monitoring range 0x0008 Cell temperature out of monitoring range 0x0010…
    • Page 198
      Options Value Description Switched OFF Permanent purge ON Pre-purge gas Leakage test for pre-purge 2 Leakage test for pre-purge 1 Ignition position gas Ignition transformer gas Ignition pilot burner gas Ignition gas safety time 1 has expired Ignition gas safety time 2 is running Control of ignition firing-rate gas Switch OFF gas valve 1 Switch OFF gas valve 2…
    • Page 199: Disposal Notes

      Disposal Notes Disposal Notes The device contains electrical and electronic components and must not be disposed of as do- mestic waste. The local and currently valid legislation absolutely must be observed.

    • Page 200: Declaration Of Conformity

      Declaration of Conformity Declaration of Conformity…

    • Page 201
      Declaration of Conformity…
    • Page 202
      Declaration of Conformity…
    • Page 203: Appendix

      Appendix Appendix 10.1 Display Symbols Hint 4: No effects of the CO/O controller. Hint 6: The number of 250 000 burner starts has exceeded. Hint 7: Maintenance mode is active. Hint 8: Fuel selection is missing. Hint 9: Safety interlock chain boiler is not closed (symbol is flashing). Hint 10: Air pressure is still pending.

    • Page 204: Indication Symbols

      Appendix Hint 1096: Maintenance of the burner is necessary. Hint 2001: The time running between the signal ’Valve is open’ and the signal ’Flame’ is relatively long. Hint 2002: Dynamic test of the fuel/air ratio control is running. Hint 2003: No burner release but the signal ’Burner ON’…

    • Page 205
      Appendix Under the INFO path, you can obtain information regarding: • Burner • Fault • Software version • Display of the check sums • Serial number • Servomotor position (current flap position per channel) • Digital input/output Use MANUAL for: •…
    • Page 206
      Appendix Check sums Display of operating hours [selected] Number of burner starts Burner at fault [selected] Digital input [selected] Digital output Password [selected] Access level (e.g. 1) Delete curve Display programme settings…
    • Page 207
      Appendix Burner firing-rate controller settings Read continuous output configuration Password settings Curve settings Display settings Length of pre-purge time Length of post-purge time Pilot burner oil operation Valve leakage test Pilot burner gas operation…
    • Page 208
      Appendix Valve leakage test On/Off Valve leakage test before ignition Valve leakage test after ignition Length of valve leakage test time…
    • Page 209
      Appendix…
    • Page 210
      The information in this publication is subject to technical changes. LAMTEC Meß- und Regeltechnik für Feuerungen GmbH & Co. KG Wiesenstraße 6 D-69190 Walldorf Telefon: +49 (0) 6227 6052-0 info@lamtec.de Telefax: +49 (0) 6227 6052-57 www.lamtec.de Printed in Germany | Copyright  2017…
    • Page 1
      Manual BT300 BurnerTronic Sensors and Systems for Combustion Engineering www.lamtec.de…
    • Page 3: Table Of Contents

      Table of Contents Table of Contents Important Information about the Manual ……..6 Validity of these Instructions.

    • Page 4
      Table of Contents 4.8.2 Direction of Rotation/Position Damper Closed ……55 4.8.3 Detection of Actuators with Transposed Connections ….56 4.8.4 Adjusting of Actuators .
    • Page 5
      Table of Contents 5.3.7.2 Access Rights ……….130 5.3.7.3 BurnerTronic .
    • Page 6
      Table of Contents 7.4.2 LEDs …………186 7.4.3 Electrical Connection .
    • Page 7: Important Information About The Manual

      Important Information about the Manual Important Information about the Manual Validity of these Instructions This manual is valid for the burner control system BurnerTronic BT300 in any configuration. The information contained in this document refer to the software versions BT300 v3.5 and UI300 v3.8.

    • Page 8: General Safety Instructions

      General Safety Instructions General Safety Instructions Classification of the Safety Instructions and Warnings The following symbols are used in this document to draw the user’s attention to important safe- ty information. They are located at points where the information is required. It is essential that the safety information is observed and followed, and that applies particularly to the warnings.

    • Page 9: Product-Specific Dangers

      The BT300 is a safety device! The device must not be opened, interfered with or modified. LAMTEC assumes no liability for damages arising as a result of unauthorised interference! • After commissioning and after each maintenance action check the exhaust gas values across the entire power range.

    • Page 10: Commissioning Notes

      General Safety Instructions 2.2.1 Commissioning Notes • Check all safety functions during commissioning! • There is no feature to prevent RASTx connector plugs being transposed. Therefore en- sure the correct assignment of the plant’s plugs prior to commissioning. • Check electromagnetic emissions specific to the application. •…

    • Page 11: Basic Device

      General Safety Instructions 2.2.1.2 Basic Device Check the following items prior to commissioning: • Valves must be assigned correctly to valve outputs on BT300. • Correct setting of time parameters (especially safety and pre-purge times). • Flame sensor functioning well in case of: •…

    • Page 12: Checking The Fuel/Air Ratio Control System

      General Safety Instructions 2.2.2.2 Checking the Fuel/Air Ratio Control System Save setting values (curve parameters) for actuator elements, fuel and combustion air through the complete range of burner firing rate in sufficient number. Select setting values of fuel and combustion air considering combustion chamber pressure, fuel pressure, temperature and pressure of the combustion air in order to guarantee proper operation with adequate excess air through the entire range of burner firing rate.

    • Page 13: Installation Notes

      General Safety Instructions NOTICE Damaging the servomotors with 1.2 Nm and 9.0 Nm through opening. Opening the servomotor destroys the servomotor. The warranty expires. Installation Notes • Lay high-voltage ignition cable always separately and in safe distance from device and other cables.

    • Page 14: Electrical Connection Flame Sensor

      General Safety Instructions Electrical Connection Flame Sensor Interruptions and losses in signal transmission need to be minimised: • Do not wire the sensor cable with other cables. Flame signal is reduced through line capacities.  Use a separate 7-pole cable. •…

    • Page 15: Product Description

      Product Description Product Description Functional Description BT300 combines the benefits of an electronic fuel/air ratio control system with up to three mo- torised actuator elements and optional modules like an analogue output for speed control of the combustion air fan with an electronic burner control unit. The leakage test, flame monitor- ing system, power control unit and (optional) CO/O controller for control and optimisation of an oil or gas-fired forced-draught burner are all integrated.

    • Page 16: Life Cycle

      A cutting and clamping technique (SKT) * B screw terminals * 2 RAST2.5 plug connector for actuator, User interface and LAMTEC SYSTEM BUS in cutting and clamping technique * please note plug-in direction The designed lifetime is not the warranty time specified in the Terms of Delivery…

    • Page 17
      Product Description Fig. 3-1 Dimensions BT320 … 340 (terminal assignment BT330/BT340 only) Fig. 3-2 UI300 side view Fig. 3-3 UI300 front view Fig. 3-4 UI300 panel cut-out…
    • Page 18
      Product Description Function Power supply: 230 V +10/-15 % 47-63 Hz 115 V +10/-15 % 47-63 Hz (on request) Maximum backup-fuse: 10 A slow-blow To be used only in a grounded power line network! Power consumption: max. 30 VA 1 A Switching threshold of ionisation current: Digital signal inputs:…
    • Page 19: Actuator

      Product Description Environmental Conditions Temperature range -20 … +60 °C/-4 °F … +140 °F (condensation is prohibited) Transport: Climatic conditions Class 2K3 according to DIN EN 60721-3 Mechanic conditions Class 2M2 according to DIN EN 60721-3 Temperature range -20 … +70 °C/-4 °F … +158 °F (condensation is prohibited) Storage: Climatic conditions…

    • Page 20
      Product Description 1 15.4 (+0.3/-1) including axial play 2 Cap cannot be removed by hand 3 Flexible control cable (black), length 1.5 m 4 Plug connector (RAST 2.5) pole number 6 5 Brass tube and M4 x 30 DIN 912 cylinder bolt fixed with O-ring Function Power supply 24 VDC ±20 %…
    • Page 21: Actuators 662R5001

      Product Description NOTICE Damaging the 0,8 Nm actuator by opening the actuator. Do not open the actuator at another part as the cover of the electric connection, otherwise the actuator will be damaged. The warranty expires and is invalid.  Do not open the actuator but at the cover of the electric connection. 3.3.2.2 Actuators 662R5001…

    • Page 22
      Product Description Fig. 3-6 Dimensional drawing of motor type 0R5001-1 and type 662R5003-1 with cable Fig. 3-7 Dimensional drawing of motor type 660R5009-0 without cable but with plug…
    • Page 23
      Product Description Function 662R5001… 662R5003… 662R5009… Power supply: 24VDC ±20 % Floating time 5 s/90° 5 s/90° 15 s/90° Direction of rotation 0° left — view to the drive shaft to 90° Effective 1.2 Nm 3 Nm 9 Nm output torque (both directions of rota- (both directions of rota- (both directions of rotation)
    • Page 24: Flame Sensor/Flame Scanner

      Product Description 3.3.3 Flame Sensor/Flame Scanner Fig. 3-8 KLC 1000 Fig. 3-9 Dimensions KLC 1000 (1 = radial scanning opening) KLC10/KLC1000 Input Data Power supply: KLC10: 120 VAC -15/+10 % 50-60 Hz KLC1000: 230/240 VAC -15/+10 % 50-60 Hz Current consumption: 5,5 mA Optical Evaluation Spectral range:…

    • Page 25
      Product Description Fig. 3-10 Dimensions of angle adapter for KLC 2002 Fig. 3-11 Dimensions KLC 2002 KLC20/KLC2002 Input Data Power supply: KLC20: 120 VAC -15/+10 % 50-60 Hz KLC2002: 230/240 VAC -15/+10 % 50-60 Hz Current consumption: 3 — 4 mA Optical Evaluation Spectral range: 380 — 1150 nm…
    • Page 26: Mounting And Functions

      Mounting and Functions Mounting and Functions System Overview Fig. 4-1 System overview of BurnerTronic BT300…

    • Page 27: Connecting Diagrams

      Mounting and Functions Connecting Diagrams X30 = User Interface UI 300 Maximum cable length X31 = LSB Option X01-X6+X08: 10 m X32 = continuous output 1, e.g. air damper X07+X09: 20 m X33 = continuous output 2, e.g. gas damper X10: 20 m X34 = continuous output 3 (optional)

    • Page 28: Optional Connections For The Fuel Line

      Mounting and Functions When running oil/gas burning applications (BT340 in combination with DFM300), the function ’Gas > min’ is aligned with X05. Put in oil/gas applications, the pressure monitoring for ’Oil pressure > min.’ in the oil safety ► interlock chain (SIC). 4.2.1 Optional Connections for the Fuel Line Fuel valve (gas side)

    • Page 29: Optional Connections For The Flame Scanner

      Mounting and Functions Oil pressure min sensor Oil valve 1 stage Oil valve 2 stage Oil valve 3 stage Fig. 4-4 Fuel train — oil 3-stage Oil pressure min sensor Oil valve for modulated operation, oil valve 1 stage at 2-stage operation Oil valve 2 stage at 2-stage operation Optional ignition valve…

    • Page 30
      Mounting and Functions Fig. 4-8 Connecting diagram of the sensor Honeywell IRD1020 Fig. 4-9 Connecting diagram of sensor Honeywell IRD1010, KLC10, KLC20, KLC1000 or KLC2002 Colour code BK = black; BN = brown; BU = blue Fig. 4-10 Connecting diagram F300K via power pack FN20 (also valid for F200K) Fig.
    • Page 31
      Mounting and Functions Dimensional Drawings Fig. 4-12 Dimensional drawing F200K Fig. 4-13 Dimensional drawing F300K Fig. 4-15 Dimensional drawing KLC1000/KLC2002 side view Fig. 4-14 Dimensional drawing KLC1000/KLC2002 top view 1 Radial opening (with KLC1000 only)
    • Page 32: Lsb Module Integration

      Mounting and Functions 4.2.3 LSB Module Integration EBM100 may be used as an alterna- tive field bus module instead of PBM100 Alternative CO/O measurement LEM100 can be used as an alternative to LCM100 to connect LSB to BT100 CO/O measurement Fig.

    • Page 33
      2x2x0,60 twisted pairs with shielding, impedance 120 Devices on LAMTEC SYSTEM BUS (LSB) must be connected in serial/row (see Fig. 4-17 Se- rial BUS connection). The first and the last participant on LSB must be terminated with a ter- mination resistor of 120 . All the other BUS participants are not allowed to be connected to any termination resistor at all.
    • Page 34: Flame Monitoring

      The following types of flame sensor for intermittent operation (burner switched off at least once every 24 hours) are valid for use. Manufacturer Type Settings P 800 Approval LAMTEC F152 with FFS07 o. FFS08 UV (up to v3.1) Continuous contact (from v3.3) F200K with FN20 UV (up to v3.1)

    • Page 35: Flame Sensors

      Mounting and Functions WARNING! Danger from fuel ingress to combustion chamber after loss of flame! Improper use or configuration of flame sensors not approved for continuous operation can re- sult in hazardous situations and possible cause of explosion leading to loss of life and prop- erty.

    • Page 36
      Mounting and Functions NOTICE To avoid any disturbance, do not align the detector direct to the ignition spark. Breakdowns during pre-purge procedure may occur. The maximum length of the connection must be in accordance with the technical data. Install the detector connection cable with most possible distance to the ignition cable or the mains cable.
    • Page 37: Klc 10/Klc 1000

      Mounting and Functions KLC 20/KLC 2002 switches the flame relay ON – the red LED is permanently ON. After 9 sec. the switching output is disconnected – the red LED flashes. NOTICE Due to the safety function of the disturbance frequency cut-off, a flame simulation is not pos- sible by means of a simple art source of light.

    • Page 38
      Mounting and Functions CAUTION! For safety reasons and within the technical regulations, a controlled burner shut-down of the burner must occur and be guaranteed to happen at least once in every 24 hours of operation. Operating Indicator LED The flame detector KLC 10/KLC 1000 indicates the following operating conditions and flame signal strengths via the built-in LED.
    • Page 39: Process Sequence Charts

      Mounting and Functions Process Sequence Charts Key to process sequence charts Any condition Waiting for safety interlock chain gas, scan of air pressure monitor min. Time for pressure build-up in the gas test line (available with activated leakage test) 2,4 s Actuator running time 30 s — 60 s Delay of the recirculation damper…

    • Page 40
      Mounting and Functions Fig. 4-19 Oil with pilot burner BT300…
    • Page 41
      Mounting and Functions Fig. 4-20 Oil without pilot burner BT300…
    • Page 42
      Mounting and Functions Fig. 4-21 Gas with pilot burner and leakage test BT300…
    • Page 43
      Mounting and Functions Fig. 4-22 Gas without pilot burner and leakage test BT300…
    • Page 44: Leakage Test For Main Gas Valves

      Mounting and Functions Fig. 4-23 Leakage test BT300 Leakage Test for Main Gas Valves 4.5.1 Calculation Example With BT300 the gas pressure monitor is also applicable to the monitoring of minimal gas pres- sure. Therefore the minimal gas pressure of the burner must be set. The valve leakage test time t3 (P 311) would be set by BT300.

    • Page 45
      Mounting and Functions Example 1 Burner capacity =1000 KW Fuel = natural gas H, calorific value = 10 kW/m Nominal volumetric flow of the gases = 100 m Leakage rate max. = 0,1 m /h or 100l/h Example 2 Burner capacity =1000 KW Fuel = propane, calorific value = 25,9 kW/m Nominal volumetric flow of propane = 38,6 m Leakage rate max.
    • Page 46
      Mounting and Functions Leakage rate in l/h leak Absolute pressure on the switching point of pressure monitor (adjusted over- pressure + atmosphere pressure) Adjusted overpressure on switching point of pressure monitor sw e Output pressure on gas valve V2 during purge out e Atmospheric pressure (average of 101,3 kPa at sea level) Test volume between the valves…
    • Page 47: Leakage Test Process Flow

      Mounting and Functions 4.5.2 Leakage Test Process Flow The valve leakage test checks if the main gas valves are sealed. For this purpose the gas pressure of the supply is analysed. As valve leakage test section (space between the two main valves) burns empty whenever the burner is switched off, this part is usually pressureless at start-up (gas pressure >…

    • Page 48
      Mounting and Functions Fig. 4-25 Leakage test process diagram…
    • Page 49: Reaction On Gas Deficiency

      Mounting and Functions 4.5.3 Reaction on Gas Deficiency If main gas 1 valve is open and the pressure drops below the minimum pressure, gas deficien- cy is detected. This causes a safety shut down and fault indication H611. Further reactions are depending on the settings in P301 (automatic restart).

    • Page 50: Staged Operation

      Mounting and Functions Fig. 4-27 Wiring proposition for purge of gas line via roof in combination with BurnerTronic Staged Operation Function BT300 has not only the ability of shifting the burner firing rate in oil operation infinitely but 2- stage and 3-stage. Therefore oil valve 2 and oil valve 3 is switched ON and OFF depending on the position of air channel 1.

    • Page 51
      Mounting and Functions Fig. 4-28 Switching threshold of stage operation Switch-on point valve 2 P 528 … P 530 Parameters 528 … 530 Switch-off point valve 2 S1 … S3 Threshold 1 … 3 Switch-on point valve 3 Internal firing rate Switch-off point valve 3 Ignition point Firing Rate Controller…
    • Page 52: Flue Gas Recirculation

      Mounting and Functions NOTICE When using TPS input via X9.x P 531, P 532, P 533 and P 534 are not necessary. Example for a 2 stage oil burner with firing rate controller by LCM100: Situation: • The burner has only one air flap at channel 1. •…

    • Page 53: Actuator

      Mounting and Functions Negative pressure created by the combustion air fan can be used as an alternative to a recir- culation fan to aspirate flue gases. For this method of flue gas recirculation it is sufficient to monitor the combustion air fan. It is not possible to use a VSD controlled recirculation fan with the BT300 system.

    • Page 54: Detection Of Actuators With Transposed Connections

      Mounting and Functions 12 o’clock position  P 458 — P 460 = 0 • 9 o’clock position  P 458 — P 460 = 1 • 4.8.3 Detection of Actuators with Transposed Connections While replacing BT300 make sure actuators are re-connected to the correct channel. Label the plugs/cables to prevent faults or use the ’transposition test’…

    • Page 55
      Mounting and Functions External, mechanical stop on channel 2 for detection of transposition External, mechanical stop on channel 1 for detection of transposition Operational range Reference mark Fig. 4-30 Actuators 662R5001…, 662R5003…, 662R5009 Reference mark Internal mechanical stop Max. angle of rotation for detection of transposition External, mechanical stop on channel 1 for detection of transposition…
    • Page 56: Operating Control And Displays

      Operating Control and Displays Operating Control and Displays User Interface UI300 5.1.1 UI300 User Interface Display BACK key Cursor keys ENTER key Fig. 5-1 User Interface Display The display shows in pictogram: • the menu structure • operating status • parameters •…

    • Page 57
      Operating Control and Displays INFO MANUAL SETTINGS DATA PROCESSING (release level 1 is mandatory) INFO Select INFO path for information about the following: • Burner • Faults/Fault history • Software version • Display of check sums • Serial number • Actuator positions (current damper position for each channel) •…
    • Page 58: Main Menu

      Operating Control and Displays 5.1.3 Main Menu INFORMATION menu path [selected] Display of fuel type Bar graph of internal firing rate in % (0 — 100) MANUAL menu path SETTINGS menu path Release level DATA HANDLING menu path Window number Fig.

    • Page 59: Burner Details

      Operating Control and Displays 5.1.4.1 Burner Details Displaying Operating Hours and Burner Starts Display of operating hours Number of operating hours in total (device connected with mains) Number of operating hours in oil operation Number of operating hours in gas operation Display of burner starts Number of burner starts in oil operation Number of burner starts in gas operation…

    • Page 60: Recalling Fault History

      Operating Control and Displays 5.1.4.2 Recalling Fault History Displaying Burner Faults Fault code (Last 10 faults are stored, No. of operating hours when no. 01 is the latest fault) fault has occurred D1 Diagnostic code 1 Duration of the fault D2 Diagnostic code 2 NOTICE Information concerning fault and diagnostic codes can be found in the list of fault codes.

    • Page 61: Software Version

      Operating Control and Displays Fault unlock How to unlock BT300  A fault is pending and the ENTER key is flashing. 1. Press ENTER key. BT300 is not locked anymore. Changing from fault unlock to main menu:  A fault is pending and the ENTER key is flashing 1.

    • Page 62: Serial Number

      Operating Control and Displays The checksum shows whether the value of one or more parameters have been changed. 5.1.4.5 Serial Number UI = Serial numberUI300 BT = Serial number BT300 5.1.4.6 Positions of Actuators Indication of the channel’s actual (left to right): Channel 1 (oil) Channel 2 (air) Channel 3 (oil)

    • Page 63: Check Digital Inputs/Outputs

      Operating Control and Displays 5.1.4.7 Check Digital Inputs/Outputs Check Digital Inputs and Outputs Fuel selection oil Fan ON/OFF Fuel selection gas Fault Burner ON Ignition transformer ON/ Oil pressure min. is present Ignition valve ON/OFF Gas pressure min. is present SIC* oil is closed SIC* boiler is closed Oil pump OFF…

    • Page 64: Manual Menu Path

      Operating Control and Displays 5.1.5 Manual Menu Path MANUAL Select MANUAL path to carry out actions as follows: Switching burner ON and OFF Presetting of burner firing rate Start burner manually Adjust burner firing rate NOTICE At least release level1 is mandatory to start the burner. The ’Burner ON’…

    • Page 65: Fault Indication

      Operating Control and Displays 5.1.6 Fault Indication Displaying Burner Faults Fault code (Last 10 faults are stored, No. of operating hours when no. 01 is the latest fault) fault has occurred D1 Diagnostic code 1 Duration of the fault D2 Diagnostic code 2 NOTICE Information concerning fault and diagnostic codes can be found in the list of fault codes.

    • Page 66: Settings Menu Path

      Operating Control and Displays Fault unlock How to unlock BT300  A fault is pending and the ENTER key is flashing. 1. Press ENTER key. BT300 is not locked anymore. Changing from fault unlock to main menu:  A fault is pending and the ENTER key is flashing 1.

    • Page 67: Password

      Operating Control and Displays 5.1.7.1 Password Reset access level Enter password to get access level 5.1.7.2 Program Sequence Duration pre-purge period Duration post purge period valve leakage test Pilot burner gas operation Pilot burner oil operation…

    • Page 68
      Operating Control and Displays Set duration of pre-purge period Parameter number UI Parameter modifications are transferred BT = Parameter number BT300 Parameter modifications are discarded NOTICE Both values are identical – Confirm with The values are different – Cancel with NOTICE Pre-purge starts as soon as damper reaches pre-purge position and — if you use a VSM — the last but one point of fuel/air ratio curve is passed.
    • Page 69
      Operating Control and Displays Set duration of the post-purge NOTICE Both values are identical – Confirm with The values are different – Cancel with…
    • Page 70
      Operating Control and Displays Valve Leakage Test Valve leakage test ON/OFF P802 P802 = 0 = Valve leakage test OFF P802 = 1 = If valve leakage test before ignition is configured, the test runs during ignition. P802 = 2 = If valve leakage test before ignition is configured, the test runs after pre-purge.
    • Page 71
      Operating Control and Displays Activate pilot burner in gas operation Pilot burner ON Pilot burner OFF Activate pilot burner in oil operation Pilot burner ON Pilot burner OFF Ignition point Firing rate points 200, 250, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800, 900, 999 S 0 …
    • Page 72
      Operating Control and Displays NOTICE The following firing rate points are available: Ignition point , 200, 250, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800, 900, 999 Use BACK key to switch to menu settings after having completed curve settings. NOTICE Pressing while setting firing rate points discards the modifications.
    • Page 73: Configuration Of The Actuators

      Operating Control and Displays NOTICE The points are approached from above by using the overshoot-function. If you use the over- shoot-function in operation, you must program all points from above. Only if you do so, the required position will match the actual position. 5.1.7.3 Configuration of the Actuators Displaying the Actuators’…

    • Page 74: Deleting Curves

      Operating Control and Displays NOTICE The actuators are running to the new position immediately after the modification. To adjust channel 4 the fan motor must be running. The feedback setpoint curve of channel 4 must rise continuously. Pressing key BACK for longer than 2 s in menu ’Curve settings of the actuators’ causes a fault shut down.

    • Page 75: Ui300 Settings

      Operating Control and Displays CO/O Controller Settings • ON/OFF • Correction mask • Correction spreading Trim Settings • Correction range • Testing O trim • curve settings • Delete O setpoint curve or optimisation curve • Adjusting P term and dead time •…

    • Page 76: Edit Parameter

      Operating Control and Displays 5.1.7.8 Edit Parameter Setting Parameters up to Release Level 2 NOTICE Only parameters of the present release level can be modified.

    • Page 77: Menu Path Dataset Processing

      Operating Control and Displays 5.1.8 Menu Path Dataset Processing Saving/Restoring BT300 Dataset Saving dataset from BT300 Transfer dataset to BT300 NOTICE Check the checksum for equality each time after saving the data: Check the settings from chapter 2.4 Installation Notes after transferring data to BT300: Other Displays No connection between UI300 and BT300 UI300 User Interface pictogram…

    • Page 78
      Operating Control and Displays Termination Communication error pictogram connection unavailable Fig. 5-4 Termination Error Mode H120 Failure number Diagnostics 1 Diagnostics 2 Failure occurs at that time Fig. 5-5 BT300 ferror mode CO/O2 Hint Number of the currently pending hint. The hint can be released by the RESET but- ton.
    • Page 79
      Operating Control and Displays CO/O2 Fault Number of the currently pending fault. The fault can be released by the RESET button. Fig. 5-8 CO/O fault CO Faultr Number of the currently pending fault. The fault can be released by the RESET button.
    • Page 80: Lsb Remote Software

      Resolution of the display 1024 x 768 pixel 5.3.1.2 Install Software The remote software visualises parameters and curve data of the end devices on LAMTEC SYSTEM BUS (LSB). Values are edited and saved. A USB-CAN module connects the end device via LSB. For this purpose, install the driver for the USB-CAN module.

    • Page 81: Install Software

      Operating Control and Displays The current status of the end device, which is determined by the settings for the parameters and curve data can be saved (backed-up) in a data set on the PC. Once backed-up, these data sets can then be restored later to reproduce a certain status in the BT300. You will find a schematic diagram in chapter 4.1 System Overview.

    • Page 82
      Operating Control and Displays Fig. 5-14 Software setup assistant 3. Select ’Next’. The window to select destination folder opens. Fig. 5-15 Select destination folder 4. Specify the folder where the LSB Remote Software should be installed. A warning if the folder already exists is displayed. 5.
    • Page 83
      Operating Control and Displays Fig. 5-16 Select start menu folder 6. To proceed, select ’Next’ 7. Create a program short cut. a) Check the box to launch an icon for the application on the desktop. Fig. 5-17 Create a desktop icon 8.
    • Page 84
      Operating Control and Displays Fig. 5-18 Select USB-CAN drivers 10. «Next» to continue, «Cancel» to exit. NOTICE Do not connect an USB-CAN converter to the computer during installation of the USB-CAN driver! 11. Click on “Install“ to start the installation. Otherwise select «Cancel» to cancel the installa- tion.
    • Page 85
      Operating Control and Displays Fig. 5-20 Installation in progress The progress bar shows installation process. NOTICE As soon as the bar fills up the USB-CAN driver setup starts. Do not connect a USB-CAN converter to the computer during installation of the USB-CAN driver! 12.
    • Page 86
      Operating Control and Displays Fig. 5-22 Start window of the USB-CAN driver installation Select ’Next’ to start installation. 14. Read and accept the license agreement. Then proceed by clicking “Next”. (The ’Next’ button will be active after accepting the license agreement. Fig.
    • Page 87
      Operating Control and Displays Fig. 5-24 Preparing USB-CAN-driver installation «Next» to continue, «Cancel» to exit. 16. Fill out the fields in the following window Fig. 5-25 User information «Next» to continue, «Cancel» to exit. 17. Select installation folder for installation of USB-CAN-driver.
    • Page 88
      Operating Control and Displays Fig. 5-26 Selection of the installation folder «Next» to continue, «Cancel» to exit. 18. Read following information carefully and answer question with ’YES’. NOTICE It is important that you read the information window thoroughly and fully understand its con- tents.
    • Page 89
      Operating Control and Displays Fig. 5-28 Selection of the components «Next» to continue, «Cancel» to exit. 20. Confirm selection of storage folder for program’s short cuts (standard = start menu). Fig. 5-29 Storage of short cuts «Next» to continue, «Cancel» to exit. 21.
    • Page 90
      Operating Control and Displays Fig. 5-30 Additional functions «Next» to continue, «Cancel» to exit. 22. Additional options regarding driver update Fig. 5-31 Additional options «Next» to continue, «Cancel» to exit. 23. Select “Install“ to start the installation. Otherwise select «Cancel» to cancel the installation.
    • Page 91
      Operating Control and Displays Fig. 5-32 Start the driver installation 24. The installation starts. The bar indicates the progress of the installation. Wait until the bar fills up. Fig. 5-33 USB-CAN driver installation Process 25. During installation you will receive the following security prompt.
    • Page 92
      Operating Control and Displays Fig. 5-34 Security dialogue Select “Install“ to continue 26. When the installation is completed you will receive the following version information. Fig. 5-35 Important information regarding the USB-CAN driver version «Next» to continue 27. Complete the driver installation by clicking “Finish”…
    • Page 93
      Operating Control and Displays Fig. 5-36 Driver setup has been completed 28. Connect the USB/CAN module to the computer. As soon as the module is connected to the system the system recognises the module and starts installing the driver software. 29.
    • Page 94: First Connection With The End Device

      Operating Control and Displays Fig. 5-38 USB/CAN module is now ready to use 30. End the installation by clicking “Close” The installation is completed and the LSB Remote Software can be used. 5.3.1.4 First Connection with the End Device NOTICE If you start the software without connected and available USB-CAN module you will receive the following message: Fig.

    • Page 95: Release Codes/Release Levels

      This code is pro- vided by LAMTEC in combination with an USB-CAN module. Access to the input mask for this activation code is available either via menu (Options >> Enter…

    • Page 96: Offline/Online

      Operating Control and Displays 1. Click Key icon in the bottom left The following entry mask opens: Fig. 5-42 Dialogue window Access code NOTICE The activation code applies exclusively to one particular USB-CAN module in each case. For entering a code this USB-CAN module has to be connected already. NOTICE If a USB-CAN module is present, the serial number ’Systec SN’…

    • Page 97: Online Mode

      1. Connect USB/CAN converter directly with SUB D 9 plug for LSB to LCM100. 2. Connect USB/CAN converter via USB to the PC. Call up the LSB Remote Software 1. Select the path C: ProgrammeLamtec. 2. Double-click LSBRemote.exe The initial screen opens.

    • Page 98
      Operating Control and Displays Fig. 5-44 Initial screen LSB Remote Software Initial screen Select function (pictograms) Device list Menu bar Device status ’Set online’ button 3. Select device type BT300. 4. Click button ’set Online’. The following ’device selection’ window opens: Fig.
    • Page 99
      Operating Control and Displays 5. Select device you want to establish a connection with and press OK to confirm. The software starts to establish a connection. Fig. 5-46 Reading data On display ’Set online’ orange and green progress bars are displayed showing status of synchronisation of PC’s data with data of the connected device.
    • Page 100
      Operating Control and Displays Fig. 5-48 Change customer abbreviation NOTICE The customer ID process must be carried out for each device once. This process sets pass- words specific to each customer. The customer ID cannot be deleted or changed. Enter Password Entering the level 1 password 1.
    • Page 101
      Operating Control and Displays 3. Enter your customer password for access level 1 in the ’Password’ text box. 4. Click the ’Set password’ button. Access to all level 1 functions is granted now. NOTICE The ’Check password’ button allows you to check the validity of the password. Edit Parameter 1.
    • Page 102
      Operating Control and Displays 4. Select parameter group 5 (System). You can now set properties for UI300 User Interface. NOTICE For changes in parameter group 5 no additional confirmation is necessary. NOTICE Parameter group 10 ’Maintenance’ is without function at present. NOTICE Parameter groups 15 to 35 were described in relation to corresponding system options.
    • Page 103
      Operating Control and Displays Parameters of Operating Modes Fig. 5-53 Parameters of the operating modes * available with BT340 only…
    • Page 104
      Operating Control and Displays Controller Parameters For setting the control parameters the LSB Remote Software is providing special input win- dows. According to the access level functions can be activated/deactivated and values can be edited within these windows. Call up windows through parameter sub menu. Fig.
    • Page 105
      Operating Control and Displays Fig. 5-56 Window for setting O trim parameters Fig. 5-57 Window for setting CO control parameters…
    • Page 106: Read Out Faults

      Operating Control and Displays Fig. 5-58 Window for setting correction parameters NOTICE You will find settings of the CO/O control in the commissioning supplement for «Integrated CO/O control», print no. DLT1207. 5.3.3 Read Out Faults 1. From the ’BurnerTronic’ menu, select the sub menus ’Histories’ and ’Fault history’. The window for selecting the fault history opens.

    • Page 107
      Operating Control and Displays Fig. 5-60 Fault information Fault selection tab Description of fault Time that fault occurred (estimated) Burner status display…
    • Page 108
      Operating Control and Displays NOTICE The date and time of the fault are calculated basing on the operating hours accumulated at the time of the fault, the current BurnerTronic operating hours, and the computer time. If BT300 was disconnected from the mains after fault occurred and before fault has been read, the date and time of the fault will not be calculated correctly.
    • Page 109: Bt300 Curve Dialogue

      Operating Control and Displays Fig. 5-62 Temperature statistics NOTICE The temperature is measured directly on the circuit board of the BT300. Due to self-heating this temperature is always slightly higher the ambient temperature. 5.3.4 BT300 Curve Dialogue The curve dialogue window shows the setpoint curves of the channels (ratio controller) per curve set — either oil (1) or gas (2).

    • Page 110: Setpoint Graphic

      Operating Control and Displays 5.3.4.1 Setpoint Graphic Fig. 5-64 Setpoint graphic window 5.3.4.2 Curve Table Fig. 5-65 Curve table window…

    • Page 111: Set Curve

      Operating Control and Displays 5.3.4.3 Set Curve To make curve changes to BT300, change BT300 to ’setting mode’ first. Fig. 5-66 Setting dialogue NOTICE This function affects safety. The function must be re-confirmed within eight seconds. In setting mode of the curve set two functions of the device are available: Save point Delete curve set NOTICE…

    • Page 112
      Operating Control and Displays Fig. 5-67 Setting window NOTICE While using the overshoot-function you should program all points top down because they must be approached in overshoot-process that way. Only when you act according to this procedure the required position will match the actual position in operation. NOTICE Pre-purge starts as soon as the damper reaches pre-purge position and — if you use a VSM — the last but one point of the fuel/air ratio control curve is passed.
    • Page 113: Programming Of Fuel/Air Ratio Control

      Operating Control and Displays 5.3.5 Programming of Fuel/Air Ratio Control 1. Click on menu ’Curves (Fuel/Air ratio control)’. Fig. 5-68 Curves window 2. Click on button ’Start EI-Mode (Setting)’. 3. Press OK to confirm the message ’Setting start’. Automatic EI Mode is active now. NOTICE To use channel 4 set a continuously increasing curve! NOTICE…

    • Page 114
      Operating Control and Displays Take note of following information in this window: – A blue frame around curve and channels’ positioning information is indicating selection of channels you want to set. – Fields ’Setpoint’ show respective setpoint position of the actuator. –…
    • Page 115
      Operating Control and Displays Warm setting/Cold setting 1. Start the burner by connecting voltage on terminal X10 Pin 2/’burner on’. NOTICE Knowing the curve settings allows to adjust the burner in ’cold’ condition. The specifications are the same as in ’warm’ condition. In ’cold’ condition the burner is OFF. A red frame around the basic screen shows the burner’s actual state.
    • Page 116
      Operating Control and Displays Fig. 5-71 Values are read As soon as the point has been stored, the program reads the data back from BT300. Programming firing rate curve 1. Click button to select first curve point of the firing rate curve. Fig.
    • Page 117
      Operating Control and Displays Fig. 5-73 Programming the firing rate curve 3. Click on button to select a higher curve point of firing rate curve and adjust burner at this point. 4. Adjust burner this way up to the firing rate point 999 (nominal output). NOTICE Following firing rate points are available: 200, 250, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800, 900, and 999.
    • Page 118
      Operating Control and Displays Fig. 5-74 Programming of firing rate curve NOTICE You do not need to adjust all provided curve points on the firing rate curve. The BT300 inter- polates between two adjacent curve points linearly, regardless curve points in between are plausible or not.
    • Page 119: Programming A Staged Operation

      Operating Control and Displays 5.3.6 Programming a Staged Operation 1. Click in menu on ’Curves (Fuel/Air ratio control)’ Fig. 5-75 Curve selection Window ’Curves (Fuel/Air ratio control)’ opens. Fig. 5-76 Curves window 2. Click button ’Start EI-Mode (Setting)’. 3. Quit the message ’Start setting’ with OK. NOTICE Click button OK in the message during running time of the blue bar.

    • Page 120
      Operating Control and Displays NOTICE Take the following information from this window: A blue frame around curve and around channels’ position information indicates channel selection for setting. Fields ’Setpoint’ show setpoint position of the actuator. Fields ’Actual Value’ show actual position of the actuator. ’Big’…
    • Page 121
      Operating Control and Displays Fig. 5-78 Adjust stage operation Adjust levels finely (warm setting) 1. Connect voltage to terminal X10 Pin2 (burner ON) to start-up burner. Fig. 5-79 Status field — pre-purge [setting] 2. Wait until the burner is in control mode. 3.
    • Page 122
      Operating Control and Displays Fig. 5-80 Adjust ignition position in staged operation 4. Click button ’save point’ to confirm the settings. The point is stored. Once a point has been stored, the program reads the data back from the device . 5.
    • Page 123: Software Interface Lsb Remote Software

      Operating Control and Displays 8. Enter the values in field ’1  2’ and ’2  1’. Switch-on point and switch-off point of the 2 stage are adjusted. Fig. 5-82 Adjust 2 stage in staged operation 9. Click button to choose 2 stage of firing rate curve.

    • Page 124
      Operating Control and Displays Fig. 5-84 Menu file — active connection to device Fig. 5-83 Menu file — no connection to device Open dataset 1. Click on menu to ’open dataset’. The window for selecting data set opens. Fig. 5-85 Open dataset window (Language of window depends on language of operating system) 2.
    • Page 125
      Operating Control and Displays Save dataset 1. Click on menu to ’save dataset’. The window for saving dataset opens. Fig. 5-86 Save dataset window (Language of window depends on language of operating system) 2. Browse to directory you want to save your dataset to (destination folder). 3.
    • Page 126
      Operating Control and Displays Fig. 5-87 Dataset information 4. Enter information of dataset to be saved in text boxes. Button ’Print’  print of information. • Button ’Clear fields’  deletion of all entries in text boxes • Button ’Reload’  loading information of actual dataset •…
    • Page 127
      Operating Control and Displays Upload dataset to device 1. Click on menu to «Upload dataset into device». Window for opening dataset opens. Fig. 5-88 Upload dataset to device (Language of the window depends on language of operating system) 2. Browse to dataset you want to load and click on button «open». The window «dataset information»…
    • Page 128: Access Rights

      Operating Control and Displays NOTICE It is obligatory to document all parameter changes on the device. Note at least the date and the name of dataset. The dataset will be transferred. 7. Confirm message «Please CRC(s) receipt» with «OK». NOTICE Without confirmation or cancellation the device will remain in blocked mode.

    • Page 129: Burnertronic

      Operating Control and Displays Fig. 5-90 Menu access rights Enter password 1. The description, how to enter the password see chapter Enter Password Change password for customer-level 1 1. Click in menu on ’change password level 1’. The window for entering a new password opens. Fig.

    • Page 130
      Operating Control and Displays Fig. 5-92 Menu ’BurnerTronic’ Parameter 1. Find the description how to read or change parameters in chapter Edit Parameter. Reading level CRCs 1. Click in menu on ’Parameters’ >> ’CRCs level’. The window with CRC16 checksums of all level opens. The calculated parameters and the parameters of the remote device are compared.
    • Page 131
      Operating Control and Displays Get the current status of digital outputs of remote device. Fig. 5-94 Status of digital outputs Proceed cold check (check digital outputs) 1. Click in menu on ’Cold check’. The dialogue to proceed the check of outputs starts. Fig.
    • Page 132: Options

      Operating Control and Displays NOTICE Not confirming this message during default time with OK, aborts the process. The process can be repeated immediately. Cold check mode is activated now. To illustrate this status, the choice box of outputs re- ceives a red frame. 5.

    • Page 133
      Operating Control and Displays Fig. 5-97 Flash DLL client For more information see chapter 6.2 Firmware Update BT300 and chapter 6.3 Firmware Up- date UI300.
    • Page 134
      Operating Control and Displays USB-CAN (Systec) 1. Click in menu on ’USB-CAN (Systec)’. The USB-CAN window opens. Fig. 5-98 USB-CAN (Systec) 2. Click button to establish a connection to LSB module. 3. Click button to interrupt connection to LSB module. 4.
    • Page 135
      Operating Control and Displays Select language 1. Click in menu on ’Language’. Language selection window opens. Fig. 5-99 Changing language 2. Select language of LSB remote software and confirm with ’OK’. Activation Code 1. Click in the menu on ’Activation Code’. Activation Code window opens.
    • Page 136: Help

      Operating Control and Displays 5.3.7.5 Help In menu path ’Help’ it is possible to • call up help to LSB Remote Software • get information about version of LSB Remote Software Fig. 5-101 Menu help Getting help 1. Click in the menu on ’LSB Remote Software/User Manual F1’. The BT300 manual opens.

    • Page 137: Maintenance

      Maintenance Maintenance BT300 Data Back-Up At any time, you are able to create a protected data set (DS) for storage (back up) of current status of device. Therefore you must set LSB remote software to online mode. Fig. 6-1 Select the protected dataset menu In contrast to a ‘normal’ data set the protected data set includes storage of check sums of pa- rameter values (etc.).

    • Page 138: Firmware Update Bt300

      Firmware Updates can only be processed with LSB Remote Software version OEM-Level and higher. NOTICE To switch OFF the burner before starting the firmware update via LAMTEC SYSTEM BUS is mandatory! NOTICE Only one device of the same type as the one you want to update may be connected to LAMTEC SYSTEM BUS (p.

    • Page 139
      Maintenance 7. Click button ’Open HEX Image (HP)’ and search for the file containing the software of the main processor of the BT300 in the window ’Open HEX image’. 8. Repeat the procedure in no. 3 but click Button ’Open HEX Image (UP)’ and select the file containing the software of the watchdog processor of the BT300 in the window ’Open HEX image’.
    • Page 140
      Maintenance 12. The progress bar shows the progress of the update. 13. Software versions 1.12.0.0 and higher display a success message. 14. Software versions prior to V1.12.0.0 show the end of the update by a message from the boot loader of the respective device. 15.
    • Page 141: Firmware Update Ui300

      Maintenance Firmware Update UI300 Preparation of the UI300 firmware update 1. Connect LAMTEC SYSTEM BUS to your computer and start LSB Remote Software. 2. Do not set BT300 online. Switch on BT300. UI300 firmware update 1. Process the firmware update analogue to the BT300 firmware update. Start with step 3.

    • Page 142: Options

      Options Options Firing-Rate Controller Module LCM100 The LCM100 adds the function of a firing rate controller to the BurnerTronic. Additional com- ponents of the module are: – An integrated power supply for external 24 V consumers (sensors, additional BurnerTronic expansion modules) –…

    • Page 143: Range Limits

      Options 7.1.1 Range Limits You must set limit values in the parameters, switching the burner on and off. After a burner shut-down while actual temperature has not reached the switch-on threshold yet, a display will inform you that firing rate controller is refusing a start-up. Fig.

    • Page 144: Enter Setpoint Of Firing Rate Controller

      Options 7.1.2 Enter Setpoint of Firing Rate Controller Use the arrow keys to select switching point (ON or OFF) and to set switch- ing point afterwards. If you confirm settings with ENTER in a preset time slot, the value is stored in the parameter.

    • Page 145: Operating Description

      Options 7.1.3 Operating Description The burner start-up is carried out as described above. At least ’Burner ON’ signal and ’Re- lease’ must be sent by firing rate controller. The burner starts as soon as it is receiving signals ’Burner ON’ and ’Release’ from firing rate controller.

    • Page 146: Setpoint Changeover

      Options External Setpoint Presetting For the external setpoint values to be activated, parameter 40 must be set to the value 2 (con- trol by atmospheric condition). The terminals 25, 26 and 27 must be short-circuited. At terminal 16 (-) and 17 (+) of the LCM100, a 0/4 … 20 mA would be connected. Lower limit P 52 Upper limit…

    • Page 147: Start-Up Sequence

      Options 7.1.6 Start-up Sequence The firing rate controller has a start-up cycle in order to slow down burners’ firing rate while starting. The start-up cycle is passed during each new burner start. The internal firing rate is held at user-adjusted value (P 0044) as long as the boiler is cold. The actual value is below parameter set limit (P 0043.

    • Page 148: Control Range

      Options 7.1.8 Control Range The control range is located around setpoint. The content of ’burner ON’ parameter is sub- tracted from setpoint to form switch-on value. ’Upper control range’ parameter value (P 0055) is added to setpoint to form the upper limit of control range. The control range may therefore be located asymmetrically around setpoint.The shut-off range is limited by ’Burner off’…

    • Page 149: Aides For Setting

      Options value. I > → faster approximation to setpoint → danger of overshooting! • D term The difference term is calculated from variation of actual values. This may result in accel- erating, respectively retarding effects. In practice adjustments of PID-controller is orientated by given controlled system. Out of char- acteristics of the controlled system data can be deduced, i.e.

    • Page 150: External/Manual Firing-Rate Presetting (Terminals 16 — 19)

      Options Characteristic Control Process Control Mode Start-up Procedure I term higher decrease of atten- stronger reaction with faster start-up with ten- uation tendency to oscillate dency to oscillate I term smaller increase of attenu- less reaction, less ten- slower start-up ation dency to oscillate Fig.

    • Page 151: Dip Switch

      Options Connection external/manual regular firing rate input (Terminal 16 — 19) Fig. 7-9 Connection possibilities of external firing rate input NOTICE If 0 … 10 V input is used for the presetting of the firing rate the sensor must be able to load the input of the LCM100 with 100 A to 0.

    • Page 152: Leds

      Options You can set LSB Family by DIP switches 2 — 3. DIP switch 2 DIP switch 3 LSB Family You can set sensor inputs by DIP switches 4 — 6. DIP switch 4 DIP switch 5 DIP switch 6 Input –…

    • Page 153
      Options TPS (Three-Point-Step) Potentiometer 0 … 10 V 4 … 20 mA R = 2.2 k — 22 k LED1 = Error LED2 = CAN data traffic LED3 = Power ON…
    • Page 154: Galvanic Isolation

      Options Cable assembly Type Shield Cable length max [m] Mains AC in 24 V external DC out BT-CAN Fuel measurement oil Fuel measurement gas Setpoint changeover Fault reset Flue gas temperature Ambient temperature Boiler water temperature Steam pressure Combination input 20 mA Combination input term.

    • Page 155: Terminal Assignment

      Options DANGER! Attention! Short-circuit danger and electrical shock! An improper wiring connection could lead to a short-circuit, which may cause damages to the connected devices or to an electrical shock.  Please ensure all connections on SELV have a safe separation from main voltage in wiring and with connected devices! 7.1.15.2 Terminal Assignment LCM100 has a 24 V power supply for pressure transmitter and for power supplies of other LSB…

    • Page 156
      CAN Interface (Terminal 10 — 13) Recommendation: Connect BT300 plug X31 to LCM100 by a prefabricated cable with LAMTEC Order No. 667P0515. The plug X31 is already installed on this cable and terminal numbers for LCM100 are marked on the wires.
    • Page 157
      Options CAUTION! Short circuit and electric shock! If the analogue standard signals are not separated from the mains, a buffer amplifier must be used for galvanic separation. Pressure sensor connections Fig. 7-20 Connection pressure sensor 2-wire-system * Fig. 7-21 Connection pressure sensor 3-wire-system * Fig.
    • Page 158: Technical Data Lcm100

      Options 7.1.16 Technical data LCM100 Fig. 7-24 Dimensions LCM100 General data Power supply: 90 — 250 V 47 — 63 Hz Power consumption: 18,2 VA Housing: Polyamide 6.6 (panel: polycarbonate) Dimensions: 65x70x80 mm Weight: 270 g Flammability: UL-94 V0 (panel: UL-94 V2) Mounting position: as desired Installation:…

    • Page 159
      Cable length max.: Digital inputs (setpoint switching and reserve input) Input frequency max.: 300 Hz Cable length max.: 10 m LAMTEC SYSTEM BUS Bit rate: 125 kbit/s Address: static LSB address, device family 1-4, selection with dip-switch Termination: integrated, activation with dip-switch…
    • Page 160: Dual Fuel Module Dfm300

      (e.g. oil pressure monitor during gas oper- ation) to be open. The DFM300 is connected to BT300 via LSB (LAMTEC SYSTEM BUS). DFM300 is providing a 230 VAC input for selection of current fuel.

    • Page 161
      Options Device Description Attributes 0525 BT300 Setting of number of stages for staged operation in oil mode (0 = modulated operation/ 1 = 2 stages/2 = 3 stages) 0 = 1 stage = modulated operation Group: 60 1 = 2 stages Min.: 0 2 = 3 stages Max.: 2…
    • Page 162: Dip Switch 1

      Options DIP switch 1 LSB terminating resistor deactivated LSB terminating resistor activated You can set LSB family by DIP switch 2-3. DIP switch 2 DIP switch 3 LSB Family DIP switches 4 — 6 are not assigned. 7.2.2 LEDs The DFM300 has 4 LEDs connected as mentioned below: Colour Description Fault (LED1)

    • Page 163: Electrical Connection

      Options 7.2.3 Electrical Connection LED1 = Error LED2 = CAN LED3 = Oil active LED4 = Gas active Signal Line Type Shield Cable length max. [m] Fuel valve 1 10 m — Gas valve 1/oil valve 1 Fuel valve 2 10 m — Gas valve 2/oil valve 2 Fuel valve 3 10 m — Gas valve 2/oil valve 2/ignition…

    • Page 164: Galvanic Isolation

      Options Signal Line Type Shield Cable length max. [m] SIC gas 10 m — input SIC fuel Ignition transformer gas 10 m — input ignition transformer Oil valve 1 10 m — input fuel valve 1 Oil valve 2 10 m — input fuel valve 2 Oil valve 3/ignition valve 10 m — input fuel valve 3 SIC oil…

    • Page 165: Terminal Assignment

      Options DANGER! Attention! Short-circuit danger and electrical shock! An improper wiring could lead to a short-circuit which may cause damages to connected de- vices or an electrical shock.  Please ensure all connections on SELV have a safe separation from main voltage in wir- ing and with connected devices! 7.2.3.2 Terminal Assignment Oil acknowledgement/Gas acknowledgement (Terminals 36;…

    • Page 166
      Options Fig. 7-29 Circuit diagram for modulating 2/3 stage oil and gas NOTICE You must integrate the oil pressure monitor into safety interlock chain oil. For the purposes of leakage test you must connect the gas pressure monitor to pressure monitor input of BT300.
    • Page 167: Technical Data Dfm300

      Installation: TS35 mounting rail as per EN 50022 or TS32 as per EN 50035 Connection cross section: 2.5 mm LAMTEC SYSTEM BUS Bit rate: 125 kbit/s Addressing: fixed LSB address, device family 1-4 selected by DIP switch Termination:…

    • Page 168: Adapter System Rast5

      Options Environmental Conditions Electronic safety: Degree of protection (DIN EN 60529) IP40 housing IP20 terminals 7.2.5 Adapter System Rast5 The burner is connected to DFM in general via BTR/Riaconn-screw terminal block. In order to connect DFM exactly the same way as BT300 which means directly at a mono-fuel burner the Rast5 module is transposing connectors provided by DFM.

    • Page 169
      Options Fig. 7-31 Connection Rast5 module…
    • Page 170
      Options Connection to burner Rast5 adapter offers following options to connect the burner: Connection Terminal type Plug Terminal Terminal assignment block GV1 Valve gas 1 X01-Gas GV2 Valve gas 2 X02-Gas X700 GV3 Valve gas 3 X03-Gas ZT Gas Ignition transformer X04-Gas ÖV1…
    • Page 171: Technical Data Rast5-Module

      Options Connection to DFM and BT300 Rast5 adapter offers following options to connect DFM and BT300: Connection Terminal type Plug Terminal Terminal assignment block to BT300 X028 X28-BT X706 Fuel selection to DFM X41-DFM Security chain gas X42-DFM Ignition transformer gas Security chain oil Ignition transformer oil firing rate input -…

    • Page 172: Variable Speed Drive Module Vsm100

      Use VSM and DFM only with BT300 software version 3.0.0.0 or higher. Software versionens before 3.0.0.0 do not support all necessary safety functions. Connect the RPM module VSM100 via LSB (LAMTEC SYSTEM BUS) to BT300. To insulate LSB from potential power supply voltage of BT300 a LCM100 or a LEM with power supply 24 VDC SELV is needed.

    • Page 173: Dip Switch

      Options Device Description Attributes 0403 BT300 Specification of channel 4 functions see P 400 Group: 50 Min.: 0 Max.: 6 Default: 0 Write: 2 Version: 1.0.0.0 0405 BT300 Channel release for curve set 1 Switch-off bit for each curve set. If bit ’x’ is set, channel in curve set ’x’ is in use. Group: 50 Define with this parameter active channel in a curve set.

    • Page 174
      Options DIP-Switch 1 LSB terminating resistor deactivated LSB terminating resistor activated You can set LSB family by DIP switch 2-3. DIP switch 2 DIP switch 3 LSB family Select sensor input with DIP switch 4 — 7 for acknowledgement and range of values settings. DIP switch 4 DIP switch 5 DIP switch 6…
    • Page 175: Leds

      Options 7.3.2 LEDs The VSM100 has 5 LEDs which should be connected as described below: Colour Relevance ERR (LED1) During normal operation LED is switched off. It will light up subject to following conditions: — Initialisation incomplete or not yet successfully com- pleted (e.g.

    • Page 176: Electrical Connection

      Options 7.3.3 Electrical Connection LED1 = Error LED2 = ON LED3 = CAN data traffic LED4 = Namur LED5 = 3-wire CAUTION! Short circuit and electric shock! If the analogue standard signals are not separated from the mains, a buffer amplifier must be used for galvanic separation.

    • Page 177: Galvanic Isolation

      Options Circuit Type Shielding Cable length max. [m] Speed feedback 0/4 … 20 mA Speed setpoint 0/4 … 20 mA Speed setpoint 0 … 10 V Input Output NOTICE If cable shielding is provided you must connect this shielding to an extra protected earth ter- minal.

    • Page 178: Terminal Assignment

      Options 7.3.3.2 Terminal Assignment Fig. 7-34 Namur Sensor, 2-wire system BN = brown BU = blue BK = black Fig. 7-35 Inductive proximity switch with switch contact, 3-wire-system The damping element for the inductive proximity switch and the Namur sensor has to consist of magnetic material.

    • Page 179: Technical Data Vsm100

      Options 7.3.4 Technical Data VSM100 Fig. 7-37 Dimensions VSM100 General data Power supply: 24 VDC +10/-15 % SELV Current consumption: 60 mA Housing: Polyamide 6.6 (panel: polycarbonate) Dimensions: 65x70x35 mm Weight: ca. 80 g Flammability: UL-94 V0 (panel: UL-94 V2) Mounting position: as desired Installation:…

    • Page 180: Expansion Module For Lsb — Lem100

      Options Digital speed feedback input Input pulse width: min. 200 μs Environmental Conditions Operation: Climatic conditions Class 3K5 according to DIN EN 60721-3 Mechanic conditions Class 3M5 according to DIN EN 60721-3 Temperature range -20 … +60 °C (condensation is prohibited) Transport: Climatic conditions Class 2K3 according to DIN EN 60721-3…

    • Page 181: Electrical Connection

      DC-Supply (low voltage) CAN/LSB CAN interface from BT300 NOTICE You will find wiring, cable length and definition of the interface in the respective documentation of the field bus systems: LAMTEC SYSTEM BUS LSB – print no. DLT6095 PROFIBUS – print no. DLT6100…

    • Page 182: Galvanic Isolation

      Options 7.4.3.1 Galvanic Isolation Fig. 7-38 Electrical isolation LEM100 FELV Functional Extra Low Voltage Cannot be used as safety measure against electrical shock. SELV Safety Extra Low Voltage offers protection against electrical shock. DANGER! Attention! Short-circuit danger! An improper wiring connection could lead to a short-circuit, which may cause damages to the connected devices or to an electrical shock.

    • Page 183: Field Bus Modules

      7.5.1 Field Bus Module for PROFIBUS PBM100 The burner control system communicates via LAMTEC SYSTEM BUS (LSB) with its modules consistently. PROFIBUS module PBM100 integrates LAMTEC burner control system into field bus environment (PROFIBUS). PBM100 listens for different, measured process values on…

    • Page 184: Dip Switch

      Options 7.5.1.1 DIP Switch Use DIP switches to configure settings of PBM100. Functions of DIP switches DIP switches 1 — 7 Binary coded PROFIBUS address Switch no. 1 = bit 6 Switch no. 7 = bit 0 Example: LSB family is set by DIP switch 8-9. DIP switch 8 DIP switch 9 LSB family…

    • Page 185: Electrical Connection

      NOTICE You will find wiring, cable length and definition of the interface in the respective documentation of the field bus systems: LAMTEC SYSTEM BUS LSB – print no. DLT6095 PROFIBUS – print no. DLT6100 7.5.1.4 PROFIBUS Communication While PBM is connected to PROFIBUS MASTER in active way, following messages were sent…

    • Page 186
      Options Byte position Description Note 14 — 15 Operating mode O controller v 3.0 and higher: Byte 15 active curve set Byte 14 condition corresponding to 7.5.3 Appendix 16 — 17 Error information O controller v. 3.0 and higher: Bit pattern corresponding to 7.5.3 Appendix 18 — 19 Actual value O Actual value O…
    • Page 187: Technical Data Pbm100

      Options 7.5.1.5 Technical Data PBM100 Fig. 7-40 Dimensions PBM100 PBM100 Power supply: 24 VDC +10/-15% via bus terminals Current consumption: 100 mA Housing: PA6.6 UL94-V0 Cover: Polycarbonate, transparent Installation: Support rail TH35 according to EN 60715 Dimensions (H x W x D) [mm]: 72 x 51 x 70 Weight [g]: Flammability:…

    • Page 188: Field Bus Module For Modbus Tcp Ebm100

      7.5.2 Field Bus Module for MODBUS TCP EBM100 The burner control system communicates via LAMTEC SYSTEM BUS (LSB) with its modules consistently. The MODBUS module EBM100 integrates LAMTEC burner control system into fieldbus environment (MODBUS TCP). EBM100 listens for different, measured process val- ues on LSB, processes these signals and transfers them to fieldbus.

    • Page 189: Leds

      Options 7.5.2.3 LEDs EBM100 has 4 LED and 2 additional LED at the RJ45 socket, which should be connected as described below: Colour Description green ON: Module working in normal mode = fully initialised and without any fault. green OFF: No communication or CAN BUS error Flashing with 2 Hz: Sporadic errors (optional, if a CAN warning is detectable).

    • Page 190
      Options Condition Flashing Flashing Flashing either – Device started – Connection error CAN and Ethernet – Device started – Connection error CAN – Ethernet OK – Fieldbus master not connected – Error in initialising Ethernet – Error in initialising CAN either –…
    • Page 191: Electrical Connection

      NOTICE You will find information to wiring, cable length, and interface definition in the documentation of the particular fieldbus systems: LAMTEC SYSTEM BUS LSB – document no. DLT6095 Ethernet Connection – document no. DLT6096 7.5.2.5 Ethernet Communication Sending Data on the Modbus/TCP (Master-Input-Data) In the table below input data are specified, which EBM transfers to the master (Modbus/TCP –Client):…

    • Page 192
      Options Register Description Configuration Active curve set Bit pattern corresponding to 7.5.3 Appendix table ’Bit Pattern curve set’ Condition of digital outputs Bit pattern corresponding to 7.5.3 Appendix Value 0 to 250  0,0 % to 25,0 % Setpoint value O Operating mode O controller v 3.0 and higher:…
    • Page 193: Technical Data Ebm100

      Options Holding Description – Configuration register Status of firing rate controller setpoint Validity bit 15 =1 (b1XXXXXXX XXXXXXXX): sets analysis of setpoint shift by LCM Smooth setpoint shift of firing rate controller (int16), value range is defined by config- ured upper and lower limits Status smooth setpoint shift of firing rate controller Validity bit 15 =1 (b1XXXXXXX XXXXXXXX): sets analysis of setpoint shift by LCM…

    • Page 194: Appendix

      Options Environmental Conditions Operation: Climatic conditions Class 3K5 according to DIN EN 60721-3 Mechanic conditions Class 3M5 according to DIN EN 60721-3 Temperature range -20 … +50 °C (condensation is prohibited) Transport: Climatic conditions Class 2K3 according to DIN EN 60721-3 Mechanic conditions Class 2M2 according to DIN EN 60721-3 Temperature range…

    • Page 195
      Options Digital input Active (bit pattern) Boiler safety interlock circuit 0x0080 Safety interlock circuit oil 0x0040 Firing rate + 0x0020 External high firing-rate acknowledgement 0x0010 (always 1) Air pressure monitor 0x0008 Gas pressure > Min 0x0004 Ignition acknowledgement 0x0002 Curve set selection = curve set 1 0x0001 Bit Pattern Curve Set Curve set…
    • Page 196
      Options Description Value controller inactive at SETTING/DELETE MEMORY controller inactive due to O value too small during pre-purge controller inactive due to O value too high during pre-purge controller inactive due to O -value too high after ignition controller pre-purge and ignition Bit Pattern Cause of Failure O Trim Failure cause…
    • Page 197
      Options Bit Pattern Cause of Failure CO Controller Failure cause Active (Bit pattern) No valid threshold information on LSB available 0x0001 Probe voltage out of monitoring range 0x0002 Probe offset voltage out of monitoring range, or no dynamics 0x0004 Cell resistance out of monitoring range 0x0008 Cell temperature out of monitoring range 0x0010…
    • Page 198
      Options Value Description Switched OFF Permanent purge ON Pre-purge gas Leakage test for pre-purge 2 Leakage test for pre-purge 1 Ignition position gas Ignition transformer gas Ignition pilot burner gas Ignition gas safety time 1 has expired Ignition gas safety time 2 is running Control of ignition firing-rate gas Switch OFF gas valve 1 Switch OFF gas valve 2…
    • Page 199: Disposal Notes

      Disposal Notes Disposal Notes The device contains electrical and electronic components and must not be disposed of as do- mestic waste. The local and currently valid legislation absolutely must be observed.

    • Page 200: Declaration Of Conformity

      Declaration of Conformity Declaration of Conformity…

    • Page 201
      Declaration of Conformity…
    • Page 202
      Declaration of Conformity…
    • Page 203: Appendix

      Appendix Appendix 10.1 Display Symbols Hint 4: No effects of the CO/O controller. Hint 6: The number of 250 000 burner starts has exceeded. Hint 7: Maintenance mode is active. Hint 8: Fuel selection is missing. Hint 9: Safety interlock chain boiler is not closed (symbol is flashing). Hint 10: Air pressure is still pending.

    • Page 204: Indication Symbols

      Appendix Hint 1096: Maintenance of the burner is necessary. Hint 2001: The time running between the signal ’Valve is open’ and the signal ’Flame’ is relatively long. Hint 2002: Dynamic test of the fuel/air ratio control is running. Hint 2003: No burner release but the signal ’Burner ON’…

    • Page 205
      Appendix Under the INFO path, you can obtain information regarding: • Burner • Fault • Software version • Display of the check sums • Serial number • Servomotor position (current flap position per channel) • Digital input/output Use MANUAL for: •…
    • Page 206
      Appendix Check sums Display of operating hours [selected] Number of burner starts Burner at fault [selected] Digital input [selected] Digital output Password [selected] Access level (e.g. 1) Delete curve Display programme settings…
    • Page 207
      Appendix Burner firing-rate controller settings Read continuous output configuration Password settings Curve settings Display settings Length of pre-purge time Length of post-purge time Pilot burner oil operation Valve leakage test Pilot burner gas operation…
    • Page 208
      Appendix Valve leakage test On/Off Valve leakage test before ignition Valve leakage test after ignition Length of valve leakage test time…
    • Page 209
      Appendix…
    • Page 210
      The information in this publication is subject to technical changes. LAMTEC Meß- und Regeltechnik für Feuerungen GmbH & Co. KG Wiesenstraße 6 D-69190 Walldorf Telefon: +49 (0) 6227 6052-0 info@lamtec.de Telefax: +49 (0) 6227 6052-57 www.lamtec.de Printed in Germany | Copyright  2017…

    Подогреватели двигателя Webasto позволяют легко запустить двигатель, прогреть салон и освободить от снега и льда стекла перед поездкой в морозную погоду. Проходит время и даже у такого надежного оборудования как Вебасто возникают различные неисправности и проблемы в работе.

    В данной статье мы рассмотрим неисправности и коды ошибок предпусковых подогревателей двигателя Webasto и способы их устранения.

    Неисправность Рекомендации по устранению
    Нет горения после первого и повторного пуска либо горение прекращается во время работы. Выключить подогреватель на короткое время и затем ещё один раз включить.
    Пжд перегревается, индикатор работы мигает. Проверить воздуховод на проходимость, остудить подогреватель, ненадолго выключить его, затем ещё один раз включить.
    Сработал ограничитель нагрева: перегрев из-за утечки охлаждающей жидкости. Устранить утечку, долить охлаждающую жидкость до уровня, предписанного производителем автомобиля, и нажать кнопку ограничителя нагрева.
    Слишком низкое бортовое напряжение в течение более 20 секунд. Зарядить аккумулятор. Выключить подогреватель на короткое время и затем ещё один раз включить.
    Забит трубопровод воздуха для горения или выхлопной трубопровод. Проверить трубопровод воздуха для горения и выхлопной трубопровод на проходимость.

    Если эти меры не привели к устранению неисправностей, подогреватель необходимо предоставить в сервисный центр Webasto.

    Webasto Thermo 50/90S/90ST/ 230/300/350

    При появлении неисправности срабатывает электронная блокировка, и подогреватель выдаёт код неисправности. Проверьте предохранители и штекерные разъёмы на их исправность и прочность крепления.

    Снять блокировку можно перезапустив подогреватель или вынув ненадолго при включенном пдж синий предохранитель 15 А на кабельном жгуте подогревателя.

    После установки предохранителя подогреватель включается. Если блокировка не снялась, нужно определить причину неисправности.

    Примечание! Блокировка подогревателя Wesasto является специальным режимом его работы. Блокировка включается, если система самодиагностики фиксирует неисправность (одну или несколько), дальнейшая работа с которыми может быть небезопасна, как для самого подогревателя, так и для транспортного средства, на котором пжд установлен. Сама по себе блокировка не является неисправностью, а является следствием одной или нескольких неисправностей. Причем, причина неисправности может быть совсем не в подогревателе.

    1531

    Webasto таймер 1531

    Если подогреватель оборудован таймером 1531 (с будильником), после аварийной блокировки на дисплей таймера выводится следующие коды ошибок.

    Код Неисправность
    F01 Пуск отсутствует.
    F02 Обрыв пламени (повторяется более 5 раз).
    F03 Падение напряжения ниже допустимого или повышение выше допустимого.
    F04 Преждевременное распознавание пламени.
    F05 Обрыв цепи или короткое замыкание датчика пламени.
    F06 Обрыв цепи или короткое замыкание датчика температуры.
    F07 Обрыв цепи или короткое замыкание дозирующего насоса.
    F08 Обрыв цепи, короткое замыкание или неправильное число оборотов мотора нагнетателя воздуха.
    F09 Обрыв цепи или короткое замыкание штифта накаливания.
    F10 Перегрев подогревателя.
    F11 Обрыв цепи или короткое замыкание циркуляционного насоса.
    F12* Аварийная блокировка вследствие повторяющихся неисправности или обрыва пламени: такая блокировка снимается путём повторного включения отопителя и его отключения от аккумулятора автомобиля в процессе запуска.

    Если подогреватель в качестве органа управления оснащён выключателем или таймером 1529 (без будильника), то коды ошибок передаются в виде световых сигналов (миганий). Отключите подогреватель, после коротких 5 миганий, выдаются длинные импульсы.

    Количество импульсов соответствуют числу после буквы F приведенных в таблице выше.

    термостат

    Webasto HL32 Heater Room Thermostat

    Webasto Thermo Pro 90

    Мигание индикаторной лампочки выключателя во время продувки подогревателя показывает вид неисправности подогревателя. После пяти коротких миганий отображаются длинные импульсы. Количество длинных импульсов соответствует коду ошибки из таблицы.

    Неисправен блок управления.

    Проверьте предохранители F1, F2 и F3.

    Замените блок управления в составе нагнетателя в сборе.

    Магистрали подвода воздуха для горения и отвода выхлопных газов.

    Проверьте уровень топлива.

    Проверьте состояние топливного фильтра.

    Проверьте забор топлива и топливные магистрали на герметичность.

    Удалите воздух из топливной системы.

    Проверьте магистрали подвода воздуха для горения и отвода выхлопных газов на наличие закупориваний и при необходимости очистите.

    Очистите горелку и при необходимости замените.

    Проверьте уровень топлива.

    Проверьте состояние топливного фильтра.

    Проверьте забор топлива и топливные магистрали на герметичность.

    Удалите воздух из топливной системы.

    Очистите горелку и при необходимости замените.

    Проверьте электрические подключения.

    Неисправен датчик температуры охлаждающей жидкости.

    Проверьте электрические жгуты на наличие повреждений, обрывов и коротких замыканий.

    Проверьте сопротивление датчика температуры охлаждающей жидкости, при необходимости замените.

    Неисправен топливный насос.

    Проверьте электрические жгуты на наличие повреждений, обрывов и коротких замыканий.

    Функциональная проверка топливного насоса, при необходимости замените.

    Защитная блокировка нагнетателя.

    Проверьте электрические жгуты на наличие повреждений, обрывов и коротких замыканий.

    Функциональная проверка нагнетателя, при необходимости замените.

    Неисправен штифт накала.

    Проверьте электрические жгуты на наличие повреждений, обрывов и коротких замыканий.

    Функциональная проверка штифта накала, при необходимости замените.

    Неисправен датчик температуры охлаждающей жидкости.

    Неисправен датчик перегрева.

    Проверьте уровень охлаждающей жидкости, удалите воздух из жидкостного контура. Проверьте работоспособность циркуляционного насоса.

    Проверьте электрические жгуты на наличие повреждений, обрывов и коротких замыканий. Функциональная проверка датчика температуры охлаждающей жидкости, при необходимости замените.

    Проверьте электрические жгуты на наличие повреждений, обрывов и коротких замыканий. Функциональная проверка датчика перегрева, при необходимости замените.

    Неисправен циркуляционный насос.

    Проверьте электрические жгуты на наличие повреждений, обрывов и коротких замыканий.

    Замените циркуляционный насос.

    Неисправен выключатель массы.

    Проверьте электрические жгуты на наличие повреждений, обрывов и коротких замыканий.

    Замените электронный выключатель массы.

    Неисправно реле включения салонного отопителя.

    Проверьте электрические жгуты на наличие повреждений, обрывов и коротких замыканий.

    Функциональная проверка реле, при необходимости замените.

    Неисправен датчик перегрева.

    Проверьте электрические жгуты на наличие повреждений, обрывов и коротких замыканий.

    Функциональная проверка датчика перегрева, при необходимости замените.

    Неисправен штифт накала.

    Проверьте электрические жгуты на наличие повреждений, обрывов и коротких замыканий.

    Функциональная проверка штифта, при необходимости замените.

    Неисправен датчик температуры выхлопных газов.

    Проверьте электрические жгуты на наличие повреждений, обрывов и коротких замыканий. Проверьте сопротивление датчика температуры выхлопных газов, при необходимости замените.

    Визуальный контроль и чистка горелки, жаровой трубы и теплообменника, при необходимости замените узлы.

    Неисправен датчик температуры выхлопных газов.

    Проверьте электрические жгуты на наличие повреждений, обрывов и коротких замыканий.

    Функциональная проверка датчика температуры выхлопных газов, при необходимости замените.

    Внимание! Неквалифицированный монтаж или ремонт оборудования Webasto может стать причиной пожара или привести к выбросу ядовитого моноксида углерода. Тем самым это может стать причиной тяжелых или смертельных травм.

    Webasto DBW 2010/2012/2020/2022/300/350

    Предварительная диагностика неисправностей предпусковых подогревателей двигателя Webasto DBW 2010/12, 2020/22 и Webasto 300/350.

    Электрические провода и соединения. Температурный предохранитель или ограничитель нагрева. Температурный предохранитель или ограничитель нагрева. Термостат регулировки обогрева или температурный датчик. Блок управления. Распылительное сопло. Система отопления.

    Webasto Thermo E 200/320

    Вид неисправности выдается с помощью мигающего индикатора режима работы. Индикатор начинает мигать с соответствующей частотой сразу после обнаружения неисправности, а при включении подогревателя мигает до проведения деблокировки.

    Импульсов Описание неисправности
    0 Неисправность блока управления.
    1 Отсутствие запуска после 2-х попыток.
    2 Обрыв пламени во время работы, неудачный повторный пуск.
    3 Повышенное/пониженное напряжение.
    4 Преждевременное распознавание пламени.
    5 Неисправность датчика пламени.
    6 Неисправность датчика температуры или реле защиты от перегрева.
    7 Неисправность электромагнитного клапана.
    8 Неисправность мотора нагнетателя воздуха / подогревателя держателя форсунки.
    9 Неисправность циркуляционного насоса.
    10 Сработало реле защиты от перегрева.
    11 Неисправность катушки зажигания.
    12 Блокировка подогревателя (повторяющийся сбой или повторяющийся обрыв пламени).

    Неисправности Webasto Thermo Top Evo Start, которые можно устранить самостоятельно

    При появлении неисправности проверьте состояние предохранителей и штекерных соединений, а также их правильную установку и подключение. При неисправности подогреватель переходит в состояние блокировки, которая не отображается на органах управления.

    Предупреждение! Работы по ремонту и техобслуживанию подогревателя требуют профессиональных знаний и применения специальных инструментов. Неправильно выполненная регулировка или техническое обслуживание могут привести к повреждению подогревателя и к несчастным случаям с серьёзными последствиями.

    Прежде чем обратиться в сервисный центр Webasto, попытайтесь сами снять блокировку по неисправности.

    Вы можете сами устранить следующие неисправности.

    Описание неисправности Возможные причины Меры по устранению
    Происходит автоматическое выключение подогревателя (аварийное отключение). Отсутствует горение после пуска и его повторения, пламя гаснет во время работы. Выключите и включите подогреватель (не более двух раз).
    Подогреватель не включается. Нет подачи электроэнергии к подогревателю. Проверьте электропитание подогревателя, а также его соединение на массу.
    Подогреватель выключается в режиме отопления (аварийное отключение). Подогреватель перегрелся из-за недостатка охлаждающей жидкости. Долейте охлаждающую жидкость в соответствии с рекомендациями изготовителя.

    Webasto Thermo Top Evo Start c таймером MultiControl Car

    Если во время работы предпускового подогревателя возникает неисправность, то он выдаёт на дисплей таймера код ошибки.

    таймер

    Таймер MultuControl Car

    Возникшая ошибка выводится на дисплей таймера в виде Txx (ошибки таймера) или Fxx (ошибки подключенного подогревателя), а также сигнализируется красным мигающим светодиодом.

    Неисправный выходной транзистор в MultiControl/SmartControl.

    Внимание: при появлении этой ошибки отопитель не может выключиться. Сразу же выньте предохранитель и обратитесь в сервисный центр для ремонта.

    Ошибки при подключенном через W-шину Thermo Top Evo Start

    Код (HEX) Расшифровка кода Дополнительная информация по ошибке
    01 Ошибка блока управления. Неисправен блок управления, оффлайн. Программирование не выполняетсяили неисправен датчик температуры ОЖ. Датчик неисправен.
    02 Нет запуска. После повторной попытки запуска горение не зафиксировано.
    04 Повышенное напряжение. Напряжение питания слишком долго превышало пороговое значение.
    05 Преждевременное распознавание пламени. Датчик пламени сигнализирует о наличии пламени до фазы горения.
    06 Перегрев подогревателя. Сработала защита от перегрева.
    08 Короткое замыкание в цепи насоса-дозатора. Замыкание на массу в цепи насоса-дозатора.
    0B Короткое замыкание циркуляционного насоса. Замыкание на массу в цепи циркуляционного насоса или перегрузка мотора.
    10 Короткое замыкание клапана переключения ОЖ. Замыкание на массу в цепи клапана переключения ОЖ.
    11 Неправильно запрограммированный блок управления. Неверный параметр блока управления или неправильно установленный отопитель (относительно вида топлива).
    12 Сбой связи по W-шине. Неисправность шины или ошибка протокола.
    13 Короткое замыкание в штатном вентиляторе автомобиля. Короткое замыкание или повышенный ток в цепи зелено-белого провода.
    15 Нагнетатель воздуха для горения заблокирован. Нагнетатель воздуха для горения не может вращаться.
    19 Короткое замыкание в цепи штифта накала. Замыкание на массу в цепи штифта накала.
    1B Короткое замыкание датчика перегрева. Замыкание на массу в цепи датчика перегрева.
    2D Неисправность в цепи нагнетателя. Скорость вращения нагнетателя воздуха ниже необходимого значения.
    2E Неисправность в цепи штифта накала. Сопротивление штифта накала находится вне допустимых значений.
    2F Обрыв пламени. Пламя погасло в процессе подогрева. Выполняется повторная попытка запуска,
    37 Слишком высокая температура ОЖ при первом вводе в эксплуатацию. Дополнительная информация недоступна.
    38 Первая попытка запуска неудачная. Дополнительная информация недоступна.
    39 Первая попытка запуска неудачна – нет повторного запуска. Дополнительная информация недоступна.
    3A Короткое замыкание в шине W-Bus/LIN-Bus. Дополнительная информация недоступна.
    3C Внутренняя ошибка блока управления 60. Дополнительная информация недоступна.
    3D Внутренняя ошибка блока управления 61. Дополнительная информация недоступна.
    3E Внутренняя ошибка блока управления 62. Дополнительная информация недоступна.
    3F Загружено неправильное программное обеспечение. Дополнительная информация недоступна.
    40 Обрыв штифта накала. Обрыв цепи штифта накала.
    4C Высокое напряжение при защите компонентов. Произошло отключение для защиты внутренних компонентов по причине экстремально высокого напряжения питания.
    4E Специальная ошибка 3. Дополнительная информация недоступна.
    81 Ошибка контрольной суммы EOL. Ошибка контрольной суммы EOL.
    82 Нет запуска в тестовом режиме. Нет запуска в тестовом режиме.
    83 Обрыв пламени. Количество обрывов пламени в процессе горения превысило значение счетчика FAZ (значение счетчика записано в EEPROM).
    84 Пониженное напряжение. Напряжение питания слишком долго было ниже порогового значения.
    86 Слишком высокая температура ОЖ без процесса горения. Ошибка записывается если температура ОЖ превысит 145 °C в регулировочной паузе.
    87 Постоянная блокировка отопителя. Включилась постоянная блокировка отопителя. Сбросить блокировку и произвести попытку включения отопителя.
    88 Обрыв насоса-дозатора. Обрыв цепи насоса-дозатора или замыкание ее на +12 В.
    89 Обрыв нагнетателя. Обрыв цепи нагнетателя воздуха или замыкание ее на +12 В.
    8B Обрыв циркуляционного насоса. Обрыв цепи циркуляционного насоса или замыкание ее на +12 В.
    90 Обрыв в клапане переключения ОЖ. Обрыв цепи клапана переключения ОЖ или замыкание ее на +12 В.
    92 Нет команды продолжения работы. Нет команды продолжения работы от органа управления.
    94 Обрыв температурного датчика. Обрыв цепи температурного датчика или замыкание ее на +12 В.
    99 Обрыв штифта накала. Обрыв цепи штифта накала или замыкание ее на +12 В.
    9C Время подогрева превысило время поездки. Расчетное желательное время работы отопителя превышено (защита от разряда АКБ).
    A9 Недостаточный поток охлаждающей жидкости. Ошибка возникает, если температура охлаждающей жидкости превышает пороговое значение перехода в регулировочную паузу во время фазы Start/Glow Plug Ramp/Flame Monitor Measuring (слишком быстрый нагрев ОЖ).
    AA S on W-Bus not succeed. S on W-Bus not succeed (nor or faulty response, even after repeating telegram four times).
    AB Обрыв датчика перегрева. Обрыв цепи датчика перегрева или замыкание ее на +12 В.

    Сброс блокировки Thermo Top Evo Start

    Пошаговая инструкция сброса блокировки предпускового подогревателя двигателя Webasto TT Evo Start:

    Надеемся данная статья помогла вам решить проблему с вашим предпусковым подогревателем. Оставляйте свои комментарии и вопросы ниже.

    Рекомендуем регулярно проводить техническое обслуживание и проверку автомобиля в сервисных центрах Webasto. Техническое обслуживание и любые ремонтные работы должны всегда выполняться в специализированных сервисных центрах Webasto. Там помогут определить объём необходимых работ и выполнят их на высшем уровне.

    Источники:

    https://autoclimate. online/error/heaters-webasto

    Понравилась статья? Поделить с друзьями:
  • Lada vesta ошибка p0504
  • Laravel обработка ошибок http
  • Lamtec bt300 коды ошибок
  • Laravel логи ошибок
  • Lampa ошибка подключения укажите ссылку для парсинга jackett